
Class j! 
Book__ 



DIRECTIONS 



FOR MAKING 



ANATOMICAL PREPARATIONS, 



FORMED ON THE BASIS OF 



POLE, MARJOLIN AND BRESCHET, 



AND INCLUDING 



THE NEW METHOD OF MR. SWAN. 



BY USHER PARSONS, M. D. 

PROFESSOR OF ANATOMY AMD tUROSRT. 



CAREY &, LEA. 

1831. 






EASTERN DISTRICT OF PENNSYLVANIA, To wit : 

BE IT REMEMBERED, that on the twentieth day of June, Anno Dom- 
ini one thousand eight hundred and thirty-one, 

CAREY & LEA, 

of the said district, have deposited in this office the title of a book, the title 
of which is in the words following, to wit : 

" Directions for making Anatomical Preparations, formed on the basis of 
Pole, Marjohn, and Breschet, and including the new Method of Mr. Swan. 
By Usher Parsohs, M D. Professor of Anatomy and Surgery." 

The right whereof they claim as proprietors, in conformity with an Act of Con- 
gress, entitled, " An Act to amend the several Acts respecting Copy Rights." 

D. CALDWELL, 
Clerk of the DistncL 



E. & G. MerrJam, Printera, Brookfield, Mass. 






TO 



WILLIAM E. HORNER, M. D 



Jlrofe^sor of ^natoms 



IN THE 



UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, 



THE FOLLOWING PAGES 



ARE RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED 



THE AUTHOR. 



PREFACE 



That a minute knowledge of anatomy is essential to 
success in the practice of physic and surgery, is an opinion 
so generally prevalent, that the assertion of it at the pre- 
sent day wears the air of a truism. Every student reads 
the remark in his books, hears it from his lecturer, sees its 
force in the clinical rounds of his instructor, and feels it 
when he commences practice. And if the young practi- 
tioner feels the want of anatomical knowledge when he 
has recently left the dissecting table and the halls of de- 
monstration, how much more sensible must he be of it, 
after years have elapsed, without affording him an oppor- 
tunity to refresh his memory by lectures or dissections. 
To obviate this inconvenience, various modes have been 
employed for preserving the different organs and textures, 
in a humid or dry state, to which the practitioner may 
refer as a substitute for recent dissection and demonstra- 
tion ; vvith this aim in view, the art of making anatomical pre- 
parations has been cultivated with great success and advan- 
tage. 

The art is of modern invention. Injecting and prepar- 
ing of the blood vessels certainly could not have been 
known prior to the discovery of the circuhition of the 
blood, nor have we any description of arterial preparations 
until the time of Ruysch, a professor of anatomy who died 
in 1731. His first anatomical nniscum was sold to Peter 
the Great, in 1717, and many specimens belonging to it, 
as well as a great number made subsequently, are still in a 



VI PREFACE. 

good state of preservation. His manner of preparing wet 
specimens, — of injecting the blood vessels, and of preserv- 
ing the flexibility of dried preparations, although he pro- 
fessed to have disclosed it, is supposed to have perished 
with him, since no one has yet succeeded in imitations 
that can be compared with those made by himself. 

Still however the common process for making and pre- 
serving injected preparations bears the name of Ruysch, 
and to this process many additions and improvements have 
been made by Dumeril, Breschet, Hunter, Pole, Marjolin, 
Charles Bell, Cloquet, Swan and some others, besides sev- 
eral valuable treatises on the art of injecting the lympha- 
tics, and numerous facts and observations, are contained in 
periodical publications. The substance of the following 
sheets, is principally drawn from the above writers, but 
chiefly from Pole,'^ to w^hich are added, such facts as 1 
could glean from some of the best practical anatomists of 
this country, and such observations as I have been able to 
collect during a year passed in the medical schools of 
Europe, and several years devoted to practical anatomy in 
this country. 

That a work like the present is wanted, appears evident 
from the fact, that several teachers of anatomy have con- 
templated publishing an edition of Pole, notwithstanding 
its numerous imperfections. I should however not have 
commenced the present work, had that of Pole been in 
circulation in this country. The few copies to be found 
are imported, and I have several times been at pains to 
order copies for my friends from London. 

Such a work Vvill, I am confident, be acceptable to 
students from the country, as by following its directions, 
they will.be able to preserve the dissections made at medi- 
cal schools, as memorials of their industry, and for refe- 



^ The sections copied Irom Pole are tnaiked \vit;i an {*) 



PREFACE. vii 

rence in their future practice. Even in cities, where sub- 
jects are easily obtained and dissected, and where public 
demonstrations are frequent, a student feels reluctant to 
destroy a fine piece of dissection that has cost him long 
protracted labour and pains to finish, although he may ex- 
pect to derive but little advantage from its preservation ; 
but in the country, where such specimens are the best, if 
not the only means he can enjoy for refreshing his memory, 
they possess a real and practical value ; for, with the 
exception of Massachusetts, whose legislature has nobly 
raised its voice in favour of practical anatomy, prejudice 
and legal impediments it is to be feared will long exist 
against its prosecution throughout the union, and especially 
in our country towns. 



INTRODUCTION. 



SEASON FOR DISSECTING AND FOR MAKING DRY 
PREPARATIONS. 

The extremes of heat and cold are unfavourable for 
dissections and making preparations, heat being the season 
for insects and rapid putrefaction, and cold congeals the 
subject, the subsequent thawing of which is attended with 
loss of time, hastens decomposition, and always impairs the 
beauty of the preparations. But the objections to mid- 
winter are removed where the accommodations are such as 
to moderate the intensity of cold. The late autumnal and 
early spring months are, however, decidedly preferable for 
long centinued dissections ; and it is well known to those 
who are conversant with the business, that for preserving 
subjects from decomposition, spring at the same tempera- 
ture, is more favorable than autumn. These remarks 
however, refer to preparations requiring long and patient 
dissection ; for other kinds, as macerated and corroded, the 
summer season may be even preferable. 

DISEASES OCCASIONED BY DISSECTIONS. 

Besides the diseases that may proceed from contagious 
affections of dead bodies and which every anatomist will 
know how to avoid, there are two pertaining to a dissecting 
room that require some notice. One of them is derange- 
ment of the stomach, sometimes attended with fever, and 
which is probably occasioned by putrid inhalations, per- 
haps by errors in diet and long exposure to cold, and is 
more common to ardent beginners ; the other is exten- 
sive and severe inflammation from slight wounds of the 
fingers, and absorption of poison from the subject. 
B 



X INTRODUCTION. 

The former affection may be prevented, first, by proper 
attention to diet, never visiting nor remaining in the dis- 
secting room with an empty stomach ; by nutricious well 
seasoned food and considerable exercise of the body in the 
open air, and by obviating a costive habit. Secondly, by 
attention to the air of the room both as respects temperature 
and cleanliness. The large cavities of a subject when 
cleared of their viscera may be sponged with clean water 
and sprinkled with chlorate of lime and the room freely 
ventilated. — When the emanations are very putrid and of- 
fensive, they may be entirely removed by a fumigating mix- 
ture like the following : 

Black oxyde of manganese and common salt pulverised, 
equal parts, by weight, to which add sulphuric acid, dilut- 
ed with three parts of water in a leaden or earthen vessel. 
Close the dissecting room, leaving the mixture in the centre 
of it in the evening, and by morning, the putrid smell will 
be entirely removed. 

Attention should also be paid to cleanliness of person. 
An apron with sleeves to it, made of shalloon, or brown 
linen, may be w^orn, and when this is wanting, a suitable 
coat to put on and off on entering and leaving the room 
may be substituted. 

When the symptoms of gastric disturbance which I have 
mentioned appear, the dissection should be suspended, for 
a day or two, and an active cathartic administered. 

The other affection arising from wounds of the fingers 
is of a more serious character. Chambar, Percy, Duncan, 
and Shaw, have each written treatises of some length on 
such wounds, from which I shall draw such facts as are 
most material to be known. The effects of such wounds, 
Mr. Duncan and Mr. Shaw, think, may be classed under 
two heads, forming cases which differ essentially from each 
other. The one is attended with immediate danger, and 
is generally the consequence of examining a body a few 
hours after death ; and proceeds with more certainty, from 
dissection of the bodies of persons who have died with in- 
flammation of some of the serous membranes. The other 



INTRODUCTION^. XI 

cases are more frequent, and less dangerous, and they occur 
more in common dissections, and particularly, in preparing 
bones or ligaments after long maceration. The symptoms 
attending this last kind of wound are the following : — the 
finger being scratched or pricked in the morning ; there is 
not much pain at the time, but it gradually increases to- 
wards evening; a little uneasiness is felt in the axilla, and 
next morning red lines can be perceived running up the 
arm. The finger is now excessively painful ; there are 
often slight rigors, and general uneasiness ; the counte- 
nance is anxious, tongue sometimes furred, and head-ache ; 
but there is not much fever. The finger then becomes 
rapidly swollen and livid, so as to call for immediate atten- 
tion, and the general system still more and more affected. 

In respect to the first, or malignant kind, which is morq 
likely to occur from examining a body that has died from 
peritonitis, in the form of hernia and puerperal fever ; or 
from pleurisy, there will, in five or six hours after receiving 
a scratch or puncture be a small pimple, or a blush of red. 
If the case proceeds in the usual manner, there will pro- 
bably be a darting pain up the arm, which seems to fix 
more particularly in the shoulder or side of the chest. 
Within fourteen hours, the patient is very ill ; he suffers 
a great deal of pain, and is anxious and alarmed. Red 
lines may generally be perceived running from the hand 
towards the axilla, but it sometimes happens that there are 
no marks on the arm, nor even on the finger. Indeed, the 
affection of the finger is occasionally so slight, " that it is 
neglected, and the patient refers all his suffering to the 
shoulder and chest. Vessications often appear, and the 
case may end in desquamation of the cuticle, or in suppu- 
ration with extensive sloughing, and a discharge of fetid 
matter, and in many instances, it proves fatal." 

The local treatment of botii kinds of the above mention- 
ed wounds, should be the same, at the moment they are inflict- 
ed. It consists in applying to the wound a drop of strong 
mineral acid or of caustic ; — the French prefer liquid muri- 
ate of antimony. But after this has been neglected, and 



XU INTRODUCTION. 

absorption has taken place, indicated by pain, &.c. such 
applications will be of no avail, and may aggravate inflam- 
mation. The best applications will then be of the soothing 
kind. Mr. Shaw recommends lint soaked in equal parts 
of Goulard's extract and laudanum, applied round the finger 
and along the arm. Emolient cataplasms are also recom- 
mended, but their weight gives pain and uneasiness. The 
French recommend leeches to the part. 

According to the same authors, the general treatment 
should be active aperients, such as rhubarb and jalap, with 
a little calomel, and to keep the patient at first almost in 
a state of intoxication, by laudanum and porter. Bleeding, 
although the pulse be much accelerated, he condemns. 

Should any abrasion or sore previously exist on the fin- 
gers of the dissector, the utmost care should be taken to 
shield it from the contact of the dead body, by proper 
dressing and a slip of bladder bound over it. 

CHOICE OF SUBJECTS. 

This must, of course, vary according to the kind of prep- 
aration intended to be made. For a perfect skeleton, the 
subject should be near, or a little passed, middle age, for 
if younger, the bones are not so fully developed, and in old 
age they contain oil, which is constantly appearing upon 
their surface. For exhibiting osteogeny, choose the bones of 
a foetus ; and for showing the vascularity of bones with 
minute injection, the bones of a young child are prefera* 
ble ; — To make a preparation of the bones of the head sep- 
arately, choose the bones of a young subject, before the 
age of puberty, and for the ossiculee of the ear, a child 
from birth to one or two years. The tympanum should 
here be preserved on one side, and partially removed on 
the other, taking care to preserve its centre, where the 
maleus is attached. For exhibiting the labyrinth by filing 
into the petrous portion, the temporal bone of an adult 
will be best. For exhibiting the deciduous and permanent 
teeth, choose the head of a child from five to eight years 
old, and file away the alveolar covering of the front teeth* 



INTRODUCTION. XIU 

To dissect and study the muscles, choose a robust, full 
grown subject that has died suddenly, and a male in pref- 
erence to a female. For making dry preparations of the 
muscles, take a subject of a strong muscular frame, 
whose death was occasioned by a short, but not putrid dis- 
ease. Great corpulency, as well as great leanness, and drop- 
sical subjects, are for obvious reasons unsuitable. 

For dissecting and studying the arteries and veins, 
choose an adult that is neither very plethoric nor very 
lean. For making a dry preparation of the blood-vessels of 
an entire body, an emaciated subject, from two to fourteen 
years is preferable, as being more easily dissected and dri- 
ed, and more conveniently handled, and less likely to be- 
come greasy after it is varnished : — For a head or extremi- 
ties, an adult not much beyond middle age, as after this 
period there will be a constant issuing of fat upon the sur- 
face, that will mar the beauty of the preparation ; but as 
the veins are more developed in advanced age, such sub- 
jects are best for shewing them upon the head. For minute 
injection, a full grown foetus is best, and may at the same 
time serve for exhibiting the foetal circulation, and for mak- 
ing many handsome preparations, to be hereafter described. 

For a wet or dry preparation of the cerebral nerves, 
choose an adult emaciated subject, of almost any age ; — 
but for the whole nervous system, a small emaciated subject, 
as it can be more conveniently preserved in spirit. 

For the lymphatics choose a full grown dropsical subject. 

SURGICAL OPERATIONS. 

Whatever be the kind of subject that has fallen into the 
hands of the student, and whatever may be his purpose as 
to its final destination, he should first perform such little 
operations upon it, as can be done without injuring it for 
injecting, and which he may be desirous of performing with 
dexterity upon the living body ; such as introducing the 
catheter and probang ; — passing a fine wire into the puncta 
lachrymalia, and introducing a probe from the lachrymal 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

sack through the nasal duct ; — pinching up the tunica con- 
junctiva with a pair of small forceps and clipping it with 
scissors, as is often required for severe opthalmia. After 
the subject is injected, he may take up the various arteries, 
as the carotid, subclavian, axillary, external iliac, and those 
of the extremities. He may also operate for hare-lip, per- 
form bronchotomy, &c. 

ORDER OF EXAMINATION OF THE LARGE CAVITIES. 

The tendency of the brain and other viscera of the large 
cavities to rapid putrefaction, requires their early removal. 
The brain mollifies so soon, that if the student intends 
examining it minutely, or to make a wet preparation of it, 
no time is to be lost by delaying the undertaking. 

The next organs to be examined and removed, are, the 
abdominal viscera, as their presence hastens decomposition. 
For this purpose make a crucial incision from the sternum 
to the pubis, and cross it with another near the umbilicus. 
In this way the viscera are more easily examined and re- 
moved, but the abdominal muscles are in some measure de- 
stroyed for dissection. Such however is the intricacy of 
this piece of dissection, that the student will hardly under- 
take it at first ; and the parts most interesting to the surgi- 
cal pupil, as the abdominal ring and surrounding ligaments, 
are uninjured by it. The viscera are to be examined in 
their natural situation, and then after passing a ligature 
round the oesophagus below the diaphragm, and round the 
rectum, they are to be removed, by dividing the suspensory 
ligament of the liver, turning it down from the diaphragm, 
dividing the cesophagus above the ligature, and raising the 
stomach, spleen and pancreas, leaving the branches of the 
coeliac and mesenteric arteries as long as practicable. The 
viscera may be subsequently examined, and made into sep- 
arate preparations, as hereafter direcled. 

The chest, it is presumed, has already been opened for the 
purpose of injecting the subject, if not, proceed as direct- 
ed for injecting the arteries, and remove such organs as are 
intended not to be preserved in connexion with the walls of 
the thorax. 



INTRODUCTION. XV 

The contents of the pelvis are to be removed, by dissect- 
ing the kidneys and passing them downward, or, by divid- 
ing the ureters, and dissecting round the several organs 
down to the sphincter ani. But if it is intended to preserve 
these organs in connexion with the pelvis ; the rectum is to 
be cleared and stuffed with curled hair, or oiled wool. 

The subject may now be dissected entire, or it may be 
divided among a class of four or five persons. 

MUSCULAR DISSECTIONS. 

Before he commences dissections, the student is presum- 
ed to be well acquainted with the skeleton. He is to begin 
his work by making an incision through the integuments, 
down to the muscles of each limb, commencing it near the 
trunk and extending it along in the direction of the large 
muscles. The limb or part dissected should be so placed as 
to keep the fibres of the muscles in a state of gentle exten- 
sion. The integuments are to be raised from the muscles, 
by drawing them aside, and laying the edge of the knife ob- 
liquely upon and in direction of the fibres, in order that all 
cellular substance may be removed without dividing them. 
The knife may be held in the fingers like a pen, and moved 
by them, rather than with the wrist or arm. After removing 
the integuments over muscles, all the cellular substance 
between them is to be dissected out, taking care not to 
divide the large nerves or blood-vessels, or such of their 
branches as are interesting in surgery. When the superfi- 
cial layer of muscles is fairly cleared of adipose substance, 
they may be raised or turned aside with hooks, or divided in 
the middle and turned back, for the purpose of exposing 
the deep-seated ones for dissection. The integuments are 
to be raised from the muscles no farther at a time than is 
necessary for the present dissection, and should afterwards 
be replaced upon the part, to keep it from drying and 
to protect it from dust ; and in warm weather the whole 
should be covered during the interim of dissection with a wet 
cloth, to keep it cool by evaporation. 



XVI JNTRODlJCTIOjr. 

It should be the object of the student to examine the 
muscles separately and in classes, according to their respec- 
tive offices ; to study their situation and direction with 
respect to the arteries and nerves, and other parts that are 
concerned in surgery. If not intended to be preserved, the 
muscles may after full dissection be removed, and the liga- 
ments and structure of the joints examined, before the 
bones are immersed for maceration. 

The student vi^ill hardly find it advantageous to make dry 
preparations of the muscles alone. They require as much 
attention, and are attended with as great expense, as when 
prepared with the blood-vessels, and unless he adopts the 
method of Mr. Swan hereafter described they will change 
in colour and size so much by drying, as to represent a 
recent dissection less satisfactorily than good plates. 

COMPARA.TIVE VALUE OF COLD AND WARM INJECTION. 

The comparative value of the two kinds of injection de- 
pends somewhat upon the kind of preparation intended to 
be made. For corroded preparations the cold injection is 
entirely unsuitable. For wet preparations it is immaterial 
which kind is used, excepting that the warm kind is attend- 
ed with loss of time and expense. For common dissec- 
tions, the cold injection is in most respects preferable, not only 
on account of the trouble and expense saved in heating the 
subject, and its not heating and crisping the aorta to the risk 
of its strength, but also for its withstanding the greatest heat 
of summer, when the warm kind is apt to liquify and ooze out 
from the orifices of divided branches. There is, however, a 
greater smoothness of the vessels that have been filled with the 
warm kind, which is pleasing to the eye of an anatomist. In 
respect to fineness, they will, either of them, if properly con- 
ducted, answer every purpose for surgical reference, 
though beyond this, I have found the cold injection succeed 
better than the warm, especially for filling vessels of the hol- 
low organs, and of the membranes of the large cavities. 
Therefore as respects utility and convenience I should, 
except for corroded preparations, prefer the cold injection. 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER I. 

ON MAKING DRY PREPARATIONS OF THE BLOOD 
VESSELS. 



Different kinds of injection. 



Formulae for coarse injections. 



Formulae for fine cold injection. 



SECTION L 



SECTION II. 



SECTION III. 



SECTION IV. 
Formulae for cold minute injection. 

SECTION V» 

Of warm injections. - - _ 

SECTION VI. 
Formulae for coarse warm injection. 



Formulae for fine injection. 



SECTION VIL 



SECTION VIII. 
Fomulae for minute warm injection. 

SECTION IX. 
Swan's plaster of Paris injection. 

SECTION X. 
Injecting instruments and manner of using them. 

SECTION XI. 
Directions for using the injecting syringe. 



Valves of the arteries and veins. 



SECTION XII. 



Page 

I 



2 

4 
4 

5 
7 
9 
10 
13 
14 
15 
18 



SECTION XIII. 
Injecting, dissecting and preparing an entire subject to exhibit the arteries and 
veins by cold injection. - - - . - - 19 

SECTION XIV. 
Injecting, dissecting and preparing an entire subject, to exhibit the arteries and 
veins by warm injection. - - - - - - *-t 



XVni CONTENTS. 



SECTION XV. 

Injecting and preparing the blood-vessels of separate portions of the" human 
body. - - - - - - ^ .- 3^ 

SECTION XVI. 
Injecting and preparing the head for the blood-vessels. - * 3^t 

SECTION XVII. 
Injecting the extremities for tracing and preserving the blood-vessels. 34 



SECTION XVIII. 
ood-vessels of an uj 
the head and thorax. - - - 35. 



Injecting and preparing the blood-vessels of an upper extremity in connex- 
ion with one side of 1 



SECTION XIX. 
Injecting and preparing the heart in situ with the adjacent vessels and tho- 
racic duct. ---_- --39, 

SECTION XX. 
Injecting the arteries and veins of the hands and feet with coloured injection 
for dissection or corrosion. - - - - ^ - 4t 

SECTION. XXL 
Injecting and preparing the heart. - - - - - 42- 

SECTION XXII. 
Injecting and making a dry preparation of the gravid uterus,^ - 45- 

SECTION XXIII. 
Injecting and preparing the uterus in its fullest state of distention. -- 47 

Injecting- a Foetus, to shew the course of the circulation in utero. See Ap* 
peudix^No,!. 306: 

SECTION XXIV. 
Minute injection of the foetus for making several preparations,- - 47 

Injecting and preparing Placentae. See Appendix, No. 2. 30Z 

SECTION XXV. 
Injecting of bones, and rendering them transparent, to shew their vascular- 
ity. - -^ ------ - 50 

SECTION XXVI. 
A minute injection of the cutis, intestines and abdominal viscera generally, to^ 
shew their vascularity. - - - _ -^ - 5g. 

SECTION xx^qi.- 
Injecting and preparing the head to preserve its natural and healthy appear- 
ance. - - - . - - - . 54. 

SECTION XXVIII. 
Injecting and preparing the penis. - - - - - 56 

SECTION XXIX. 
Injecting and preparing a testicle. - - - . . 57 

SECTION XXX. 
Preparation of the bladder, penis, and vesiculae seminales. - 58 

SECTION XXXI. 
Preparation of the pelvis. - - , . . . 61 



CONTENTS* XIX 

SECTION XXXII. Page 

iHjecting and preparing the system of the vena portg&. - - 62 

SECTION XXXIII. 
Protecting dried preparations from insects. - - - - 63 

SECTION XXXIV. 
Manner of drying preparations. - - - . , 65 

SECTION XXXV. 
Varnishing preparations. --«.-. 6S 

SECTION XXXVI. 
Composition of varnishes. ------ 68 

SECTION XXXVII. 
Frames for drying preparations. ----- 69 

SECTION XXXVIII. 
Preparing old and injured dry preparations. - - - 70 

CHAPTER II. 

CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 

SECTION XXXIX. 
Cfeneral observations on making corroded preparations. - - 73 

SECTION XL. 
Injecting and earroding the heart and vessels of the lungs. - 76 

SECTION XLI. 
Injecting and corroding the heart. - - - - - 77 

SECTION XLII. 
Injecting and corroding the liver. ----- 78 

SECTION XLIII. 
Injecting the spleen for corrosion, -» - - - - 79 

SECTION XLiV. 
Injecting kidneys for corrosion. - . - - - 79 

SECTION XLV. 
Injecting and corroding placentae. ----- 81 

SECTION XLVL 
A corroded preparation of the penis. - - - - gj 

SECTION XLVIL 
Injecting the pancreas for corrosion. - - , - 85 

CHAPTER III. 

QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 

SECTION XLVIII. 
General observations ; injecting instruments. - - - - 84 



XX CONTENTS. 

Page 
SECTION XLIX. 
Injecting the lymphatics with mercury. By Walter. -. - - 85 

SECTION L. 
Injecting the lymphatics. By Dumeril. - - - - - • 92 

SECTION LI. 
Injecting the lacteals with quicksilver. - - - - - 92 

SECTION LII. 
Injecting the parotid gland with quicksilver. - - , - - 94 

SECTION LIII. 
Injecting the lymphatics on the surface of the liver. - . . 95 

SECTION LIV. 
Injecting the lymphatics on the surface of the iungs. - - - 97 

SECTION LV. 
Injecting the veins in the kidney of a cat. - - - . 98 

SECTION LVI. 
Injecting the arteries and veins of the hand with quicksilver. - ~ 93 

SECTION LVII. 
Injecting the female breast with quicksilver. - - - - 101 

CHAPTER IV. 

PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 

SECTION LVIII. 
Wet preparations by distention with spirits of wine, oil of turpentine, &c. 103 

SECTION LIX. 
Preparation of the lungs in spirits of wine or oil of turpentine. - 104 

SECTION LX. 
Dry preparations by distention with air, hair, wool, cotton, quicksilver and 
plaster of Paris. -...--- 106 

SECTION LXI. 
Distended dry preparation of the larynx, trachea, pharynx and oesophagus. 107 

SECTION LXII. 
Distended preparation of the Eustachean tube. - - . 107 

SECTION LXIIl. 
Distended dry preparation of the hymen, bladder and rectum. - 108 

SECTION LXIV. 
Distended dry preparation of the heart to shew its internal structure. 109 

SECTION LXV. 
Distended dry preparation of the heart by quicksilver to shew its interior 
structure and the coronary vessels, * - - - HO 



CONTENTS. XXI 

SECTION LXVI. Pa^e 

Distended dry preparation of the uterus, vagina and hymen by quicksil- 
ver. - - - - - - - - no 

SECTION LXVII. 
Distended preparations by plaster of Paris. - - - - 111 

CHAPTER V. 

WET PREPARATIONS. 

SECTION LXVIII. 
"Various antiseptic hquids. - - - -- - 113 

SECTION LXIX. 
Preserving the natural colour of specimens of morbid anatomy. - 116 

SECTION LXX. 
Vessels proper to contain wet preparations. - - - - 118 

SECTION LXXI. 
Preparing and inclosing wet preparations. - - - - 119 

CHAPTER VI. 

PREPARATION AND PRESERVATION OF THE BRAIN 
AND NERVES. 

SECTION LXXII. 
Preservation of the Brain. ..--__ i2'ft 

SECTION LXXIII. 
Dissection of the nei-ves of the orbit, face and head to shew their distribu- 
tion. ---------126 

SECTION LXXIV. 
Dissection of the nerves of the neck and trunk. - - - 12^ 

SECTION LXXV. 
Preparation of the cerebral nerves after dissolving the bones in an acid. 132^ 

SECTION LXXVI. 
Imitation of the cerebral nerves. - - - - - 135 

CHAPTER VII. 

MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 

SECTION LXXVII. 
Separating and preserving theChirothecaor Cuticle of the hand, and poda- 
theca or cuticle of the foot. - - - - - - 134 

SECTION LXXVIII. 
Preparing the air vessels of the lungs by maceration. - - 135 



XXU COJfTENTS. 

Page 
SECTION LXXIX. 
Macerated preparations of the arteries of the hand and foot with the bones. 136 

SECTION LXXX. 
Macerating and cleaning bones. . , _ . - 13g 

SECTION LXXXI. 
Preparing the cancelU of bones. , « . .- , 138 

SECTION LXXXII. 
preparing a natural iHaman skeleton. - - - - 13& 

SECTION LXXXUI. 
Maceration and preparation of a natural skeleton of a foetus, or of a very 
young child^ - - - - - - - 148 

SECTION LXXXIV. 
Preservation of the ligaments in a flexible state when dried. - - 142 

SECTION LXXXV, 
Dry preparation of the periosteum, - - , . » 144 

SECTION LXXXVI. 
Rendering bones flexible and transparent. - - , , 145 

SECTION LXXXVIL 
Cleaning and preparing diseased bones. ^ - - - 146 

SECTION LXXXVIII. 
Preparation of bones to display osteogeny. , • » • 147 

SECTION LXXXIX. 
jDleaning and separating the bones of the head. - , . 143 

CHAPTER VIII, 

ARTICULATIONS AND SECTIONS OF THE SKELETON. 

SECTION XC. 
Articulating a skeleton. - - - - ^ - 149 

SECTION XCI. 
Sections of bones to exhibit their cavities and interior structure, - 166 

CHAPTER IX. 

MR. SWAN'S NEW METHOD OF MAKING DRIED ANA- 
TOMICAL PREPARATIONS. 

SECTION XCII. 
On the advantages of Swan's method. „ , . . 177 

SECTION XCIII. 
On the preparation of an arm as a general illustration of Swan's me- 
thod. -.-..,., 180 



CONTENTS^i 



XXlu 



SECTION XCIV. 
On solutions of oxymuriate of mercury. 

SECTION XCV. 
On preparationis of the minute nerves. 

SECTION XCVI. 
On preparations of the parts^ concerned in hernia. 

SECTIOINT XCVII. 
On preparations of the Uver. 



]?reparations of the rtose. 



SECTION XCVIII. 



SECTION XCIX. 
On prepa^rations of the absorbents. 



On preparations of the brain. 



On preparations of the joints. 



SECTION C. 



SECTION CI. 



SECTION CII. 



On preparations of the ear. 

SECTION cm. 

On preparations of the heart and lungs. 



On preparations of animals. 



On varnishes and paints. 



SECTION ClV. 
SECTION GV. 

CHAPTER X. 
MODELLING* 



SECTION CVI. 
Of the requisite properties, &c, of plaster of Paris for modeUing. 

SECTION CVIL* 
General observations on inaking models in plaster of Paris. 

SECTION CVIII. 
Making moulds of plaster of Paris on soft bodies and casting their 
els. -._-->.. 

SECTION CIX.* 
Making moulds of plaster of Paris on hard bodies. 

SECTION ex.* 
Seasoning of plaster of Paris moulds. , . - - 

SECTION CXI.* 
Of casting with plaster of Paris. - . - - - 

SECTION CXIL* 
Of moulding and casting busts from living subjects. 



Page 
196 



200 
211 
214 
215 
216 
217 
218 
220 
227 
231 
233 



mod- 



236 
237 

239 
241 
246 
247 
250 



XXIV CONTENTS. 

Page 
SECTION CXIII.* 
A method of representing the outline of any figure in plaster of Paris. 25$ 

SECTION CXIV.* 
Of making moulds in wax on irregular bodies, and casting in plaister of 
Paris without seams. -..-.- 254 

SECTION CXV. 
Of making moulds in putty, and casting ^^ith plaster of Paris. - 956 

SECTION CXVI.* 
Of smoothing the surface of plaster models. - - - 258 

SECTION CXVII,* 
Of colouring models of plaster of Paris. - - • - 259 

SECTION CXVIII.+ 
Of repairing injured casts in plaster of Paris. . _ - 260 

SECTION CXIX. 
Of casting a model of the labyrinth of the ear with lead and corroding 
the bone in an acid. ..-..- 262 

CHAPTER XL 

COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

SECTION CXX. 
Of the methods of catching animals ; and of the primary objects of atten- 
tion in them. --._--- 263 

SECTION CXXI. 
Of the treatment and preservation of quadrupeds. - - 270 

SECTION CXXII. 
Of birds. 273 

SECTION CXXIII. 
Of fishes and reptiles. -..--- 274 

SECTION CXXIV. 
Of Crustacea ; and insects. . - - - , 276 

SECTION CXXV. 
Of eggs. ----.--. 278 

SECTION CXXVI. 
Various observations on the means of preserving different animals. 278 

SECTION CXXVII. 
Of extraneous fossils. ...... 284 

SECTION cxxvin. 

Natural skeletons of fish, quadrupeds, birds, &c. . - 287 

Frames for skeletons of quadrupeds. See Appendix, No. 3. - - 310 

CHAPTER Xn. 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 288 



ANATOMICAL PREPARATIONS. 



CHAPTER I. 



ON MAKING DRY PREPARATIONS OF THE BLOOD-VESSELS. 

SECTION L 

Different kinds of Injections, 

It is highly important to the student of practical 
anatomy to be able to inject the blood-vessels with 
success and facility. To do this, he must attend to 
the quality of the injection and to the condition of 
the instruments and the subject. Coloured liquids 
were first used for filling the vessels, and afterwards 
such substances as were fluid while warm, but which 
congealed by cooling, as tallow coloured with paints. 
Ruysch is said to have invented the formulae for 
warm injections now used, which is altogether supe- 
rior to tallow for making dry preparations of the ar- 
teries, and is employed more than any other kind. 
Within a few years another material has been intro- 
duced, which is liquid when mixed at the common 
temperature, but becomes solid in a few minutes af- 
ter. This is termed cold i7ijecHon, and unlike the 
1 



2 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

other, requires no previous warming, nor that the 
subject should be heated before it is injected. 

There are six kinds of injection in use, viz. the 
cold coarse and fine injection, the warm coarse and 
fine injection, the minute, and the mercurial, to 
which Mr. Swan would add that of plaster of Paris. 
The five first kinds are variously coloured according 
to the design and fancy of the student. 

SECTION II. 
Formulcejor cold coarse Lijectmis, 

This kind consists of colouring matter ground in 
boiled linseed-oii upon a painter's marble, and made 
of the consistence of white lead ground in oil as it 
comes in kegs, or of a medium consistence between 
thick cream and butter. After being finely levigated, 
a little lime water, in proportion of two table spoons- 
ful to a pint, is to be incorporated by stirring. At 
the moment of filling the syringe with the injection, 
there should be added to it about one third of its 
measure of Venice turpentine, which should be stir- 
red in briskly, and used immediately, as it very soon 
hardens. The use of the lime water is, to harden 
the injection ; but when white lead, (which is almost 
always adulterated with carbonate of lime,) is used, 
lime-water is unnecessary. 

The cheapest injection, and one which answers 
very well for exhibiting the arteries during dissec- 
tion merely, is lamp-black ground in oil, adding the 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 3 

lime-water and turpentine as above mentioned. Its 
colour distinguishes the vessels from the other parts, 
better than other paints. This is employed in the 
dissecting rooms of Paris, where the great amount of 
dissections carried on makes its low price worthy of 
consideration. 

The coarse injection most easily obtained and pre- 
pared in this country, is white lead ground in oil. It 
answers every purpose for a temporary exhibition of 
the arteries, is already ground of the right consis- 
tence, and requires no addition of lime-water. It 
would however be unsafe to trust it for minute injec- 
tion, without further levigation, and is moreover of 
an unsuitable colour for the blood-vessels of a dried 
preparation. It answers very well for filling the 
veins, and where the student is particular about pre- 
serving their natural colour, he can easily paint them 
with a pencil-brush, before varnishing them. White 
lead possesses the right colour for filling the tho- 
racic duct, and the ureters and pelvis of the kidnies. 

For filling the arteries, to dry and preserve, red 
lead is the best material, and can always be readily 
obtained at a low price. Vermillion, however ap- 
proaches nearer to the colour of arterial blood, but 
it is not so easily and cheaply obtained. 

To give the injection for the veins a blue colour, 
white or red lead may be taken as the body sub- 
stance, and Prussian blue added, which, from the in- 
tenseness of its colour, will convert white or red 



4 IXJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

lead to a blue, when the proportion of its weight to 
either of them, does not exceed a tenth part. The 
same may be said of kings' yellow, where a yellow 
colour is desirable. 

SECTION IIL 

FormulcB jor fine cold Injections. 

The same ingredients will answer for this as for 
the coarse kind, previously taking care to levigate 
the paint more thoroughly, and to add to the Venice 
turpentine intended to be mixed with it, an equal 
quantity of spirits of turpentine, to increase its fluid- 
ity. This is to be thrown in, in small quantities first, 
and then followed with the above coarse injection. 

When the cold injection once hardens afterallits in- 
gredients are mixed, no use can afterwards be made 
of it. As it adheres to the syringe, the instruments 
should be wiped clean immediately after it has been 
used ; and when this has been neglected, the harden- 
ed substance must be moistened with spirits of tur- 
pentinot Should it be desirable to have a large quan- 
tity of the paint ground and preserved on hand 
ready for use, the surface of it should be kept cov- 
ered with clean water. 

SECTION IV. 

Of Cold minute Injection. 

This may be the same as the warm minute injec- 
tion hereafter to be mentioned ; or it may consist of 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 5 

Vermillion ground very finely in spirits of turpentine, 
adding a very small portion of Venice turpentine ; 
the whole should be as fluid as very thin cream, or 
like milk, and when thrown in, should be followed 
by the coarse or fine cold injection. 



SECTION V. 

Of warm Injections, 

These, like the foregoing, may be used for mak- 
ing wet and dry arterial and venous preparations, 
and also for corroded preparations, though for the 
latter kind, there should be a small change made in 
the proportion of their ingredients, for the purpose 
of hardening them, as the heat of summer is apt to 
soften and dissolve the common warm injection. 

There are, as before observed, three kinds of them, 
the coarse, fine, and minute. The coarse is used for 
filling the large arteries and veins, and serves for 
filling all such vessels as can be dissected, or are 
worthy of attention in surgical operations. The^;^^ 
is used to fill the smaller branches of the principal 
arteries, as of the hollow organs of the abdomen 
and pelvis, the periosteum, &c. A portion of this is 
thrown in first, and is afterwards followed by the 
coarse fluid, which forces it into the minuter branch- 
es. Owing to the volatility of turpentine, one of the 
ingredients, its proportion to the others diminishes 
every time it is heated, which renders the injection 
too hard and brittle. To correct this, turpentine var- 



6 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

nish should be added, in such quantity as will render 
it a little flexible when dropped in cold water. 

The minute injection is for the purpose of filling 
the minutest vessels, as of the bones, the tunica con- 
junctiva, the synovial membranes ; and to give the 
cutis and other parts their natural colour ; or to show 
their extreme vascularity, whether healthy or morbid. 
It will restore the living colour of the lips and cheeks, 
especially if they are preserved in spirits of wine, 
oil of turpentine or other antiseptic liquid. 

The colours usually employed for warm injection, 
are red, yellow, green, blue, black, and white, as 
the following formulae will show. No greater degree 
of heat should be applied in preparing these formulae 
than is just sufficient to give them their highest de- 
gree of fluidity, otherwise their colour will be chang- 
ed, and the coats of the vessels burnt. So important 
was this caution in the mind of Pole, that he reite- 
rates it several times. The best security against it 
is, to melt the ingredients in vessels placed in hot 
water, as hereafter directed, and trying it with the 
end of the finger, as the heat of it should not be 
greater than can be borne without much suffering. 
The injections should be warmed in earthen pots, 
and stirred with wooden pestles, using a separate 
one for each colour. 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 7 

SECTION VI. 

FormulcB for coarse warm Injections, 

These are to be found in several books, as Fife's 
Anatomy, the London Dissector, and Pole's Anatomi- 
cal Instructor, but are not the less deserving of a 
place in the present work. 

RED. 

Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 

White resin, or the lightest common that can be 

obtained, eight ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; by measure. 
Vermillion, three ounces. 

First liquify the wax, resin and turpentine varnish, 
in an earthen pot, over a slow fire, or set in a hot wa- 
ter bath ; then add the vermillion, previously mixing 
it in another pot, with a very small quantity of the 
liquified composition, and stirring it well with a 
wooden pestle, so that the colouring ingredients may 
be intimately and smoothly blended ; then add, by 
degrees, the whole of the ingredients, and when they 
have acquired their due heat, by being placed again 
over the fire, the injection will be fit for immediate 
use. — These rules are to be observed in preparing 
all the following Injections. 



8 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

' YELLOW. 

Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
White resin, eight ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
King's yellow, two ounces and a half. 

WHITE. 

Fine white bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
White resin, eight ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
Best flake- white, five ounces and a half. 

PALE BLUE. 

White bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
White resin, eight ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
Best flake-white, three ounces and a half ; 
Fine blue smalt or powder blue, three ounces 
and a half. 

BLACK. 

Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
White resin, eight ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
Lamp-black or ivory black, one ounce. 

GREEN. 

Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
White resin, eight ounces ; 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 9 

Turpentine vaiDish, six ounces ; 

Crystalized verdigrise finely levigated, four 

ounces and a half; 
Best flake-white, one ounce and a half; 
Gamboge, finely levigated, one ounce. 



SECTION VIII. 

Formul(B for Fine Injection. 

The same rules are to be followed in respect to 
mixing and beating fine injections as are given for 
the cold. 

RED. 

Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
Vermillion, one ounce. 

YELLOW. 

Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
King's yellow, one ounce and a half. 

WHITE. 

Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
White spirit varnish, of each, four ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
Best flake-white, two ounces. 
2 



10 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 



LIGHT BLUE. 



Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
Fine blue smalt, or powder blue, or Prussian 

blue, one ounce and a half; 
Best flake-white, one ounce and a quarter. 

DARK BLUE. 

Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
Blue verditer, four ounces. 

BLACK. 

Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
White spirit varnish of each four ounces ; 
Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
Lamp-black, or Ivory -black, half an ounce. 



SECTION VIII. 

Formulae J or Minute Injection. 

The size which constitutes the principal part of 
these formulae, is made in the following manner : — 
Take the finest and most transparent glue, one 
pound, break it into pieces ; put it into an earthen 
pot and pour on it three pints of cold water, let it 



IJTJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS- 11 

Stand twentj-four hours ; stiring it now and then 
with a stick ; then set it over a slow fire for half an 
hour, or until all the pieces are perfectly dissolved ; 
skim all the frothy part from the surface, and strain 
it through a fine canvass cloth, or a flannel ; it will 
then be fit for the coloured ingredients. 

Isinglass is more colourless than glue, and therefore 
better for white injections, but its price is higher. 
The cuttings of parchment make a more delicate 
size than glue. 

The size which is procured in the shops, under the 
name of pale double size, runs very minutely ; is 
very cheap, and already prepared. Dr. Bush, a cel- 
ebrated anatomist of New York, gives this a decided 
preference. 

RED. 

Size, one pint ; 

Vermillion, three ounces and a half. 

YELLOW. 

Size, one pint ; 

King's yellow, two ounces and a half. 

WHITE. 

Size, one pint; 

Best flake-white, three ounces and a half. 

BLUE. 
Size, one pint ; 
Fine blue smalt, six ounces. 



12 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS- 

GREEN. 

Size, one pint ; 

Cr3^stallized Verdigris, two ounces. 
Best flake-white. 

Gamboge, finely levigated, of each eight scru- 
ples. 

BLACK. 

Size, one pint ; 

Lamp black, one ounce, to which may be first 
added a little spirits of wine- 

Great care is necessary in the levigation of the 
colouring matter of each formulae, to have it as thor- 
ough as possible. 

When intended to precede the cold injection, the 
minute injection need not be warmed ; but unless 
warmed when used with the warm injection, the lat- 
ter will be congealed by it. 

SECTION IX. 

Swan's Plaster Injection. 

To the above kinds of injection may be added 
one made of plaster of Paris used by Mr. Swan, 
which he terms cold injection. The way in which 
he uses it is the following. The pipes being fixed in 
the blood-vessels at which the injection is to enter, 
plaster of Paris, to which some colouring matter has 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 13 

been added, as red lead or Prussian blue, must be 
put into a common basin, or mortar, and rubbed with 
a pestle a little, so as to break down any lumps that it 
contains ; then water is to be added very gradually, 
until it has the consistence of cream ; as soon as it is 
mixed, (for it sets in a few minutes), it is to be drawn 
into the syringe, and immediately injected. A ves- 
sel containing cold water must be in readiness, that 
the syringe may be washed out as soon as the in- 
jection has been used, otherwise it will set in so 
hard as to make it necessary to take the syringe in 
pieces in order to clean it, which cannot be done 
without very great trouble. If a little oil is occa- 
sionally drawn into the syringe, it will easily be kept 
clean by the means I have already stated. As soon 
as the injection sets, which will be known by observ- 
ing that in the pipe, the pipe may be removed, which 
should be immediately cleaned, and this will be ea- 
sily done by holding it in water, and at the same time 
passing a wire through it. 

I would further observe, that for making corroded 
preparations of the kidney, the fusible metal may be 
thrown into the arteries, after heating the or2:an in 
water until it acquires throughout nearly the temper- 
ature of boiling water. The pipe is to be previously 
introduced, and the hot water is to cover the kidney, 
but not the artery, as this would crisp it and render 
it brittle. The same material may be injected into 
the air vessels of small lungs. The high price of fu- 
sible metal will, however, preclude its extensive use. 



14 IJVJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

SECTION X. 

Injecting Instruments. 

There are three kinds of apparatus used hi making 
injected preparations. One is for the coarse, fine 
and minute injection, whether cold or hot, another 
called the oyster syringe, is for filling detached por- 
tions, generally with the minute injection, and a third 
for injecting with quicksilver. 

The first kind consists of a brass syringe, made of 
various sizes according to the magnitude of the sub- 
ject or part that is to be filled. As a medium size 
however, for those who wish to be at the expense of 
purchasing but one, that which holds near a pint is 
preferable. The nozzle of the syringe is adapted 
to pipes, into which it is to be inserted, several of 
which pipes are usually sold with it, and a short pipe, 
having a stop-cock, is also furnished, which is to be 
applied between the syringe and either of the pipes. 
The whole apparatus with the manner of using it, as 



KoTE. As it is sometimes desirable to inject a subject for private arterial dis- 
sections, in situations where a brass syringe is not to be had, it may be well to 
know what substitute can be employed. Having been placed in such circumstan- 
ces w^hile employed during the last war upon the Lakes, I made use of a common 
enema syringe for cold injection, and with uniform success. For this purpose, the 
nozzle was filed into a tapering shape, though this it not indispensible, and the 
piston was examined and fitted to work very closely. The principal difficulty 
experienced, is the want of suitable pipes. If it is intended to inject the veins, one 
or two pipes should be made by a brass founder or copper smith. For the large 
arteries I have cast one of pewter or lead, shaped like the large brass one in the 
plate that has answered perfectly well. And have also used a jewellers blow-pipe 
w^ith success, cutting it into three pieces, and using either of them that is best 
adapted to the size of the artery or vein. 



IlfJECTED DRY PRKPARATONS. 15 

described by Pole, is exhibited in plate No. 1. and is 
accompanied with explanations. 

The oyster syringe is shaped like the common brass 
syringe, but is so small, that when the syringe is in the 
hand and filled, its piston, having a ring at the end, 
may be used by the thumb to throw its contents into 
a preparation held in the other hand. Its pipe is 
very small. 

The instrument for injecting quicksilver, consists 
of glass tubes after the plan described by MarjoHn, 
or of a long glass tube with a steel end, and having a 
steel pipe extremely fine, that is to be screwed upon 
it. Both kinds are exhibited in plate No. 2. and the 
manner of using them, is given under the head of 
making quicksilver preparations. Neither of these 
nor the oyster syringe, are much used in private dis- 
sections, and in public dissecting establishments they 
are generally in the possession of the teacher. 

SECTION XL 

Directions for using the Syringe. 

Experience in using the syringe is so essential for 
success, that the student must not be surprised if he 
fails in his first attempt to inject a subject. If possi- 
ble, he should first assist an experienced person in 
the operation. When the cold injection is to be us- 
ed, the subject if entire may be laid upon the floor 
and its chest a little raised with a block. As the col- 
ouring matter of the injection will gravitate a little 



16 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 

when thrown in, the subject should be turned upon 
its face as soon as injected, in order that a front view 
may give a bright colour to the vessels after they are 
prepared. Every thing should be in readiness, as 
ligatures, forceps, scissars, sponge, &c. as the want 
of some trifling article at the moment of injecting, 
might frustrate the whole process. The pipes should 
be inserted into the vessels and confined with strong 
ligatures. Some might suppose that the air which 
fills the arteries, before the injection is thrown in, 
would oppose its progress, and mix with it ; but this 
is not the case, for both air and water in the vessels 
are pressed forward by the injection into the cellular 
membrane. A mixture of air with the injection in 
the syringe, is however, to be carefully guarded 
against, as it will produce interruptions and spaces in 
the largest vessels. To avoid this, immerse the noz- 
zle of the syringe deep in the injection, that no froth 
may be drawn up with it, and after it is filled, hold the 
nozzle upward, and press up the piston till all the 
air and froth are ejected ; then introduce the nozzle 
into the pipe, which an assistant is to hold in readi- 
ness, and taking the pipe between the fingers of the 
left hand, depress the piston with the right, steadily 
and equably, till a resistance is felt to its passage. 
The arteries of young subjects possess an elasticity 
that enables them to bear the push of the injection, 
and which denotes when to lessen the pressure. But 
the arteries of elderly subjects, possess a rigidness 
and want of elasticity, which allows the piston to 
go easily at first, then stops it, and if forced, the in- 
jection most probably bursts the artery, and destroys 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 17 

the subject for dry preparations. This accident will 
be known by a sudden yielding of the resistance, and 
it will then be useless making any further attempt to 
fill the vessels, unless the rupture happens where the 
part may be secured by the thumb and finger of an 
assistant, or by a ligature, or it is so small as to allow 
very little injection to escape. 

After a prudent force has been employed for a 
short time, the syringe is to be withdrawn, previous- 
ly securing the vessel, by turning the stop-cock, or 
with a plug or ligature, — and the remaining injection 
is to be forced back into the vessel. Should the first 
syringe full not be sufficient to fill the vessel, it is to 
be immediately followed by a second. When inject- 
ing through a very small pipe, the slow passage of 
the injection may lead the inexperienced to suspect, 
that an obstruction exists in the pipe, and induce him 
to desist, when he should steadily continue the pres- 
sure. 

The foregoing directions respecting cold injection 
will apply also to warm injection. When the latter 
kind is employed, the syringe should be kept in warm 
water until ready for filling, and the subject should be 
continued there during the injecting, as taking it out 
will chill the superficial vessels before they are filled. 
It is worthy of remark that rupture of the large ar- 
teries occurs oftener from warm, than from cold 
injection, the former oftentimes weakening the 
strength of the vessel by its heat, especially near the 
syringe. A sponge with coltf water should be at 
3 



18 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

hand in using warm injection, which may be laid 
upon a ruptured or divided small blood-vessel, from 
which the injection is escaping, to congeal it. 

Mr. C. Bell recommends pushing the piston slow- 
ly and gradually in throwing in fine and minute injec- 
tion, thus insinuating the fluid into the more deli- 
cate vessels, which are easily ruptured. 



SECTION XII. 

Valves of the Arteries and Veins* 

The arteries have no valves except near the hearty 
and are therefore easily injected in any direction, and 
as they are always found empty after death, they re- 
quire no previous washing out. In both these re- 
spects the}^ differ from the veins, which have numer- 
ous valves, that prevent the flow of injection from 
the heart, and are always found distended with coag- 
ulated blood, that must be washed out before they 
can be injected 5 and as this must be done in the di- 
rection of the circulation, small pipes are to be in- 
troduced into remote parts, as the hand, foot, or head ; 
and warm water is thrown into them towards the 
heart, to wash out the coagula, which may be made 
to escape through a small incision made with a lancet 
in the tip of the right auricle. Through the s ame 
pipes, an injection of a different colour from that of 
the arteries is to be thrown in, until it appears at 
the opening in the heart. Before filling the last ve- 
nous pipe, a pin may be passed through the lips of 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 19 

the incision in the auricle, and a ligature tied round 
so as to close the opening ; the pin is to prevent its 
slipping off from the tip of the auricle. 

Some veins are destitute of valves, as those of the 
uterus, kidnies, liver, lungs, (sometimes, but not al- 
ways,) spleen, pancreas, mesentery, coronary veins 
on the surface of the heart, the internal veins of the 
head, placentae, &c., and these may be separately in« 
jected in a direction contrary to their circulation, pre- 
viously washing out their coagula. 



SECTION XIII. 

Injecting^ dissecting and preparing an entire subject^ 
to exhibit the Arteries and Veins by Cold Injection^ 

For this purpose a subject between the age of two 
and fourteen years is preferable, on account of the 
saving of time and expense in preparing and preserv- 
ing, and greater convenience in examining and study- 
ing it. If ematiated, the subject is more easily pre- 
pared and preserved. 

It is best, on all accounts, to inject a subject entire 
from the aorta, whether it be the intention to prepare 
an entire subject, or to make separate preparations. 
But in respect to the veins, when they are to be pre- 
served in separate portions of the body, as of a limb 
or the head, they should be injected, in an adult sub- 
ject, after the arteries are filled and the subject di- 



20 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIOJS-S. 

vided, as they are more easily washed out from sepa- 
rate limbs, than from the whole system entire. 

The subject may be laid upon the floor with a block 
under the thorax. A longitudinal incision is to be 
made along the sternum, and the bone sawn through the 
centre ; or, dissect off the integuments each way 
from the sternum, to the junction of the ribs with 
their cartilages, and then divide each cartilage with a 
strong scalpel near the rib, and also the junction of 
the clavicle with the sternum. The cartilages and 
sternum being separated from the diaphragm and 
short ribs, are to be turned up toward the face. But 
if the first plan be adopted, of sawing the sternum 
through, it is to be separated by wedges and pulling 
of a strong assistant on each side, until sufficient 
room is made for opening the pericardium, and intro- 
ducing a pipe ; and it is to be kept open by introduc- 
ing a prop at the upper and lower end of the ster- 
num. Professor Horner has invented an instrument 
for separating and retaining asunder the divided ster- 
num, that every practical anatomist should be pro- 
vided with. " It consists of two bars of iron, rather 
larger than the sternum, each one being furnish- 
ed with two flat hooks, .and one having two screws 
which work in pivot holes in the other. The bars 
are separable. To apply the instrument, saw through 
the middle of the sternum, then fix the bars one after 
the other by hooking them on the cut edge of the 
bone, and adjusting the points of the screws in the 
pivot holes. By turning the handle of the screws the 
two halves of the sternum may be separated to any 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 21 

requisite extent." A drawing of the instrument is 
given in No. 5. of the American Journal of Medical 
Sciences, page 242. 

The pericardium being opened, and the serum ab- 
sorbed from it with a sponge, the aorta is to be sep- 
arated from the pulmonary artery with the index fin- 
ger. The young student often mistakes the pulmo- 
nary artery for the aorta ; to prevent which he should 
recollect, that the pulmonary artery near the heart 
is most prominent, and that the aorta passes behind 
it, and emerging on the right, mounts upward to 
form the arch. A small longitudinal incision is to be 
made as near the heart as convenient, and the larg- 
est sized pipe introduced, which is to be secured 
with a firm ligature, passed twice round the aorta 
and tied with a hard knot, and the ends are then 
brought up round the horns of the pipe, crossed, 
and then carried once or twice round the pipe below 
the horns, as represented in figure 1 1, plate 1. The 
subject being thus prepared is ready for the cold in- 
injection. It is unnecessary to heat the body, though 
the superficial vessels will be better filled, if the body 
has been a little time in a warm room. But it is par- 
ticularly necessary if the subject is frozen, to thaw it 
perfectly before injecting. 

The injection made of red lead or vermillion o-round 
in boiled oil to such a consistence, that when, heaped 
up in a vessel it will be some time in settUng to a level 
surface, and having lime water to the amount of two 
table-spoonfuls to a pint minutely incorporated with 
it, is placed by the side of the subject ; and also a 



22 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

bottle of Venice turpentine, and an empty earthen 
basin, with a wooden stick to stir with. The syringe 
being in perfect order and every thing in readiness, 
the operator puts three parts of the ground paint 
into the empty basin, and adds to it one part of the 
Venice turpentine and stirs them together briskly. 
If the intention be to inject finely, there should be 
added to the mixture one part of spirits of turpentine, 
to give it greater fluidity, and only half the pro- 
bable quantity necessary to fill the vessels, should 
be mixed and thrown in ; which is to be followed 
with as much more mixed without the spirits of tur- 
pentine. And if the minute injection made of size 
is wanted, this should be prepared and thrown in first 
in the same quantity, and instead of the above mention- 
ed fine injection. It is probable that in cold weather, 
a little warming of the subject, by laying it many 
hours in a warm room, and warm sponging with wa- 
ter at the moment of injection, will cause the size in- 
jection to run more minutely. 

To guard against throwing in air with the injection, 
the nozzle of the syringe when filled is pointed up- 
ward, and the air expelled by pressing the piston 
until the injection appears ; then introducing it into 
the pipe, the operator takes the horns of the pipe into 
the fingers of the left hand, and presses the piston 
with his right, or with his breast, until he feels a re- 
sistance. The assistants are then to press with their 
hands the femoral and brachial arteries forcibly down- 
wards, and the steady firm pressure of the syringe is 
again renewed and continued as long as it will move. 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 23 

replenishing it when emptied. The stop-cock is turn- 
ed, or if therebe none, the syringe is withdrawn and 
the pipe plugged, and the subject is turned upon its 
face, until the injection is set, for the purpose of in- 
creasing the bright colour of the vessels, for a front 
view. 

The arteries are less likely to burst with the same 
force applied to the syringe, where the size or fine 
injection precedes the coarse, than where the coarse 
is used alone. 

For injecting the veins of an entire subject in con- 
nection with the arteries to make dry preparations, it 
is better to choose an adult, on account of the small- 
ness of the veins of children. Pipes are introduced 
one or more into the back of the hand, and of the 
foot, and one into the angular vein near the inner an- 
gle of the eye. The sinuses of the dura mater will 
not be filled by this last vein, nor is it perhaps de- 
sirable, since these sinuses, and the vena azygos, and 
the system of the vena portss, are better injected and 
exhibited in separate preparations. An incision is 
made with a lancet in the tip of the left auricle of the 
heart, and the coagulated blood is drawn out. Warm 
water is then injected into the several pipes, until the 
blood of the veins is washed out through the same 
opening in the auricle. Cold coarse injection, vary- 
ing in colour from that of the arteries, according to 
the fancy of the student, and prepared in the same 
manner as the cold arterial injection, is thrown into 
each pipe, until it reaches the heart, and before the 



24 OJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

last venous pipe is filled, the orifice in the auricle of 
the heart should be closed, by passing a pin through 
its lips, and a ligature round back of the pin, and ty- 
ing it firmly ; after which the injection by the last 
pipe should be continued longer, until the right auri- 
cle, ventricle and pulmonary arteries are filled. 

SECTION XIV. 

hijecting, dissecting and preparing an entire Subject, 
to exhibit the arteries and veins by warm i?ijection. 

Proceed as directed in the last section, where cold 
injection is used. After the large pipe is introduced 
into the aorta, and the small ones into the veins, (in 
case they are to be injected,) the subject is immersed 
in water as warm as the fingers can bear, and contin- 
ued in this temperature three or four hours. The 
veins are washed out by injecting through their pipes 
while the subject is in the water, and the syringe is 
to be immersed in the water until wanted for the in- 
jection. The red coarse injection for the arteries, 
and blue or other colour for the veins are to be pre- 
pared in separate pots ; and after being hquified 
are kept in a large basin surrounded by hot water ; 
and if the fine warm injection or the minute size in- 
jection is intended for the arteries, a vessel containing 
it may be set in the same pan of water. Care should 
be taken to have all the injections as warm as the 
finger can bear without giving much suffering ; as 
greater heat may crisp and destroy the vessels. Each 
pot of injection should have a wooden pestle to stir 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 25 

it with, at the moment of filling the syringe. The 
injection is to be conducted according to the man- 
ner described in the last section. In case of a 
rupture of a small vessel, its contents may be con- 
gealed by the application of cold water. 

The vessels being injected, lay the body in cold 
water with the face downward, the object of which 
is, to keep the colouring matter from gravitating from 
the front part of the arteries, and thus lessening the 
brightness of their colour. 

The next part of the process is the dissection, the 
usual method of conducting which is, first, to open 
the abdomen, from the incision already made in the 
thorax, longitudinally to the pubis ; and then to re- 
move the abdominal and thoracic viscera in the fol- 
lowing manner:— The stomach and intestines, by 
cutting the mesentery close to the latter, so as to 
leave the mesenteric arteries as long as possible ; 
the liver is to be next carefully dissected away, 
leaving as many of the ramifications of the hepatic 
artery as may be conveniently done ; and the kid- 
nies may be removed in the same way ; though 
sometimes they are dried entire in the subject ; the 
spleen will, of course, be removed with the stomach. 
All the vessels left in the abdomen should be care- 
fully freed from the surrounding cellular membrane, 
adeps, and peritoneum, that they may be rendered 
as visible as possible. The urinary bladder is some- 
times, especially in the male, inflated and preserved 
in its natural situation. The rectum, cellular mem- 
brane, &c. should be removed from the pelvis, and 
4 



26 INJECTED BRY PREPARATIONS. 

the internal pudendal artery, so interesting in litho- 
tomy, exposed, running on the inner side of the 
branch of the ischium. Care should be taken in 
dissecting the abdominal viscera, to preserve the 
spermatic arteries which are given off from the aor- 
ta, a little below the emulgents, and are continued 
downward, through the abdominal ring to the testes. 
In the female they run to the broad ligaments of the 
uterus. 

The thoracic viscera are removed with much less 
difficulty and labour, than the abdominal. The heart 
and lungs, in the common way of fixing the pipe, 
receive no injection, and are therefore to be entirely 
removed, as also the oesophagus. The same plan is 
to be pursued in clearing the thoracic as the abdom- 
inal vessels, rendering them as conspicuous as pos- 
sible ; and to free the intercostal vessels from obscu- 
rity by stripping off the surrounding adeps and 
pleura. 

'* The divided sternum is usually bent back on each 
side, to shew the internal mammary arteries, coming 
off from the subclavians ; for this purpose the carti- 
lages of the ribs should be partly cut through on 
the inside, to suffer the sternum to lay back, and to 
expose the cavity of the thorax. The subclavians, 
carotids, &c. going off from the arch of the aorta, 
should be distinctly seen, and their ramifications 
traced over the head ; in doing which, great care, 
time, and patience, are necessary to make a good 
preparation. The integuments covering the muscles 



mJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 27 

and blood-vessels should be carefully raised, making 
it an invariable rule, never to raise more on this, or 
any other part of the body, than, from time to time, 
may be necessary for carrying on the dissection, oth- 
erwise the parts exposed to the air will become dry, 
and difficult of dissection." 

In dissecting the blood-vessels, they will sufficient- 
ly guide the dissector, if he traces them from their 
trunks to their large and small ramifications. The 
dissecting scissors and forceps are much used in this 
part of the work, especially for the superficial veins. 
The cheeks and lips are to be stuffed with oiled 
wool, or curled hair, and the superficial arteries 
and veins about the face and head may be dissected 
by cutting down upon them. In the arms the integ- 
uments are to be raised and the vessels traced from 
the axilla to the extremities of the fingers ; and in 
the lower extremities, from the groin to the toes ; 
separating and raising the muscles carefully from 
each other, freeing the surfaces of them every where 
from the adeps and cellular membrane, but not sep- 
arating any of them from their attachments ; except 
in some parts of the body, where the course of the 
vessels cannot be exhibited without it, as on one side 
of the neck, when the sterno mastoideus, and other 
muscles, passing over the carotid artery and trans- 
verse processes of the vertebrse, may be removed, 
and the cervical artery traced from the subclavian, 
through the processes to the occiput. The pectoral 
muscles should also be raised from the thorax, and 
turned back, to shew the axillary vessels and exter- 



28 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 

nal mammaries. The glutei muscles should be 
elevated or partly removed, to shew some large 
branches going to them from the internal iliacs. 
The integuments being removed from the posterior 
muscles of the trunk, the superficial layer of musclevS 
should be removed, and the next layer a little elevat- 
ed to facilitate drying. The brain may be removed 
by trepanning in one or more places in the vertex of 
the head, only sawing out a portion by a vertical 
and horizontal section, the former running parallel 
with the sagital suture; and the brain is to be 
washed out with a syringe. 

The dissection being finished, the body may be 
immersed in a solution of corrosive sublimate as di- 
rected for preserving dry preparationsTrom insects. 
The next step is to suspend the body b}' a cord at- 
tached to the top of the cranium, in some situation 
where there is a free current of cool air. The mus- 
cles are to be separated to a moderate distance 
from each other, and supported by small pieces of 
wood, so as to give the best view of the course of 
the vessels, which is the great object of the prepara- 
tion. The thorax and abdomen are in like manner 
to be kept open. In thus separating the muscles^, 
thorax and abdomen, regard should be had to the 
natural figure and situation of parts, not to distort 
them more than is necessary to shew the vessels. The 
mesentery should be spread out on a piece of oiled 
pasteboard, the arteries of which as well as the other 
arteries, entering the abdominal viscera, are to be 
placed in proper positions. The legs and arms are 



^IlfJECTED DRY PRKPARATIOWS. 29 

to be put in such points of view as are most favoura- 
ble for exhibiting the arteries that interest a surgeon, 
or which a pupil may wish to inspect. The attitude 
most favourable for this purpose, and which is most 
compact and convenient for transportation is, to ele- 
vate one arm with the hand over the head, the palm 
incHning forward ; thus exposing to view the axillary 
vessels, as well as the brachial, ulnar, radial, &c. 
The other arm may hang perpendicularly, with the 
palm directly forward. The inferior' extremities may 
be suffered to remain in their natural situation, as no 
benefit can be derived from so unnatural a separation 
as is commonly given them. 

Whilst these preparations are drying, they should 
be frequently attended to, to keep the parts in their 
proper positions. If, through unfavourable weather 
for drying, or by the subject having been long under 
dissection, putrefaction should take place, and a dark 
coloured clammy mucus exude from the surface of 
the muscles, it may be washed off with a solution of 
pearlash, and a soft painter's brush. 

It will improve the appearance of the preparation 
very much to wash it several times, especially wher- 
ever a gummy matter exudes, and the bones that are 
entirely exposed should be scrubbed with a sponge 
dipped in pearlash water, and afterwards in clean 
water. There is very little danger that frequent 
washing will destroy the protective power of the cor- 
rosive sublimate against insects after it has laid in a 
solution of it some hours. 



30 INJEeTED DRY PREPARATIOJJf S- 

When the preparation is perfectly dry, it should be 
varnished without delay, as directed in Section 25. 



SECTION XV. 

Injecting and preparing the Mood vessels of separate 
portions of the human body, 

I have already remarked in Sect. 13, that it is bet- 
ter to inject the whole arterial system at once, from 
the aorta, and then if the subject be an adult, to di- 
vide it into several portions. If the veins as well as 
the arteries are to be filled with the warm injection, it 
must be done for both at the same time ; as it would 
liquify the arterial injection to heat the subject or any 
portion of it a second time for the purpose of filling the 
veins. A subject may, however, be divided into sep- 
arate portions before it is injected, and each portion 
may then be injected, both arteries and veins, with 
the warm injection, taking care to secure all the large 
branches of the parts that have been divided, where 
it is separated from the body. But if the cold injec- 
tion be used, the whole subject may be filled at once, 
and the veins of different parts may afterwards be in- 
jected, either whilst the subject is entire, or after it is 
divided into separate parts. Or the subject may 
be divided in like manner, and then each portion be 
separately injected, both arteries and veins. 



IJfJKCTBD DRY PREPARATIOXS. 31 

SECTION XVI. 

Injecting and preparing the head for the blood ves- 
sels. 

The head is to be separated from the body by a 
transverse incision about the 6th or 7th vertebra. If 
the warm injection is to be used, the part should be 
immersed in warm water four hours, and the various 
directions attended to as described in Section 14. A 
forked pipe may be previously introduced into the 
carotids, or a separate pipe into each, and the jugu- 
lar veins are to have pipes inserted in like manner. 
Secure the vertebral arteries by ligatures, and pass 
a cord round the neck over the pipes that are insert- 
ed and draw it tight, for the purpose of preventing 
the escape of the injection by inosculating branches. 

The red fine injection should be first thrown into 
the arteries, as directed, Section 14, for the purpose 
of displaying the vascularity of the schneiderian 
membrane, and of the tunica conjunctira— and this is 
to be followed with the coarse injection. The jugu- 
lars should be filled with yellow, white, or blue in- 
jection ; using the fine injection first. This will fill a 
great portion of the veins, though to insure complete 
success, the subject should be passed middle age 
and the sinuses of the dura mater jugulars must be 
previously cleared of their contents, by making a 
small opening into the longitudinal sinus, near the 
fontanel and injecting water backwards, towards the 



32 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

occipital bone, and plugging up the opening as soon 
as the venous injection appears at the part. 

If the cold injection is employed, which I should 
decidedly prefer, the same steps are to be followed 
as for the warm injection, with the exception of em- 
ploying heat in any part of it. 

The vertebral arteries will be filled by the carotids, 
the connexion being established between them by the 
basilary artery. 

The dissection is to be performed according to the 
rules laid down in Section 13, for dissecting the entire 
subject. It will be necessary to remove, with a fine 
saw, a portion of the jaw bone, to shew the course of 
the internal carotids ; the section may be made im- 
mediately posterior to the last dens molaris ; and on 
the same side, the muscles &c. should be dissected 
away between the transverse processes of the cervical 
vertebrae, to shew the course of the cervical artery 
ascending perpendicularly through them. On the 
other side of the head, the muscles should only be 
raised, and cleared from all the surrounding adeps and 
cellular membrane ; and so placed, as may best show 
the course of all the vessels. The platisma myoides 
must be sacrificed on both sides. 

The external parts of the head being finished, vari- 
ous sections may be made with a saw about the sum- 
mit of the cranium to exhibit vessels, sinuses mem- 
branes, &c : of the internal part, according to the 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS- 33 

intention of the anatomist, taking care not to wound 
the membranes, which must be divided with a knife 
or scissors. Sometimes a perpendicular section is 
made about half an inch to the right, or left of the sa- 
gittal suture, and carried down to within about an 
inch of the orbit, anteriorly, and as far as the lambdoi- 
dal suture, posteriorly ; then sawing horizontally 
through the upper edge of the temporal bone, so as 
to meet the extremities of the first section, by which 
an elliptic portion of the cranium will be removed ; 
sometimes it is made on both sides of the sagittal su- 
ture, by which the sinuses and processes of the dura 
mater, &c. will be seen in their natural situation 
when the brain is carefully washed away, being first 
cautiously broken down with the fingers. Sometimes 
a horizontal section is made through the whole sum- 
mit of the cranium. 

But as useful a section as can be made to shew 
the internal parts, is perpendicularly through the 
whole head and cervical vertebrae, beginning about 
a quarter of an inch on one side of the sagittal suture, 
just so as to escape the longitudinal sinus, and sep- 
tum nasi ; then inclining the saw toward the centre 
of the foramen magnum, saw through the cervical ver- 
tebrjB. The frontal sinus may be laid open, by remov- 
ing a portion of the external table with a small tre- 
phine. If the preparation is made merely for the ex- 
ternal vessels, then no section is required, and the 
brain may be extracted in the following manner. 
" Make one or two perforations with a trephine, any 
where in the posterior part of the cranium ; break 
5 



34 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 

down the texture of the brain with a stick, ex- 
tract a small part and then throw in water, and stir 
it about so as to mix it with the brain, which will easi- 
ly wash away. Putting in a few large shot and shak- 
ing them about, in the manner of washing bottles, 
will greatly assist in destroying the brain.^ 

SECTION XVII. 

Injecting Extremities for Tracing and Preserv- 
ing the Blood-vessels* 

It may seem surperfluous to repeat, that the 
arteries of the whole system, are injected from the 
aorta with more facility and success than individual 
portions can be separately. This is particularly 
the case with the upper and lower extremities, 
for if injected after they are separated from the 
trunk, the injection will be sure to flow out of some 
recurrent branches, at the place of separation. When 
however it becomes necessary to inject an arm after it 
has been separated from the body, or after other parts 
of the body have been cut upon, the pipe maybe intro- 
duced into the subclavian axillary artery. The lower 
extremities may be injected from the aorta before it 
divides into the iliacs, or one of them alone, from 
one of the common iliacs. 

The arm may be separated from the trunk, whe- 
ther before or after injection, by raising the clavicle 
from the sternum, and passing the knife under it to 
the articulation, including the greater part of the pec- 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 35 

toral muscle ; thence dissect under the scapula, so as 
to remove with the arm, the clavicle, scapula, and 
subscapularis muscle. If not previously injected, 
a pipe may be introduced into the artery where 
it is divided, and a small one into the vein in 
the back of the hand, and the veins will be better 
displayed if two pipes are introduced. The veins 
are to be washed out with water, pressed along 
from the pipes. Red injection is to be thrown into 
the artery, taking care to secure any recurrent 
branches from which it appears to escape, and some 
other colour into the veins. A dark blue looks most 
natural, king's yellow most beautiful, but white or 
common white lead is used with most facility. That 
which is sold in shops already ground in oil, is of the 
right consistence, and needs no addition of lime wa- 
ter ; but it should be levigated a little with a spa- 
tula, before it is thrown in, as a single small lump 
might obstruct the pipe and defeat the injection. 
Should the student prefer some other colour to white, 
he might easily paint the vessels afterwards, before 
he varnishes. An assistant should be ready with a 
ligature to tie the veins, as soon as the injection ap- 
proaches the opening of the great vein. The dissec- 
tion should be conducted in such a manner as will 
display the arteries and veins, and (where it can be 
done) the nerves. The muscles should be separated 
with props, or cut away where they conceal an im- 
portant artery or branch. The steeping in corrosive 
sublimate, drying, and varnishing, are described un- 
der their respective heads. 



36 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 

Of the lower extremity little need be said. A sec- 
tion may be made through the sympyhsis pubis, and 
the ligaments connecting the ihum and sacrum, so as 
to remove with each, one side of the pelvis ; or the 
sacrum and coxygis may be sawn through their cen- 
tre. If the arteries are not previously injected, the 
pipe may be inserted into the iliac, and a small pipe 
on the top of the foot. To dissect, preserve from in- 
sects, dry and varnish itj see directions under their 
respective sections. 

SECTION XYIIL 

Inspecting and Preparing the Blood vessels of the 
Upper Extremity i?i connexion with one side of 
the Head and Thorax, 

Separate the upper from the lower part of the bo- 
dy, by a transverse incision across the abdomen 
down to the spine, and between the lumbar verte- 
brae. The injection may however precede this divi- 
sion of the body. Introduce a large pipe into the 
aorta in the abdomen, and secure with ligatures any 
branches given off between the pipe and the dia- 
phragm. Pole recommends inserting the pipe 
above the coeliac artery. Divide the sternum with a 
saw and separate it with wedges ; or cut it out by 
dividing the sterno-costal cartilages at their junction 
with the ribs, as directed in section 13. Introduce a 
pipe into a vein on the back of the band, and anoth- 
er into the longitudinal sinus at the fontanella, as di- 
rected in section 13. If the veins of the face are to 
be injected, introduce a pipe into the vein at the in- 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 37 

ner angle of the eye. Divide the descending cava 
at the diaphragm, and inject water through the ve- 
nous pipes to wash out the veins ; but instead of 
opening the apex of the right auricle for the water 
and coagula to escape, the whole may be forced 
out through the lower cava, around the mouth of 
which a ligature is to be placed ready to tie, when the 
injection reaches it. If the warm injection is to be 
used, immerse the parts in warm water as directed 
in section 12, and inject the arteries with red, and 
the veins wuth blue, yellow or white. When the ar- 
terial injection reaches the heart, the valves of the 
aorta are to be pressed down, and by a little knead- 
ing with the fingers the heart will be filled. By 
kneading the heart, between the left auricle and 
ventricle, the mitral valves will also be overcome, and 
the left auricle and pulmonary veins will be filled ; so 
that, when the other side of the heart is filled from 
the venous pipes, the heart and lungs will serve to 
make a separate preparation, but are to be removed 
with care, to prevent their vessels being broken. 
But should the lungs on opening the thorax be found 
diseased, it will be better not to attempt their injec- 
tion from the aorta. Inject the veins from the hand 
and head, as directed in Section 14 and 15. 

Dissect the arms, head and neck, as directed in 
section 15. The two sides may be divided by a saw 
passing down near one side of the sagittal suture, 
through the head, neck and spine ; but the spine 
will preserve its natural shape better, if the division 
is deferred till after the preparation is dried. In tlie 



38 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

latter case the brain may remain in, till the dissection 
is finished, and then be broken down with a stick and 
washed out with a syringe, introduced through circu- 
lar openings made in each parietal bone ; or by mak- 
ing a horizontal and a vertical incision on each side 
of the sagittal suture with a common saw ; or, the 
vertical incision before mentioned may be carried 
through the head before drying, through which the 
brain can be washed out, and the remainder of the 
incision through the spine be deferred until after 
drying. 

Suspend the preparation while drying, by a wire 
introduced into the cranium back of the fontenella. 
Previous to which the whole may be immersed in a 
solution of corrosive sublimate to preserve it from 
insects, as directed in section 83. If the whole is to 
be dried together, the arms may be extended in a 
line, and secured by a strip of lath, passing along 
the back to the ends of the fingers, to which they 
may be attached with twine. After drying, the 
whole is to be washed with a solution of carbonate of 
potash, and then with clean water, taking care to 
scrub the bones wherever they are bare to increase 
their whiteness, as this is one of the principal beau- 
ties of dry vascular preparations. 

For two persons, engaged in dissecting the same 
subject, this will be found the most valuable and eco- 
nomical preparation that can be made, each half com- 
prising a great amount of surgical anatomy. 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 39 



SECTION XIX. 

Injecting and preparing the Heart in Situ with the 
adjacent Blood Vessels^ and Thoracic Duct. 

This is an important preparation. Inject the aorta, 
from just above its division into iliacs, as directed in 
the last section. Proceed in like manner with the 
veins, though if the dissector be not particularly de- 
sirous of preparing the veins of the head and arms, he 
may insert a pipe into one of the jugular or brachial 
veins, and having washed out the veins and right 
auricle through the descending cava, (which is to be 
divided at the same length as the aorta) ; or, if it be 
found impracticable to force the coagula down through 
the cava from the heart, he may discharge them 
through an opening made in the tip of the righ auri- 
cle and then close the passage. Having injected the 
veins and right side of the heart with dark blue, and 
tied the open vena cava, seek for the thoracic duct 
which is generally collapsed and with difficulty dis- 
covered. It may however be raised into view by 
blowing into some of the small glands at the root of 
the mesentery. Its bulbous part, called the recepta- 
culum chilis lies near the root of the mesentery, and 
its course is along between the aorta and vena azygos. 
Small and transparent as it may seem before injection, 
it afterward appears as large as a small goose-quilL 
Insert a pipe into this duct and inject it with white 
lead cold injection. The vena azygos if not inject- 



40 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

ed from the other veins, may have a pipe inserted 
into it, as low down as convenient, previous to which, 
it may facilitate the process to remove the right lung 
near its root, and afterwards to remove the other 
lung. 

Dissect the head, arms and neck as directed in 
last section, and remove all the muscles from the 
back, then wash and steep in corrosive sublimate and 
dry, and having' it ready for varnishing, amputate 
the head and arms near the trunk, to form separate 
preparations. Saw through the ribs, from the first 
to the last, in a straight line, about midway between 
the spine and sternum, by which means, the impor- 
tant vessels running along the spine will be better 
exhibited. 

The head and arms may be preserved as directed 
in last section, and if more convenient for the dissec- 
tors they may be amputated before their dissection 
begins. 

The thorax and its contents, after being duly pre- 
pared and varnished several times, should be pre- 
served in a glass case. 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 41 



SECTION XX. 

Injection of the Arteries and Veins of the Hands and 
Feet with coloured Injection for Dissection or Cor- 
rosion. 

These preparations have, I believe, never been 
made by any one but myself. Quicksilver has long 
been used for filling such veins, by supporting a col- 
umn of it for some days in an artery going to the 
hand or foot, and then twisting a cord round the 
M^rist or ankle, and drying it, and planting the pre- 
paration in a pedestal of vi^ax or plaster of Paris, 
vf\\h the fingers and toes upwards. Such a prepara- 
tion exhibits the superficial vessels very beautifully, 
and especially the nourishing arteries in the roots of 
the nails. No coloured injection has however, with- 
in my knowledge been made of the veins of the fin- 
gers and toes, that will admit of their dissection. 

Proceed in doing this as in the foregoing case, 
more particularly described in Section bQ, When 
the arteries and veins are filled to running over, in- 
sert a pipe into one or two of the largest veins, and 
without tying the cord, let the part dry as soon as 
practicable ; then shave a thin portion from the ends 
of the thumb and fingers or toes and let the quick- 
silver run out, from them, and also from the pipes, 
by inverting the part. Then inject the arterial pipes 
with coarse cold red injection, and the venous pipes 
with yellow, white or dark blue, continuing the pres- 
6 



42 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

sure till the injection appears at the ends of the fin- 
gers. Pass a cord round the wrist, and immerse the 
part in tepid water for a day or two, to restore the 
softness, so as to admit of dissection ; or if the ob- 
ject be to make a corroded preparation, macerate for 
some months, and wash away the soft parts by 
a stream of water directed upon it, as described in 
directions for making natural skeletons of small ani- 
mals. 

The obstacle that has hitherto presented itself to 
injecting the veins of the hand and foot is their 
valves. But here, the quicksilver by its upward 
pressure, if continued until the valves are dried, 
throws them open, so that the injection flows contra- 
ry to the current of blood wath perfect facility. 



SECTION XXI. 
Injection and Preparation of the Heart. 

To make a preparation of the heart that will ex- 
hibit its natural form and appearance, it is necessary 
that its cavities should be injected, as the process of 
drying will otherwise cause it to shrink and lose its 
natural appearance. To fill the cavities of the heart 
with either cold or warm injection, is a simple pro- 
cess, and should be one of the first attempts of the 
student to make dry preparations. 

The heart maybe injected either before or after re- 
moving from the chest. Sections 13, and 14, describe 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATlOIfS. 43 

the process of doing it within the body, at the time 
the vessels leading to and from the heart are inject- 
ed. To inject it when removed with the lungs from 
the chest, care should be taken in dissecting it out, 
to divide all the vessels so as to leave them as long 
as convenient. After opening the thorax as directed 
in section 13, divide the trachea, oesophagus, caro- 
tids and jugulars at the bottom of the neck, the sub- 
clavian arteries and veins under the clavicle, and 
pass a knife down each side of the spine, to divide 
the intercostals. Dissect, and draw down the ves- 
sels from the neck into the chest, and divide the 
aorta and vena cava at the diaphragm, and remove 
the whole from the chest. 

Insert a pipe into one of the pulmonary veins, and 
another into one of the jugulars or subclavians. In- 
ject water, to wash out the coagula from both sides 
of the heart through the inferior cava and the aorta ; 
tie up all the other vessels, and put a ligature round 
the root of each lung, and one of the ligatures may 
surround and include the pipe in the pulmonary vein, 
after which the lungs beyond the ligature may be 
cut away. If the warm injection is designed to be 
used, immerse the heart in a bucket of water, as 
warm as the hand can bear, for two hours. 

Prepare the injection, and proceed to fill the pipe 
in the pulmonary vein, the left auricle, ventricle and 
aorta ; and when the injection reaches the arch of 
the aorta, it should be pressed backward with the 
thumb and linger for the purpose of forcing it into 



44 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

the coronary arteries. Having filled the aorta and 
secured it, and all its branches with ligatures, with- 
draw the syringe and stop the pipe. Should the 
warm injection ooze out from any small branch that 
has not been discovered, cold water should be ap- 
plied to it. 

Having filled the left side of the heart, proceed in 
the same manner to fill the right side with blue or 
yellow warm injection ; and having succeeded, lay the 
anterior part of the heart downwards, and fill the 
bucket with cold water. 

If the cold injection is used, the process is the 
same, except that the heart is not to be steeped in 
warm water, and the formula for cold injection cor- 
responding to the above colours are to be employed. 
For further directions how to use cold injection, see 
sections, 11, 12, 13. 

The coronary arteries we have seen will be inject- 
ed with the aorta, but the coronary vein is not so 
easily filled. This vein opens into the right auricle, 
between the inferior cava and the passage into the 
ventricle, and is furnished with a semilunar valve to 
prevent the blood from flowing back into it. In 
order to fill this vein with red injection, the tip of the 
right auricle must be opened with a lancet, and a 
long pipe introduced to break down the valve, and a 
little blue or yellow cold injection, may then be forc- 
ed in through the pipe. The tip of the auricle is 
then closed, by passing a pin through the lips of the 
incision, and winding round a thread back of it ; or 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 45 

it may be closed with a suture. This injecting of the 
coronary vein must of course precede the injection of 
the right side of the heart. There is however a 
better mode of exhibiting the coronary veins of the 
heart, while making a hollow preparation of it with 
quicksilver. 

Having succeeded in the injection of the heart, 
clear it of superfluous matter ; then soak it in corro- 
sive sublimate, dry and varnish it, as directed in sec- 
tions 38, 34, 35, and preserve it in a glass case. 



SECTION XXII. 

Injecting and making a dry preparation of the 
Gravid Uterus, 

Although every artery in the body deriving its 
blood from the aorta, may be injected from it, yet the 
uterus is so far removed, that its tortuous vessels are 
in danger of not being properly filled. It is better 
therefore to inject it from the spermatic arteries, gen- 
erally coming off from the aorta below the emulgents, 
and entering the broad ligaments on each side of the 
uterus, and from each hypogastric artery, entering 
just above the cervix uteri. These arteries and their 
corresponding veins are to be divided as far as prac- 
ticable from the uterus, and the uterus, bladder, va- 
gina and external parts of generation are to be re- 
moved together. Four pipes are to be introduced 
into the above mentioned arteries, and four into the 



46 INJEeTED DRY PREPARATIOKS- 

corresponding veins. Each pipe should then be in- 
flated, to see if the vessels are all secure, particularly 
those of the vagina. Inject red into the arteries, 
and yellow into the veins. Dissect away all superflu- 
ous matter in order to render the vessels conspicuous. 
The ligamentum rotundum may also be dissected to 
shew the arteries, and a vein running through it 
beautifully convoluted. 

Distend the vagina and uterus with horse-hair, 
introducing it through the vagina. If the foetus be 
present, remove it by a longitudinal incision through 
its anterior parietes (unless the placenta be attached to 
this part which may be known by the greater number 
of its vessels) and through the membranes ; cut the 
umbilicus close to the foetus, and after maceration in 
clean water, fix a pipe in the umbilical artery and 
another in the umbilical vein. The artery carrying 
black blood should be filled with yellow, and the vein 
with red injection, and the cord laid round the pla- 
centa. Fill the Fallopian tubes with cotton dipt in 
oil, and the whole cavity of the uterus with baked 
horse-hair, and close the parietes with a suture. 
Immerse the organ in a solution of corrosive subli- 
mate, as directed in section 33, and then dry it, and 
having cut it open again, varnish it as directed in 
section 35, and suspend it in a glass case, or a frame, 
having a glass front and back. 

If the placenta has been discharged, the cavity of 
the uterus and vagina are to be filled with hair, and 
the Fallopian tubes with cotton as above directed- 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIOJ^^S- 47 

The uterine vessels may be injected in this case as 
in the other, since the communication between the 
maternal vessels and those of the foetus is so slight, 
that the injection whether coarse or fine, will not 
escape from the spermatic and hypogastric arteries 
into the cavity of the uterus. 



SECTION XXIII. 

Injecting and preparing the Uterus in its state of 
fullest Distention- 

Take the uterus of a woman dying from flooding, 
and after soaking it introduce an ox bladder previ- 
ously soaked, into its cavity, and inflate it with a pair 
of bellows. It may be dried in this state, or it may 
be injected as directed in last section. 

In dissecting it, avoid wounding the bladder, as it 
would injure the vessels to have the organ collapse, 
and undergo a second distention. Dry and varnish 
as directed in sections S4 and 35. 



SECTION XXIV. 

Minute Injection of the Fmtus for making several 
Preparations, 

Preparation. No water should be thrown into 
the vessels. Fix a pipe with a stop-cock into the 
umbilical vein, and tie the arteries in the liga- 
ture. 



48 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

Red minute injection is always chosen for this pur- 
pose ; and is to be thrown with great care, until the 
abdomen and skin all over become very tumid. 
First mucus comes from the mouth and nose, then 
the meconium from the anus, and often pure size. 

Cut oflf the head from the shoulders, the arms be- 
low the shoulder joint, and the legs below the 
aretabulum : then preserve a small portion of the 
integuments around the navel, and remove all the 
interior parietes of the abdomen and chest, so as to 
exhibit the thoracic and abdominal viscera. Cut 
away the integuments and posterior part of the 
theca vertebralis, to exhibit the medulla spinalis. 

Soak out the blood, and preserve it in proof-spirit, 
to shew the viscera and their vascularity. 

From a well injected foetus may be obtained the 
following preparations. 

1. If the foetus be about seven months old, the 
membrana pupilaris. 

2. If it be made of this age, the testicle in the ab- 
domen. 

3. The vascular Siud radiated fibres of the parietal 
bones, 

4. The vascular membrane, including the teeth- 

5. The viscera of the chest separate, if better in- 
jected than those of the abdomen, showing the vascu- 
larity of the lungs, thymus gland, and heart. 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 49 

6. The stomach, whicli is to be inverted, to show 
its vascular and villous coat. 

7. The intestines, which are to be separated from 
the mesentery, and inverted, to show their villous 
coat, 

8. The glandulm revales and kidneys together, to 
exhibit their relative size, and the lobulated struc- 
ture of the kidney. 

9. The uterus and its appendages, to shew the 
long ovaria and plicae of the neck of the uterus and 
vagina. 

10. The external parts of the female organs of 
generation, to show the hymen. 

1 1 . A red portion of the skin, to exhibit its vascu- 
larity. 

12. The medulla spinalis, to shew its vessels, and 
the Cauda equina, 

13. The membrana iympani, to exhibit its vas- 
cularity. 

14. The camty of the tympanum, to show its vascu- 
larity, and that of the periosteum of its bones, 

15. The vestibulum and cochlea, to show the mem- 
branous semicircular canals of the former, with their 
ampullae injected, and the vascularity of the zona 
mollis. 

16. The head, to show the natural appearance of 
the face, the papillae of the lips, tongue, &c. 

17. The hand, to show its natural colour. 

The above preparations are all to be well soaked 
from their blood, and preserved in proof spirit. 

7 



50 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

18. A portion o^skin, freed from its adeps, to show 
its vascularity. 

19. The membrana tympani, to show its vessels. 

20. The heart, to show the foramen ovale, by dis- 
tending the cavities with air ; and, when dry, cutting 
away the outermost sides of the auricles, and intro- 
ducing a bristle. 

21. Any large muscle, freed from its cellular mem- 
brane and fat, and dried, to show the vascularity of 
the muscle. 

The four last are to be dried and varnished, and 
preserved under glasses. 

SECTION XXV. 

Injecting of Bones, and rendering them transparent, 
to show their Vascularity* 

Bones are injected, either to show their natural 
vascularity in their healthy state, or the distention of 
the vessels in the state of inflamation ; this must al- 
ways be done with the minute Injection : there is no 
possibility of filling the vessels of a single bone, but 
by injecting at least the whole extremity. 

An extremity for this purpose being removed from 
the body, a suitable sized pipe is to be properly fixed 
into the principal artery, and the part thoroughly 
heated in hot water ; then proceed to inject accord- 
ing to the rules prescribed in Section 11. To prevent 
any of the Injection escaping from the vessels divid- 
ed in the removal of the part from the body, a liga- 



IJJfJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 51 

ture may be made just below the incision, with any 
kind of cord, and tightened by a twisting stick, in the 
manner of a tourniquette : care should be taken not 
to compress the artery through which the Injection 
is to pass ; this is to be avoided by placing the pipe 
below the ligature. It must be remembered, that the 
object of this experiment, the bone, is frequently sit- 
uated at a considerable distance from the surface ; 
and that the part must be thoroughly heated before 
the operation is attempted, and therefore should lay 
several hours in the hot water, as by neglect of this, 
the whole intention will be defeated ; the surface of 
an extremity will feel sufficiently heated, whilst the 
centre remains, but very little, if at all affected : and 
again, if the Injection is not made thoroughly fluid, it 
will equally tend to frustrate the purpose of the ope- 
rator. 

After the part has been properly injected, and suf- 
fered t o become cold, all the surrounding parts may 
be removed from the bone as clean as possible, and 
then laid in clean water for a few days, changing it 
daily, until the blood is fully extracted ; it is then to 
be immersed in a weak acid liquor, made of one ounce 
of the muriatic acid, and one quart of water, in a 
glass vessel ; in which liquor it is to lay two, three, or 
four months ; the acid, thus diluted, will gradually 
unite with, and dissolve the earthy part of the bone, 
and not injure the animal fibres, or destroy the fine 
vascular organization ; but as the acid becomes neu- 
tralized by the earth of the bone, it will be necessary 
to add a little more from time to time, to kcej) up its 



62 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

original strength. This process should never be has- 
tened, by the addition of too much acid, for that will 
destroy the animal fibres, and ruin the preparation ; 
an unpleasant circumstance, when every thing has 
previously gone on well. The bones should always 
be suffered to lay in the liquor a sufficient length of 
time to complete the process of removing the earthy 
part, or otherwise they never can be made so trans- 
parent, nor of course will they shew their beautiful 
vascularity to such advantage. When this process is 
effected, they will become soft and flexible. It should 
be then taken from the liquor, and suspended in the 
air till perfectly dry ; then immersed in a glass vessel 
filled with fine oil of turpentine, when it will immedi- 
ately assume a beautiful transparency, and shew innu- 
merable minute vessels passing through its most solid 
parts, in as great abundance as any of the soft or 
fleshy parts of the body. The vessel being closed 
according to the directions given in the proper Sec- 
tion, it should be kept from the heat of the sun, 
which is very liable to burst vessels filled with oil of 
turpentine. 



SECTION XXVI. 

A minuie hijection of the Cutis, Intestines, and other 
Mdominal Viscera, to shew their Vascularity, 

For this purpose, very young subjects are gener- 
ally chosen ; and the easiest and most common mode 
of injecting the cutis, or viscera, is by the ascending 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 53 

aorta, as for an entire subject, with this difFerence 
only, that the minute Injection is to be used in this 
case : if the cutis is the object of the experiment, 
such part of it as is intended for preservation, after it 
is injected, must be laid in clean water, and changed 
every day, as long as it imparts a bloody tinge, and 
then is to remain in maceration, without changing the 
water, until the cuticle will easily peel off; by the 
removal of which, the vascularity is much more beau- 
tifully exhibited : after the removal of the cuticle, 
proceed with regard to its preservation, either by 
placing it in its recent state, in a vessel of spirits of 
wine, or by drying, and placing it in oil of turpen- 
tine, or preserving it by varnish. 

With presect to the abdominal viscera, such 
parts as are to be preserved, must be treated in a 
manner similar to the cutis, by cleansing and preserv- 
ing them in spirits of wine, or oil of turpentine, or by 
varnishing ; but it is to be remembered, that such only 
may be preserved in turpentine, or by varnishing, as 
are thin, and capable of being previously dried, as 
the stomach, intestines, urinary bladder, &c. the 
more bulky parts, as the liver, spleen, kidneys, pan- 
creas, &c. cannot be preserved in turpentine, unless 
thin sections of them are made, so as to render them 
capable of being dried without putrefaction. 

Portions of the peritoneum, pleura, periosteum, 
tunica, conjunctiva and dura mater, may also be dried 
and preserved in oil of turpentine, or by varnishing. 



54 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 



SECTION XXVII. 

Injecting and preparing the Head, to preserve its 
7iatural and healthy Appearance- 

Young children are the most proper subjects for 
this purpose ; the head is to be separated from the 
body, as low as the fifth or sixth cervical vertebrae ; 
then thoroughly heated in hot water, and injected by 
the carotid arteries only, with the double pipe (see 
Plate I. Fig. 9) previously securing the vertebrals : 
for this preparation, red minute Injection is always 
to be used ; and if thrown in with freedom, and as 
much force as will be prudent, considering the dan- 
ger of rupturing the vessels, it will pass so perfectly 
into the cutaneous vessels, as to give the natural and 
healthy complexion. When the part is become cold, 
remove the pipes, and suffer it to lay in clean water, 
not only to extract the blood, but to promote putre- 
faction, so that the cuticle will easily peel off, which 
is to be removed from all such parts as are not co- 
vered with hair ; this gives a brightness to the com- 
plexion, exhibits the vascularity of the cutis, and villi 
of the lips. If the cuticle be rem.oved from such 
parts as are covered with hair, the hair will come off 
with it, and occasion an unnatural appearance. Jn 
the putrefaction, attention should be paid to the ear- 
liest period, when the cuticle will peel off, otherwise 
the colour of the cutis will be liable to change, 
and disfigure the preparation. The globes of the 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 55 

eyes will never retain their natural appearance in 
preparation, owing to the crystaline humour and 
transparent cornea becoming opaque ; for which 
reason they should be removed, and the head suppli- 
ed with artificial ones of glass, which are sold by the 
wax figure makers, or by the bead makers. 

The preparation being thus far finished, it is to be 
preserved in spirits of wine, either entire, or in two 
parts ; if the latter, a section is to be made perpendicu- 
larly through the middle, or rather a little on one side 
of the forehead, nose, mouth, chin, trachea, &c. and 
posteriorly through the craneum, sagittal suture, oc- 
ciput, and middle of the cervical vertabree ; the brain 
may then be easily removed, when the larger portion 
will afford a good view of the internal cavities, mem- 
branes, &c. The design in dividing the head a little 
on one side of the middle, is to preserve (in the larg- 
est portion) the falciform process of the dura mater, 
septum narium, &c. 

This section should be made, first with a knife, 
through the soft parts ; the bones will require a saw ; 
and for the internal membranes, scissors will be more 
convenient. 



56 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS- 

SECTION IXVIII. 

Injecting and preparing the Penis » 

A large penis is always preferred, and it should 
be removed from the body. In doing this, the knife 
is to be carried close to the branches of the ischium, 
to which it is connected by two crura : a neglect 
of this precaution may occasion a wound of the 
crura, and escape of the injection. The scrotum is 
to be divided from the rapha to the urethra, and a 
transverse incision of the latter in the perineum, just 
before the prostate, and the whole removed. A 
narrow bladed knife is now thrust into the end of 
one of the crura, and a large pipe inserted, through 
which warm water is to be injected and pressed out 
again, which is to be repeated as long as it returns 
bloody. A small pipe is then introduced into the 
vena magna ipsius penis ^ which runs along the back 
of the penis between the two corpora cavernosa. 
This vein is to be distinguished from the vena tegu- 
meniorum by its being deeper seated and not mov- 
able with the prepuce. Introduce a probe through 
the pipe to the glans penis and break down the 
valves, and inject water to wash out grumous blood, 
as directed for clearing the cavernosa. Then im- 
merse the whole in water to soak out the blood. 
Coarse yellow injection may be thrown into the cor- 
pora cavernosa, and if it escapes from the other crus, 
a ligature should be applied as near the end as possi- 



INJECTED DKY PREPARATIONS- 57 

ble, and the pipe should be stopt. The vena magna 
may be injected with red. After this the integu- 
ments are to be dissected away and the preparation 
dried. 

I have modified this by inflating the corpora ca* 
vernosa forcibly, and tying a ligature firmly around 
the crura, and filling the vena magna with coloured 
injection of red, or dark blue ; and instead of this col- 
oured injection I have supported a column of quick- 
silver on the vena magna till the injection filled 
the corpus spungiosum. The preparation should in 
this case be dried as soon as possible and varnished ; 
as the weight of quicksilver in the glands, will other- 
wise distend it enormously. Pass a thread round 
the penis, immediately behind the corona glandis, to 
compress any vessels that inosculate with the pre- 
puce, and then divide the prepuce back of the thread 
and remove it. Previous to drying, it may be pro- 
tected from insects, as directed in section 33, and 
after drying varnished. 



SECTION XXIX. 

Injecting and preparing a Testicle, 

A testicle of an adult should be chosen free from 
disease, and great care is requisite in removing it 
from the body. First enlarge the abdominal ring, 
push the testicle through from the scrotum ; and sep- 
arate its cellular connecting substance ; then cut the 
8 



58 INJECTED DRY PRPEARATIONS. 

spermatic artery, and pampiniformis plexus, as high 
as possible, and then the vas deferens. 

When well soaked, press out the blood from the 
veins ; put a pipe into the spermatic artery, and 
another into a vein ; and secure all other open 
mouths. 

The artery is to be filled with red injection, and 
the vein, which is without valves, with yellow or blue. 
Then fix. the quicksilver tube in the vas deferens, and 
suspend it in water ; this done, fill it with mercury, 
making the column of it extend as high as convenient 
and continuing it two days, when it may be removed 
and dissected. 

Cut away the tunica vaginalis, and the tunica albu- 
ginea, which requires great care : then remove all 
the cellular and adipose membrane, and dry it on a 
board previously waxed. 

Preserve it in a common preparation glass on a 
blue or green paper ground. 



SECTION XXX. 

Preparation of the Bladder^ Penis, and Vesiculce 
Seminales. 

Make an incision from the top of the pubis down 
each side of the penis, scrotum, and anus to the 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 69 

coccygis, and dissect each side along the inner surface 
of each branch of the ischium and back of the rec- 
tum, and divide the crura of the penis close to the 
bone ; then begin within the pelvis and dissect dovi^n 
round the bladder and rectum, so as to meet the 
former dissection, and draw the contents of the pel- 
vis down and outward. Or if no value is attached 
to the pubis, as making part of the skeleton, it will 
be better to saw through the pubis two inches from 
the symphysis into the centre of the thyroid hole, and 
through each branch of the ischium, in a line with the 
foregoing, leaving the crura of the penis attach- 
ed ; then press the pubis into the pelvis, and dis- 
sect round inside of each tuberosity of the ischium 
and behind the rectum, and draw the contents of 
the pelvis with the pubis down. Dissect the rectum 
from the bladder and remove the perineum, scrotum, 
and prepuce, and all unnecessary muscular and adi- 
pose substance, and inject or inflate the corpora caver- 
nosa as directed in section 25. Find the two vasa def- 
erentia, passing down behind the bladder, from each 
side, and converging towards its neck, and introduce 
a very small pipe into each, and by blowing, the vesi- 
culse seminales will be inflated, especially if the fingers 
be pressed upon the urethra forward of the prostate 
and on the neck of the bladder. Separate the vesic- 
ulse where they approach each other between the 
prostate and urethra, and carefully avoid wounding, 
by inclining the knife to either side, and pass a strong 
thread with a needle under each of their converging 
extremities, then support a column of quicksilver in 
each pipe, and the fluid will run into the vesiculse, 



60 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

and when filled, the threads are to be tied. The 
vasa deferentia may also be tied near the vesiculse 
with a needle and thread, to prevent the flow of 
quicksilver mto the urethra ; and after passing threads 
round where the pipes are inserted, these are to be 
withdrawn. While injecting the vesiculas, the bladder 
should be partially inflated. Instead of introducing 
quicksilver into the vesiculae seminales, they may be 
simply inflated, and dried, and afterwards cut open 
to exhibit their cells. 

Introduce a wire into the urethra to the blad- 
der, and having curved it like a catheter, inflate 
the bladder by a pipe introduced by the side of the 
wire, and then pass a strong ligature round the ure- 
thra at its bulb between the crura, so as to retain the 
air, and withdraw the pipe. Inject the vena magna, 
as directed in section 25, by supporting a column 
of quicksilver in it, till the glands, penis and corpus 
spongiosum are filled. The advantage of the pubis 
in connexion with this preparation is, the support it 
gives to the bladder and root of the penis and its af- 
fording firm points of attachment for supporting the 
whole in a frame. 

The testicle may easily be injected and preserved 
in connexion with the above organs. In this case it 
is best to retain the os pubis, in connection, and in saw- 
ing it, cut to avoid the spermatic cord, by sawing out- 
side of the abdominal ring. After the above-mention- 
ed parts are prepared, a column of quicksilver may 
be supported in a small pipe inserted into the vas 
deferens at the pubis, and directed to the testicle. 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. Gl 

which should be kept immersed in water while re- 
ceiving the quicksilver. 

Immerse the whole preparation in clear water for 
two days, changing the water frequently ; then soak 
it one day in a solution of corrosive sublimate, to pre- 
serve it from insects as directed in section 33. The 
organs may be supported in their natural relative po- 
sition by four wires or strings attached to the ends of 
the bones, and fastened to the top and bottom of a 
square frame. Or if the pubis is not preserved in 
connexion with it, the wire in the urethra may serve 
as a point of support. Place it in a situation favour- 
able for drying, where the inflated bladder will not 
be exposed to changes of temperature, and varnish it 
asd irected in section 35. After the first coat of var- 
nish has dried, an opening may be made in the blad- 
der, and varnish poured into it, and the whole var- 
nished over again. 



SECTION XXXI. 

Frepai^ation of the Pelvis 

Having injected an adult subject as directed in sect. 
12 & 13, divide the trunk near the top of the sacrum, 
ileum and umbilicus, leaving the rectum in its place. 
Amputate the thighs after ihey have been dissected, 
and exhibit the ligaments concerned in hernia, with 
the epigastric artery, the spermatic cord, passing 
from the ring into the testes, inject the testes as di- 



62 INJECTED DRY PREPARATlOIfS. 

rected in sect. 26, and inflate corpora cavernosa from 
one of the crura of the penis, without detaching it 
from the ramus of the ischium and inject the vena 
ma^na. Inflate the bladder, and fill the rectum with 
curled hair. Bend a strong wire or piece of whale 
bone into a circular form, and rest it upon the top 
ofthe bones of the pelvis, and sew the abdominal 
muscles to it in front, from the umbilicus to each 
spine of the ileum. Some of the muscles ofthe pe- 
rineum may be advantageously exhibited in this pre- 
paration 

A preparation like the foregoing, may, after dry- 
ing and before varnishing, be divided at the junction 
of the ileum with the sacrum. 



SECTION XXXII. 

hijection and Preparation of the system of the Ve- 
na PortcJB* 

Choose a subject that is very much emaciated, and 
inject it with fine and coarse injection, from the aor- 
ta ; which, when well conducted, never fails of filling 
ail the arteries of the mesentery and of the hollow 
organs of the abdomen. Remove all the viscera 
from the diaphragm down to the rectum, which is to 
be tied with two ligatures and divided between them. 
There are no valves in the veins of these organs, 
and hence Pole directs them to be injected from 
their roots, where they open into the cava. The 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 63 

blood contained in the veins of the mesentery should 
however be pressed out before injection. Having 
fixed pipes in all the large veins, inflate them for the 
purpose of discovering any that are divided. Throw 
in blue or yellow fine injection, which will fill the 
mesenteric, splenic, and hemorrhoidal veins, and also 
the vena portse. 

Remove all the hollow organs, the stomach to 
make a preparation by itself, and also the intestines, 
leaving the mesenteries entire, and the spleen to dis- 
sect by itself; trace the branches of the vena portse 
into the liver, and then remove nearly all that viscus. 

These organs after being soaked in clean water, 
and afterwards in a solution of corrosive sublimate to 
preserve them from insects as directed in section 33, 
are to be dried, the hollow ones being inflated, and 
the others spread out on waxed paper. 

SECTION XXXIII. 

Means of protecting dried preparations from Insects. 

Every anatomist knows how liable his dry prepa- 
rations are to depredation and destruction by insects. 
To prevent this, varnishing avails but little, for unless 
repeated two or three times a year, they are soon 
destroyed. The chief value of common varnishing 
is, to preserve them from moisture and to give them 
a handsome lustre. To prevent the ravages of insects 
some anatomists mix finely pulverized corrosive sub- 



64 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 

limate with the varnish, in proportion of about a 
quarter of an ounce to a pint. The only objec- 
tion to it is, that it imparts a dusty appearance. 
Another method is, to lay the recent preparation 
after it is ready for drying in sublimate water, about 
twenty-four hours, then slightly wiping the most 
prominent parts with clean water and a sponge, by 
which enough will remain absorbed into the sub- 
stance to protect it, whilst it will be less likely to 
shew itself after the preparation dries, and is varnish- 
ed. The sublimate water is made by dissolving 
finely pulverized corrosive sublimate in distilled or 
rain water, in the proportion of one ounce to a gal- 
lon. Arsenic in very small quantity may be used 
instead of the corrosive sublimate, Daubenton re- 
commends the application of vinegar, with the addi- 
tion of a little nitric acid, to the surface of prepara- 
tions whilst drying, by steeping them in it for some 
hours. Camphor has been recommended, but its 
influence is temporary, and it mars the lustre of the 
surface. The French also use a composition com- 
posed of many ingredients, called the vestaniental es- 
sense of Dupleix. But this also injures the colour 
and lustre of the preparation, and is more applicable 
to the preservation of stuffed animals applied within. 
Becoeur recommends an alcoholic solution of arseni- 
cal soap. Marjolin prefers to either, the liquor of 
Nicholas, prepared in the following manner : 

White soap cut in thin slices, one ounce ; 
Pulverized camphor, two ounces ; 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 65 

Colocynth coarsely pulverised, two ounces ; 
Rectified alcohol, two pounds. 

Mix and macerate four or five days in a bottle, 
agitating frequently and strain it through paper, and 
preserve it in a close bottle- 



SECTION XXXIV. 

Manner of drying Preparations. 

Before this is commenced, the adeps should every 
where be renioved, otherwise they will present a 
greasy surface very unfavourable to the drying and 
subsequent lustre of the varnish. And after it is 
dried, the whole surface of a preparation should be 
washed with a strong solution of carbonate of potash 
or pearlash ; and where any bony portions are laid 
bare, they should be scrubbed several times with 
this liquor, to give them a high degree of whiteness, 
which when varnished, contrasts very handsomely 
with the coloured blood vessels and muscles. The 
alkaline solution is next to be washed off thoroughly 
with clean water. 

The drying should be conducted with expedition, 
unless, as is sometimes the case, putrefaction is de- 
sired. If a part is very thick, as large muscles, it 
will favour the drying to wet them frequently with 



QB INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

pure alcohol, which, by its affinity for water, will 
correct its putrefactive tendency. 

Anatomical preparations should be dried in the 
shade, where there is no dust, and where there is a 
thorough draught of air. If the weather be damp, 
they should be dried in a room moderately warmed 
by a stove, for if much heated, the injection may li- 
quify and ooze out through the branches of the ves- 
sels ; and if the preparations are hollow, the rarefac- 
tion of their contained air may over distend, if not 
burst them. Membranes may be stretched out upon 
a board previously waxed, or covered with waxed 
paper, and may be confined with pins. 



SECTION XXXV. 
Of Varnishing Preparations. 

This is done to prevent their becoming mouldy, and 
to protect them from insects, (which it however does 
only partially,) to increase the transparency of the 
membranes, tendons and ligaments, and give a bet- 
ter view of their vascularity. 

White spirit copal varnish of the shops, is suitable 
for inflexible preparations, as bony or muscular parts, 
but on account of its friability, it is unsuitable for such 
as are thin and flexible, as bladders, intestines, mem- 
branes, &c. the handling of which causes the varnish 
to crumble, and produces opacity, and it is moreover 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 67 

not SO good a security against moisture. For these 
reasons, oil copal varnish is preferable, is a better 
preservative against insects, and admits of the pre- 
parations being washed without injury, with soap and 
water. Whatever varnish is used, it should be done 
after all greasiness is removed, and the preparation 
perfectly dried ; and it should be applied two or 
three times successively, allowing each coat to be 
perfectly dried, before another is applied. 

Varnish should always be laid on with a fine cam- 
ePs-hair pencil-brush, about the size of the finger or 
smaller, as occasion may require. Hollow prepara- 
tions should have the varnish poured into them, and 
after turning them about in all directions, it is to be 
drained out as clean as possible. Varnish brushes af- 
ter being used for oil copal varnish, should be immers- 
ed immediately after in oil of turpentine, and for 
spirituous copal varnish in alcohol, as they will oth- 
erwise soon be destroyed. 

Corroded preparations should be varnished, by 
pouring it on them in all directions and holding them 
over a basin, until it all drains off, taking care to re- 
move drops that collect on the most depending ex- 
tremities of the vessels. When properly done and 
repeated, it strengthens the branches and increases 
their beauty. 



68 EJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

SECTION XXXVI. 

COMPOSITION OF VARNISHES. 

Spirituous Copal Varnish. 

Recipe. Take of fine gum copal, reduced to a 
powder, and clean white sand of each one ounce, put 
them into a pint bottle, then pour in three ounces of 
the highest rectified spirit of wine. Shake them 
briskly until the gum is dissolved, when the sand 
will settle to the bottom and the spirit appear yellow- 
After it stands sometime, it will be fine and transpa- 
rent, and fit for use. 

Brown Spirit Varnish. 

This is mentioned in the formulae for warm injec- 
tions and is made like the foregoing, using a coarse 
dark coloured gum copal. When bought at the shops 
ready made, its price, compared with that of the 
white spirit varnish, is very low. 

Oil Copal Varnish. 

Reduce fine gum copal to a powder, and liquify it 
over a well regulated fire in a copper vessel, then 
add to it about two thirds its quantity of clean linseed 
oil, and as much oil or spirits of turpentine as will 
give it, when cold, the consistence of syrup. This 



EJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 69 

varnish if made in a small quantity, is not likely to be 
so good, and its quality will be much improved by 
standing twelve months. The whiteness of this, as 
well as of the spirit varnish, depends chiefly on the 
whiteness and purity of the gum and other ingredi- 
ents. The solvents used are of so inflammable a na- 
ture, that great caution is required in making it. It 
is better to apply to chaise makers for it, who require 
it in its greatest purity. If too viscid it may be easi- 
ly diluted with a little spirits of turpentine. 

Turpentine Varnish. 

Turpentine varnish is made by melting Venice 
turpentine over a slow fire, and adding to it as much 
spirits of turpentine, as will reduce it to the consis- 
tence of syrup, and stirring them well together. 

There are other varnishes, recommended by 
Swan, which will be noticed hereafter, when giving 
his new method of making anatomical preparations. 



SECTION XXXVTI. 

Trames Jor drying Preparations. 

When a preparation is drying, it should be fasten- 
ed in a frame of suitable dimensions in which it may 
remain till varnished, or longer. These frames may 
be made of different shapes ; for an extremity it 
should represent a four sided pyramid, and the cor- 



70 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 

ners should be connected together with cross bars 
near each end ; for a head, heart, and genital organs, 
it may be of a cube shape. When the dissection and 
washing of a preparation is finished, it is to be fas- 
tened in this frame in the proper position, and secur- 
ed with twine. 



SECTION XXXVIII. 

Manner of repaimig old and injured dry Prepara- 
tions* 

Such pieces as are too valuable to be lost, but 
have been defaced by handling, or by insects, or time, 
may be in some degree restored. Injected pieces 
that require cleaning, should be plunged for some 
hours in warm water. A solution of carbonate of 
potash is then to be applied extensively with a com- 
mon painter's brush, rubbing every part. After re- 
peated washings in this manner, the alkali is to be 
thoroughly washed off in clean water, in which the 
piece is to soak for some hours, and then taken out 
and dried. The vessels that are broken may be re- 
paired with glazier's putty, or gum mastich, or wax, 
the same may be done with injured muscles. Mem- 
branous pieces, when partially destroyed by insects 
or otherwise, should be carefully cleaned with a dry 
brush, or washed, if they require it, and mended with 
pieces of bladder of suitable thickness, or some pie- 
ces of the same kind of membranes, cut to a proper 



INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 71 

shape and size, and fastened round the edges with 
gum arabic or isinglass. 

Having repaired the part, blood vessels may be 
covered of suitable colours with a pencil brush, and 
those of the membranes can be traced over the mem- 
branous patches. Having applied the colours, the 
pieces are next to be varnished. For these old re- 
paired preparations, a little corrosive sublimate ad- 
ded to spirit copal varnish, should be used. 



72 



CHAPTER II. 



CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 



SECTION XXXIX. 



General observations on making and preserving 
Corroded Preparations. 

' These are among the most beautiful ornaments 
of an anatomist's cabinet, and when the student has 
acquired dexterity by long experience, they are very 
easily prepared. They are generally made of the 
injections of solid viscera, as the heart, lungs, liver, 
kidney, and spleen ; and as full grown organs are with 
more difficulty corroded and preserved without any 
corresponding advantage, those of small subjects are 
preferable. They should always be -injected after 
they are removed from the body, as the handling of 
them while dissecting them from their natural situa- 
tion, will, if previously injected, be almost sure to 
break some of their branches. There is no necessity 
for using the fine injection, for even the common 
coarse warm injection is apt to run too minutely for 
giving a favourable view of the vessels. The cold 
injection is altogether unsuitable for such prepara- 
tions, and the warm kind requires an increased pro- 



CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 73 

portion of resin and wax, to pre\^ent liquefaction in 
hot weather. The liquor for corrosion should consist 
of three parts of muriatic or nitric acid and one of 
water and as its strength is diminished by use, a little 
acid should occasionally be added. The vessel for 
corrosion should be of glass or well glazed stone ware, 
having a top to it of like material. For a heart, a 
goblet-shaped vessel is best, and for larger organs as 
the lungs, a bucket-shaped vessel. The preparation 
may be suspended in the vessel by a slip of lead 
attached to a leaden or glass cross-bar, resting on the 
edge of the vessel, or a leaden hook may pass down 
through the cover to hold it. 

Dissect the organ from the body without wound- 
ing it or any of the large vessels that are to receive 
the pipes. The veins having no valves are easily in- 
jected. Pipes being inserted into the blood-vessels 
and one into the excretory duct, if the organ has 
one, immerse the part in water as warm as the fingers 
can bear, from two to four hours, according to its 
size. The vessel should be so deep, that when the 
organ is raised to bring out the pipes, no part of it 
may rest on the bottom. The ligature that secures 
the pipes, should have its ends left of such length 
as to form a loop, through which a rod may pass to 
support it by resting on the edge of the vessel during 
the heating and injecting. After throwing in the 
injections pour cold water into the vessel, and when 
cooled pass a slip of sheet lead round one of the 
principal vessels to move and suspend the organ by, 
as before mentioned, because twine might cut into 
10 



74 CORRODED PREPARATIONS* 

the injection, and would be destroyed by the acid. 
The pipes are now removed and the organ is im- 
mersed in corroding liquor, from three to six weeks, 
or until its texture is entirely destroyed and reduced 
to a pulpy state. 

When dissolved, remove the part from the acid by 
the leaden slip, and lay it in a basin filled with clean 
water. In that situation, direct a gentle stream of 
water upon it until cleaned, and should portions ap- 
pear to be undissolved, immerse it again for a week 
or ten days in the acid, and force a stream upon it 
from a syringe, and by holding it under a stream of 
water. When perfectly cleaned, immerse the ves- 
sels in clean water, to remove adhering acid and sus- 
pend it to dry. Varnish it by holding it over a vessel, 
and pouring the varnish over it, and letting it drain 
off. The varnish will increase the strength of the 
vessels. When finished, their bases or trunks may 
be planted in pedestals of plaster of Paris, or they 
may be laid in a glass case, on soft silk cushions. 

These preparations require great care and much 
time to complete them, and when finished, are of all 
others most liable to be demolished by trivial acci- 
dents ; it is therefore expedient to defend them as 
much as possible from injuries ; for this purpose they 
are to be fixed upon pedestals of Plaster of Paris ; a 
hole is to be made in the top of the pedestal, large 
enough to receive the trunks which ramify through 
the gland, or other part prepared ; then this hole 
should have a proper quantity of fluid plaster poured 



CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 75 

into it, the preparation immediately placed in the 
pedestal, and held in a proper position, until the plas- 
ter has become hard enough to support it. These 
pedestals are then commonly fixed with glue on a 
mahogany stand, and covered with a glass vessel ; but 
this method is not a sufficient security, unless the glass 
cover is cemented down, as its occasional removal will 
endanger the preparation : for persons who have not 
made them are not always satisfied with looking, but 
every now and then trying their strength by the finger, 
at the expense of destroying its most beautiful parts ; 
neither does the moveable cover sufficiently exclude 
the dust. The most effectual method of preserving 
them from accidents, dust, and officious hands, is, to 
fix them in box frames, which may be oval or square ; 
the ovals are the neatest but th:i most expensive, they 
may be glazed in front, or front and back. The glass 
should be let in upon an outside rabbet,* and confin- 
ed by slips of paper being pasted along the outside 
of the same rabbet, extending over the edge of the 
glass. These frames should be fined with white pa- 
per, or any coloured paper, if necessary, to be con- 
trasted to the colour of the injection ; the outside is 
generally blacked. 

These preparations, when thus finished, should be 
kept from the rays of the sun, and heat of the fire ; 
which, if the injection is not very hard, will be likely 
to soften it, so that the branches will become flexible, 
and bend by their own weight. 



* A term iisod among mechanics, to imply a channel in the edge of a 
board, &c. 



76 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 



SECTION XL.* 

Injecti?ig and Corroding the Heart a?id Vessels of 
the Lungs. 

For this purpose, those of young subjects should 
be chosen, on account of the inconvenient size of 
adult parts. 

The first part of the process is to remove as much 
as possible the coagula from the cavities of the heart 
and adjacent blood vessels, that it may not obstruct 
the passage of the Injection. The right side of the 
heart and pulmonary artery, may be injected by ei- 
ther of the vena cavae, fixing a pipe in one of them, 
and securing the other by a hgature : its left side and 
pulmonary veins may be injected by the aorta de- 
scendens, securing by ligature the subclavian and ca- 
rotid arteries. The Injection by the aorta will be 
retrograde to the circulation ; but we find that, in the 
dead subject, the valves do not so completely per- 
form their office, as in the living, and that the Injec- 
tion will in general readily pass into the heart, 
though contrary to the natural circulation ; but to 
avoid any risque, they may be perforated or broken 
down by some proper instrument introduced into the 
aorta. The air cells are next to be injected by the 
trachea ; this is to be done with great care, for if the 
Injection is forced beyond a certain degree, it will 
form extravasations on the surface. The two sides 
of the heart, and the air-cells should be injected with 



CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 77 

different colours, which, when finished, the parts plac- 
ed in a natural position, and the pipes removed, the 
preparation may be put immediately into the acid 
liquor for corrosion, and finished according to the 
rules already laid down. 



SECTION XLL* 

Injectmg and Corroding the Heart- 

A heart for the purpose of corrosion need not to 
be chosen free from fat, as is directed in most other 
injected preparations of this viscus ; for in the present 
case the heart and vessels are to be destroyed by the 
acid liquor. 

The mode of conducting the process is, first, the 
heart being taken out, wash its cavities very clean, 
taking care that there be no coagulum left : more 
care is required in this respect, than any other 
preparation of the heart. Drain out the water 
thoroughly, and fix a pipe in the superior cava, to 
inject the right side and another in one of the pul- 
monary veins, to inject the left side of the heart ; 
then secure the mouths of all the other vessels by a 
ligature, and inject the two sides of the heart with 
two different coloured injections ; when cold, re- 
move the pipes, and put the part into the acid liquor 
for Corrosion, which, w^hen completed, and the 
preparation washed, gives the exact model of the 
internal parts of the heart and the large adjacent 



78 CORRODED PREPARATIOIS^S. 

blood-vessels. This preparation should be varnish- 
ed and preserved under a glass cover from dust and 
other injuries. 



SECTION XLIL* 

Injecting and Corroding the Liver. 

For the purpose of making a complete corroded 
preparation of the liver, it will require four pipes, and 
as many different coloured Injections. The vessels 
by which this viscus is to be injected, are, the hsepa- 
tic artery coming off from the caeliaca, the vena por- 
tse, the vena cava ascendens, and the ductus hsepati- 
cus, through which the bile is conveyed to the gall 
bladder. The vena cava on the superior surface of 
the liver, should be secured by a ligature, after the 
blood is washed out as clean as possible. The injec- 
tions consisting of red for the arteries, blue for the 
hepatic veins, black for the vena portse, and yellow 
for the biliary vessels, are to be conducted according 
to the general rules ; when this process is finished, 
remove the pipes, and put the liver into the acid li- 
quor for Corrosion, before the Injection becomes 
cold and brittle, and never let it be handled till it is 
perfectly corroded ; then let it be washed clean, and 
when dry, varnished and fixed upon a proper pedes- 
tal, securing it from dust and other injuries by a glass 
cover. 



CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 79 

SECTION XLIIL* 
Injecting the Spleen for Corrosion. 

A Spleen chosen for the purpose of Corrosion, 
should always be very recent, as its texture is soon 
broken down by putrefaction. This is to be injected 
by the artery and vein only, having no excretory 
duct. If the spleen is very fresh, it will shew the ex- 
tremities of the veins uniformly rounded. The pro- 
cess of corroding, cleaning, varnishing, &c. are de- 
scribed under their proper heads. First inject water 
frequently by the arter y which returns ordinarily with 
the veins and clears them. 

SECTION XLIV.* 

Injecting Kidneys for Corrosion. 

A Kidney for a successful experiment of this kind, 
should be in a perfectly sound state, and free from 
any calculi. 

The general intention of injecting the kidneys of 
the human subject, as well as of other animals, is 
for Corrosion, as the ramifications of their vessels 
cannot be so well shown in any other way. This is 
one of the most simple operations of the kind. There 
are three orders of vessels to be injected : the arte- 



80 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 

ries, veins, and urinary duct. The artery is distin- 
guishable from the vein, in this as in most other parts 
of the body, by its greater thickness and elasticity ; 
and also by being generally (in its healthy state) 
smaller than the vein, which vessel it bears the great- 
est resemblance to ; and the duct, by the enlarge- 
ment near its entrance into the kidney, it being situ- 
ated more inferiorlj^ and in general is much longer 
than the vein or artery ; but this last depends upon 
accidental circumstances. Proper sized pipes being 
fixed into the vessels, proceed according to the gen- 
eral rules, to fill each with a different coloured Injec- 
tion; and after removing the pipes, immerse the 
kidney in diluted muriatic acid, for five or six 
weeks, or until the texture of every part of the kid- 
ney is so thoroughly destroyed, that it may be entire- 
ly washed away by a gentle stream of water. 

Kidneys for the purpose of injecting, should be re- 
moved from the body with care, that neither the part 
itself, or its vessels, may be in the least degree 
wounded ; as by such an accident the Injection will 
escape. Neither should we be solicitous to remove 
the surrounding adeps and cellular membrane, more 
than may be just sufficient for fixing the pipes, on 
account of the numerous small branches which are 
frequently going off from the emulgents into the sur- 
rounding substance. 

A variety of beautiful and elegant preparations may 
be made of the kidneys of different animals. The 
sheep's is very similar to the human in figure and 



CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 81 

structure ; the hog's is more extended than the 
sheep's ; the dog's ramify different from either, and 
the vessels more superficial ; the horse's varies much 
in its external figure, but makes a noble and beautiful 
preparation ; the cow's differs in figure and structure 
from either of the former ; the tyger's has and order 
of superlicial vessels, beautifully ramifying from the 
trunk of the emulgent in a radiate direction over 
those deeper seated. Thus by collecting from 
different animals, we may form a most pleasing col- 
lection. 



SECTION XL v.* 

Injecting and Corroding Placenlce. 

A Placenta chosen for this purpose, should have 
large vessels, and the substance of it should be en- 
tire and not torn, so as to admit the Injection to es- 
cape ; particular care should be taken that the arte- 
ries and veins are washed very clean from blood, and 
the water forced out of them again, by throwing in 
repeatedly a syringe full of air : the vessels should 
be particularly well injected for the purpose of Cor- 
rosion ; for if there are only one or two breaks or 
separations of the Injection in any of the larger 
branches, by means of blood or water remaining in 
the vessels, or by any other cause, it will render it 
unfit for this particular purpose ; and in such case it 
may be made a different preparation of, and with this 
view the membranes ought always to be preserved 
11 



82 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 

until it is seen how we succeed with the injection ; 
which is to be performed in the same manner as di- 
rected in the above section. If the Injection has 
succeeded, then place the umbilical chord in such a 
position, as will be least inconvenient when the pre- 
paration is finished, for it cannot well be placed af- 
ter it is corroded. It should be then put into the 
acid liquor, before the Injection becomes cold and 
liable to break ; to guard against this, let it be hand- 
led as little as possible. We should not attempt 
washing it until it is completely corroded, and then 
handled with the greatest caution; for this is a pre- 
paration of all others most liable to be destroyed by 
the smallest accident ; to guard more effectually 
against which, it should not be taken out of the ves- 
sel in which it is corroded, until it is completely w^ash- 
ed ; for the hands cannot easily support uniformly 
so broad a body ; so that the weight of such parts as 
are not properly supported, will be liable to break the 
vessels, the surrounding fleshy parts having lost all 
their strength, by being reduced to a pulp. 



SECTION XLVL* 

Jl Corroded Preparation of the Penis. 

Nothing more need be said upon the subject of in- 
jecting the Penis for Corrosion, than what is already 
given in a former section, as the Injection will in ev- 
ery respect be the same ; when this is done, the part 
is to be put in the muriatic acid, until all the cuticu- 



CORRODJED PREPARATIONS. 83 

lar and membranous parts are fully destroyed ; then 
it is to be removed from the acid, and washed as oth- 
er corroded preparations, taking particular care not 
to break the vena magna, or any of its branches. 



SECTION XL VII.* 

Injecting the Pancreas for Corrosion, 

The duct is all that can be readily injected in 
this viscus ; it may be found entering the duodenum 
with the ductus communis, but in some instances a 
little below it ; the part being carefully removed from 
the body, fix a pipe of the proper size in the duct, 
and conduct the Injection as usual. 

To this gland we have no proper artery or vein, it 
being supplied only by branches from the splenic 
vessels ; for which reason it is difficult to preserve 
by corrosion more than the excretory duct, unless 
we inject and corrode the splenic vessels with it 



84 



CHAPTER III. 

ClUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 



SECTION XLVIII. 
General Observations, 

The fluidity, specific gravity, and metalic lustre of 
quicksilver, render it valuable for displaying minute 
vessels. The principal objection to its general use 
for filling such vessels is, the continuance of its 
fluidit}', which renders dissection impracticable. 
Its great specific gravity when supported in a 
column is such, as to exert strong pressure upon 
a blood-vessel, or lymphatic that receives it from 
the column and renders a syringe unnecessary. 
It is to be borne in mind that the force of the injec- 
tion depends upon the perpendicular height of the 
column, and not its diameter, and the former may be 
such as to burst the vessel. The part should always 
be injected in a proper tray, that the mercury may be 
easily collected. If a lymphatic preparation, provide 
very small lancets, straight and delicately pointed, 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS- 85 

fine needles, both straight and curved, and armed 
with waxed threads. For common blood-vessel 
preparations, glass tubes of the shape of a straight 
blowpipe are wanted, as metallic pipes are many of 
them unsuitable, on account of their liabiUty to be 
acted upon by mercury. The tubes and pipes used 
for injecting the lymphatics and lacteals are general- 
ly either Walter's, Mascagni's or Dameril's. The 
first is most commonly used in this country and in 
England, but the other kinds are preferred on the 
continent. Plates and descriptions of these are giv- 
en at the end of the book. 



SECTION XLIX. 

Injecting the Lymphatics with Mercury. 

The following is from the pen of an assistant of 
Mr. Charles Bell, who aided in making the splendid 
collection of lymphatic preparations in Windmill 
Street, London. They are superior to the directions 
of Pole, or any other writer, so far as I am able to 
judge from my own experience. 

In injecting Lymphatics, our success depends, per- 
haps, more on the body we choose, than on any other 
circumstance. It has been commonly said, that drop- 
sical bodies were the best for making lymphatic pre- 
parations from ; but it will be found, that bodies but 
slightly anasarcous, if they be emaciated, are the 
best. In a patient dying of consumption, or any dis- 



86 QUICKSILVER EJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 

ease by which the fat of the body has been absorb- 
ed, we shall succeed perhaps better than in any 
other. It is not merely the finding the lymphatics 
easily, and filling them with mercury, (for this may 
be done in almost any body) that the success of the 
preparation depends, but more on the quickness of 
drying the parts after the vessels are injected. 

From the valvular structure of the lymphatics, it is 
necessary to inject from the extremities towards the 
trunk. In injecting an arm, or leg, we ought to be- 
gin as near the fingers, or toes, as possible ; though 
we never can expect to inject the lymphatics as far 
down as they are represented in some anatomical 
plates. 

There is a very great difficulty in discovering lym- 
phatics, which is owing to several causes. They are 
very small, but it is their being generally empty, and 
their coats being transparent, that form the great dif- 
ficulty. It is advised by some, to make use of mag- 
nifying glasses ; but these will be found of little or 
no service, as it is not so much their small size, as 
their transparency, that is the cause of their obscuri- 
ty. Small branches of nerves, and small veins, are 
very often mistaken for them ; and even the most ex- 
perienced eye will not always discover his mistake, 
until he attemptslo fill them with mercury. 

It is almost in vain for any one to attempt injecting 
lymphatics without an assistant ; there are so many 
things requisite, besides merely the holding the tube 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS, 87 

in the vessel, that he will find he can make little pro- 
gress by himself. 

It is necessary before beginning, to see that there 
is within his reach, sharp-pointed scissors, knives, 
forceps, lancets, pokers for tubes, needles, and wax- 
ed thread, so arranged that they canbe used instant- 
ly ; for it will often happen, that it will be almost im- 
possible for either the assistant or the operator to 
take his eye for a moment off the vessel, without los- 
ing it. It is very requisite, also, that the assistant b e 
very dexterous, as his office is often one of greater 
difficulty than that of the principal operator. 

Having every thing arranged, place the foot or 
hand in a tray, to catch the mercury that may fall. 
The foot ought to be a little more elevated than the 
groin, to assist the flow of the mercury towards that 
part. With a sharp scapel, cut off a portion of the 
skin horizontally, so as to expose the loose cellular 
texture ; for in this texture are the superficial lym- 
phatics generally situated. If there is not one to be 
found near the toes, which is very often the case, it 
will probably be possible to find one running across 
the saphena magna, on the instep. Having found 
one, take hold of it with the forceps, dissect it from 
the surrounding substance, and, to secure the keep- 
ing of it, put a needle with a fine waxed silk thread 
under it. Having still hold of it with the forceps, 
snip it half across with fine scissors, and into the cut 
made by the scissors, introduce the fine poker, 
(which is made for clearing the pipes.) Take now, 



88 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 

frcm the 'assistant's hand, the tube containing the 
mercury, with the stopcock already turned, and let 
the stream of mercury play on the side of the poker, 
which generally so directs the stream that it enters 
the vessel ; and when once you have succeeded in 
getting a few drops of mercury into the lymphatic, it 
will be easy to get the pipe into the open mouth of 
the vessel, and then the poker may be withdrawn. 

There is an apparent clumsiness in this method of 
filling the vessels ; but in this manner the smallest 
vessels may be injected, when it will be found quite 
impossible to inject them in the old way of punctur- 
ing the lymphatic with a lancet, and introducing the 
point of the tube into it. The scissors make a better 
kind of cut than the lancet, though there is a great 
deal of nicety required in using them, as we are very 
apt to cut the vessel completely through. The 
poker is of very great service, as by it, it is always 
possible to know whether it is a lymphatic or a small 
nerve that we have got ; if it be a lymphatic, the 
poker passes on smoothly ; if a nerve, it does not 
pass on smoothly, but tears the nerve into fibres. 
When introduced into a lymphatic, it holds aside the 
lips of the cut, so that the mercury passes into the 
vessel by the side of it. 

If the vessel be a large one, into which the pipe is in- 
troduced, it ought to be tied round the pipe with the 
thread which was pre\4ously put under it. The mercu- 
ry is to be pressed on by the assistant, with the handle 
of the knife, while the injector ought never to take his 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 89 

eye off his pipe, and according to the direction of 
his assistant, elevate or depress the tube containing 
the mercury, which v/ill regulate the force of the in- 
jection. The mouth of the vessel ought to be moist- 
ened at intervals, to prevent its getting dry, which im- 
pedes the flow of the mercury. This lymphatic may 
have chanced to fill a considerable number of vessels 
on the thigh— the mercury is still to be pressed on to 
the glands in the groin, taking care that the foot is not 
too much elevated, as by that, the column of mercury 
would be elevated higher than the vessels in the 
glands could bear, especially as the lymphatics at this 
part seem to be more easily burst than at any other. 
We ought now to discover as many lymphatics as we 
can, in the neighbourhood of the first, and proceed 
with them in the same manner. If the glands are 
not completely filled, we ought to endeavour to find 
for each gland, the vessel that has the most influence 
in filling it, (for there generally appears to be one 
vessel which fills the gland more quickly than the 
others.) Having found it, we secure the other ves- 
sels, and fill up the gland from its principal vessel. 
If we want to make a good display of the glands at 
the groin, we ought to tie the secondary vessels aris- 
ing from them, as the mercury often passes into the 
secondary vessels, before it fills the gland itself. 

These vessels ought to be dissected and dried as 

quickly as possible ; for if the limb becomes putrid, 

the mercury in the lymphatics is very apt to become 

black. After exposing them, they ought to be tied 

12 



90 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 

at regular intervals, and always kept in the horizon- 
tal position, as they are very apt to burst when drj^ 

In injecting the lymphatics of the liver, or the lac- 
teals of the intestines, by merely puncturing the 
vessel with the lancet, we may generally succeed ; 
for then there is a surface opposed to the vessel, 
which keeps it more steady than the vessels in the 
limbs. 

By blowing air into the lymphatics, we may inject 
them more easily ; but, there is always the disadvan- 
tage attending this method, that the air prevents the 
flow of the mercury into the glands. 

These preparations are attended with so much 
trouble in their making, that it is of some conse- 
quence to be able to preserve them. If we endea- 
vour to do this by merely varnishing and drying them, 
we shall soon see our labour defeated ; for the 
change from the horizontal position, or a change of 
temperature, will, in all probability, burst the vessels. 
By preserving them in spirits of turpentine, we not 
only avoid the changes of temperature, and the de- 
struction by insects, but add much to their beauty. 

In the foregoing directions it is supposed the dis- 
sector is using Walter's steel pipes, but the following 
remarks are by Mascagni who used glass pipes, and 
although they are partly a repetition of the other 
yet his great celebrity in this department of anatomy 
warrents their being added. Separate a layer of 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 91 

skin from the back of the hand or foot, or other 
part to be injected, laying bare a very small portion 
at a time, lest the lymphatics exposed to the air 
should dry and disappear. This being done, a great 
number of little vessels may be seen, filled with a 
transparent humour ; these anastomosing togeth- 
er, become larger branches, the reunion of which 
forms trunks, into which the glass pipe can be 
introduced. This being done, you take in one 
hand, continues Mascagni, the part to be prepar- 
ed, and in the other a little lancet ; the fore arm 
being supported, you cut the vessel lengthways, and 
avoid plunging through it, as this will render the 
introduction of the pipe more difficult. Keep your 
eye upon the incision you have made, while an assis- 
tant hands you. a tube having a little mercury in it to 
prevent air from obstructing the current of the metal. 
Introduce the little extremity of the tube into the 
incision, and unless the pipe fills the tube, pass a 
thread round the vessel and pipe with a needle ; but 
great care is necessary in doing this, or the point of 
the pipe will be broken ; and other pipes should be 
ready at hand, in case such accident should happen. 
The assistant fills the tube with mercury, which by 
its weight runs gradually through the lymphatic, fill- 
ing it to the glands. When the mercury will no long- 
er pass, tie the vessel with the thread, and withdraw 
the tube. Proceed in the same manner with other 
trunks. I have in this way injected eighteen upon 
the back of the foot, and twenty three upon the back 
and palm of the hand. 



92 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
SECTION L. 

Injection of the Lymphatics^ by DumeriL 

Marjolin directs the improved tube of Dumeril to 
be used thus. The vessel being exposed to view 
as above directed, and the instrument three-fourths 
full of mercury, the anatomist takes hold of it as with 
a pen to write, at the place where the tubes unite, 
and leaning upon his forearm, he brings the point of 
the pipe horizontally to the vessel, and introduces 
it by a gentle movement of the fingers. 

SECTION LI.* 
Lijecting the Lacteals with Quicksilver. 

The Lacteals are an extremely delicate and trans- 
parent set of vessels, which arise from every part of 
the intestines, and pass through the mesentery 
towards its root, in order to convey the chyle from 
the intestines to the thoracic duct; in the human sub- 
ject, they are very similar to the lymphatics, and like 
them, numerously supplied with valves, which pre- 
vent them from being injected contrary to the course 
of the chyle. They are more visible in subjects that 
have died suddenly, soon after eating a full meal, be- 
ing then distended with the chyle, produced by the 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 93 

aliment recently taken in. They are to be injected 
in the following manner : — take a small portion of the 
intestine and mesentery, and make an incision in one 
of the most conspicuous Lacteals, as near as possible 
to its origin in the intestine ; then introduce the point 
of the injecting pipe, and conduct the operation 
agreeable to the rules before described in the pre- 
ceding articles ; when the quicksilver flows out of any 
of the divided vessels, they are to be stopped by an 
assistant (see plate II. fig. 5 ;) when as many of the 
lacteals are filled as will receive the quicksilver from 
this orifice, introduce the pipe into another, and re- 
peat the process as before, and so on until as many of 
them are filled as can be ; then inflate the intestine, 
and suspend it in the air to dry, or if there should be 
any orifice through which the air may escape, let it 
be distended with wool ; the part being perfectly 
dried, the wool should be removed, or the air evacu- 
ated, by cutting ofl"the two ends of the intestines, as 
also to give access to the oil of turpentine, in which 
it is to be kept ; or it may be preserved by varnish- 
ing, both inside and out. 

The intestines of the turtle are very favourable for 
preparations of this kind, as in them the lacteals are 
much larger io proportion to the animal, than in the 
human subject, and sometimes may be injected con- 
trary to the course of the lymph. The lacteals in 
fishes have no valves. 

The beauty of these preparations will be much 



94 QUICKSILVER IJ>fJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 

increased, bj the arteries being also injected with 
the fine and coarse red injection, and the veins with 
yellow. 



SECTION LIL* 

Injecting the Parotid Gland with Quicksilver, 

The Parotid Gland is situated posterior to the 
masseter muscle, and anterior to the lower part of the 
ear ; it extends from the zygomatic arch to the angle 
of the lower jaw ; its duct passes over the masseter, 
and through the buccinator into the mouth. 

This gland should be injected in situ, on account of 
the numerous branches which it is giving off on all 
sides, and which are so transparent, as to escape the 
eye of a common dissector, unless they are rendered 
more visible, by being first filled with quicksilver. In 
conducting this operation, raise the cutis on the side 
of the face, from the ear to the mouth, and from the 
temporal muscle to the neck, taking care to keep the 
knife close to the skin, that it may not wound the 
gland ; then with the utmost caution, dissect away the 
adeps and cellular membrane, from the masseter 
muscle, in search of the duct, a tube of about two 
inches in length, and the size of a crow quill, easily 
eluding the search of an inexperienced student: 
when discovered, make an opening into it with the 
point of a lancet, sufficiently large to introduce the 
point of the steel injecting pipe, as distant from the 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 95 

gland as possible ; and when introduced, confine the 
duct upon it by a ligature, with a single knot, that it 
may serve, when the pipe is withdrawn, to secure 
the quicksilver in the gland ; and that if any acci- 
dent should render it necessary to relax or remove 
it, it may be done with the less difficulty, or without 
danger of injuring the duct. When the gland has 
received as much of the quicksilver as it can contain, 
the pipe withdrawn, and duct secured, proceed with 
all possible care to dissect it from its situation, re- 
membering a slight wound in the gland would be 
likely to destroy it ; in this process, the numerous 
branches going off to the surrounding parts, should be 
secured by a very small curved needle and single lig- 
ature, after which they may be divided with safety ; 
when the gland is thus removed from its situation, lay 
it in a dish, and take away as much of the surround- 
ing useless parts as possible, without endangering it ; 
then lay it in clean water for a day or two, to extract 
the bloody colour ; after which it is to be spread up- 
on a piece of pasteboard, and placed in the air until 
perfectly dry ; then remove it from the pasteboard, 
and preserve it in a glass vessel of fine oil of turpen- 
tine. 



SECTION LIIL* 

Injecting the Lymphatics on the Suy^face of the 
Liver, ivith Quicksilver. 

Procure the liver of an anasarcous subject, take a 
portion of it about the size of a hand, upon which the 



96 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 

lymphatics are most visible ; they are small, and al- 
most imperceptible whitish lines, running plentifully 
on the surface ; the part to be injected should be 
laid in a dish^ or the injecting tray, to catch the 
quicksilver, which would otherwise be lost ; then 
with the point of a lancet, puncture one of the larg- 
est of them, sufficient to introduce the pipe of the 
injecting tube with ease ; the curved pipe should be 
used for this purpose, that its point may stand hori- 
zontally, corresponding with the direction of the 
vessel, whilst the upper part of the tube is inclined 
obhquely toward the shoulder of the operator, 
as a pen is held in the act of writing ; the column 
of quicksilver in the tube may be raised to 
about five or six inches ; when it begins to flow, it 
will be necessary to prevent its escape from the ves- 
sel, by pressing the finger gently upon the ori- 
fice, or by a ligature upon the pipe, taking care not 
to obstruct the flow of the quicksilver ; if, when a 
small portion has passed into the lymphatics, it 
seems inclined to stop, it will then be necessary to 
force it forward, by a gentle pressure with the edge 
of a steel spatula, urging it in that direction in \^hich 
it seems most inclined to run ; by this the valves 
will be broken down ; being in this viscus particular- 
ly weak, so that we may inject without regard to the 
course of circulation ; when the quicksilver is pretty 
uniformly distributed over the surface, remove the 
pipe, and secure the orifice as usual ; then cut the in- 
jected portion of liver, from that part which is not in- 
tended to be preserved, taking care to keep the knife 
at a sufficient distance from the injected lymphatics? 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 97 

as wounding them would occasion the escape of the 
quicksilver, and greatly injure, if not ruin, the pre- 
paration ; remove also from the under side of it, as 
much of the liver, as will leave it not more than half 
an inch in thickness ; then pin it out smooth upon a 
piece of pasteboard, with the injected surface out- 
ward, and suspend it in a current of air, until it is 
perfectly dry; then take it from the pasteboard, 
make its edges even, and preserve it in a glass vessel 
of fine oil of turpentine. When the preparation is 
dried without putrefaction, there is a lively and beauti- 
ful contrast of colour between the quicksilver and the 
dark brown of the liver ; but this preparation will be 
still improved by the peritonseal vessels being inject- 
ed with a bright red. 



SECTION LIV.* 

Injecting the Lymphatics on the Surface of the Lungs^ 
with Quicksilver. 

The Lungs of an anasarcous subject are to be pre- 
ferred for this purpose, as the lymphatics on these are 
much larger, though not so easily discovered, as those 
of the liver ; nor can they, as in the liver, be injected 
contrary to the circulation of the lymph, on account 
of the valves being much firmer, and not so easily 
broken down : for this reason, the mercury should 
be injected from the inferior part of the lungs, when 
it will pass with facility toward their root. The lym- 
13 



98 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS* 

phatics of this viscus, take a direction different from 
those of the liver, and run in a circuitous direction. 
What further regards the introduction of the pipe^ 
the manner of injecting, drying, preserving, &c. por- 
tions of the lungs, need not differ from what has been 
said in the preceding section respecting the liver. 



SECTION LV.* 

Injecting the Veins in the Kidney of a Cat^ with 
Quicksilver > 

The veins in the kidney of a cat run very superfi- 
cial, and branch out in a manner peculiarly beautiful, 
which is the only inducement to make this prepara- 
tion. The manner of injecting it is very simple ; 
nothing more is necessary than to fix the straight 
pipe of the quicksilver injecting tube into the vein by 
a ligature, and inject with a short column ; it should 
be suspended in water, that it may have time to in- 
sinuate itself into all the small ramifications ; then re- 
move the pipe, and secure the quicksilver in the 
vein, as usual ; dissect away the surrounding cellu- 
lar membrane and adeps, and preserve it in spirits of 
wine. 

These vessels may be injected with coloured mi- 
nute Injection, to give the same appearance ; but a 
very small syringe and pipe should be used for the 
purpose. 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 9§ 



SECTION LVL* 

Injecting the Arteries and Veins of the Hand^ with 

Quicksilver. 

For this purpose, a hand should be chosen the 
most emaciated, such as are generally found upon 
aged persons, who have died of some lingering dis- 
ease, and upon women rather than men. The fore- 
arm should be separated by a transverse section, 
about three inches above the wrist, and the steel 
pipe fixed in the radial artery, with a ligature ; then 
pour the quicksilver into the tube, and conduct the 
process as before described ; as soon as they get fill- 
ed, it will begin to flow out of the other vessels, 
where the section is made ; then let the arteries be 
first secured, by taking hold of them with the dis- 
secting forceps, whilst an assistant ties them with a 
ligature, and afterwards the veins in the same man- 
ner ; if they cannot be perfectly stopped by this 
means, apply a strong cord round the arm, a little be- 
low the incision, and tighten it in the manner of a 
common twisted tourniquet^; but care should be taken 
not to make the compression with the cord so great as 
to obstruct the quicksilver from passing in ; this may 
be easily regulated ; for a descending column in the 
tube will overcome a much stronger resistance than the 
ascending column in the vessels of the hand, on account 
of the greater perpendicular height of the former. 



100 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS- 

When all the vessels are secured, the hand should be 
properly suspended in water (see Plate III.) with the 
tube and column of quicksilver, so as to continue the 
Injection for a day or two, to give it full time to pass 
into the minute vessels ; then remove the pipe, 
secure the artery by a ligature, and twist the cord 
tighter : the preparation is to remain in water, till 
putrefaction takes place, so that the cuticle may be 
easily peeled off, otherwise the hand would not dry ; 
and if it should, with the cuticle on, it would tend in a 
great degree, to obscure the injected vessels. The 
preparation is then to be hung in the air, and, when 
dry, should be carefully varnished, and fixed on a 
pedestal of Plaster of Paris, secured from the dust 
by a glass cover. 

These preparations, when well managed, are very 
beautiful ; for the quicksilver passing from the arte- 
ries into the veins, affords a most elegant display of 
the vessels, and there is no other way by which the 
veins of the hand can be readily injected with minute- 
ness. 

The reason why I have not mentioned securing the 
divided vessels before the Injection was attempted, is, 
that the quicksilver, by passing out, may have oppor- 
tunity of removing from the vessels any coagula 
which might tend to stain the quicksilver, and mar 
the beauty of the preparation. 



QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 101 
SECTION LVII.* 

Injecting the Female Breast with Quicksilver. 

It requires no small share of time and patience, to 
make a complete preparation of this kind. The man- 
ner of conducting the operation is, first, to remove 
the breast from the subject, by an incision carried 
round its basis, so distant as to avoid wounding the 
lactiferous tubes, which will be more evident, and 
much better adapted to this purpose, if they have been 
recently distended with milk. Next examine the 
nipple for the excretory ducts, and introduce a bristle 
into each, about ten or fifteen in number ; afterwards 
withdraw one of them, and cautiously introducing the 
strait pipe, distend the tubes with quicksilver : when 
completely filled, secure its orifice by replacing the 
bristle, then withdraw the next, introduce the pipe, 
and distend the tubes as before, and so on until they 
are all injected, and the orifices of their ducts secured 
by a ligature, embracing the whole nipple, when 
the bristles may be withdrawn ; for it must be re- 
membered, that the lactiferous tubes do not anasto- 
mose, that is, the tubes terminating in one excretory 
duct, have no communication with, those belonging 
to a nother ; which circumstance renders it always 
necessary to inject by each duct separatelj*. 

As sometimes, notwithstanding all the care that can 
be taken in removing the breast, some small tubes 



102 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 

branching into the surrounding adeps, at a considera- 
ble distance, will be divided, through which the 
quicksilver will escape on the posterior surface ; these 
must be secured by a ligature, whenever they occur 
in the course of the operation ; this being effected, 
carefully dissect away all the adeps, cellular mem- 
brane, &c. from the posterior side ; the integuments 
are also to be removed, and the adeps situated be- 
tween them and the lactiferous vessels : this will re- 
quire great care not to wound them. The part should 
then be macerated, to free it as much as possible 
from blood, taking care to avoid putrefaction, which 
would weaken the vessels, and occasion the escape 
of the quicksilver : after which, let it be exposed to 
a current of air, to dry as soon as possible ; when ef- 
fected, preserve it in fine oil of turpentine, which will 
give it a transparency, and render the distribution of 
the lactiferous tubes very visible, 



103 



CHAPTER IV, 



PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 

Hollow organs may be distended for preservation 
with antiseptic liquids, air, wool, hair, cotton, plaster, 
quicksilver, &c. 



SECTION LVm. 

Wet Preparations by distention with Spirits oj 
Wine, Oil of Turpentine- 

The intention in distending preparations by spir- 
its, is, to give them their natural figure, to exhibit 
more fully the parts of which they are composed, 
their vascularity, and occasionally some morbid or 
preternatural appearances. The parts most com- 
monly prepared in this way are the lungs, intestines, 
urinary bladder, biliary cyst, corpora cavernosa and 
spongiosa of the penis, chirotheca, podotheca, ova, 
hydatids, &c. these when distended, are to be im- 
mersed in spirits, for a few days or a week, when 
they will acquire a considerable degree of hardness, 
and be disposed to retain the form given them by the 
distention : after which, any part may be removed, 



104 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 

or opened, to shew their internal structure, or pecu- 
liar appearance ; such preparations are then to be 
properly suspended in a glass vessel of clear spirit, 
that is perfectly transparent and colourless, or in 
clear oil of turpentine. 



SECTION LIX. 

Preparations of the Lungs in Spirits of Wine or 
Oil of Turpentine. 

The air-cells in the lungs of amphibious animals, 
are much larger than in those of others ; and the 
most beautiful preparations of this kind are made of 
the lungs of the sea turtle. These will be much im- 
proved, by filling the pulmonary arteries and veins 
with red coloured minute injection ; then immersing 
the part in a vessel containing spirits of wine, of suffi- 
cient size to accommodate the lungs without com- 
pressing them, and injecting into them by the tra- 
chea, such a quantity of the spirits of wine, as will 
fully dilate them, without danger of rupture. This 
is to be confined in the cells by a ligature on the tra- 
chea, and after the preparation has remained for a 
few days, it is to be divided with a sharp knife into 
longitudinal slices, through which the spirits will 
freely escape from the cells. It should be cautious- 
ly handled, as pressure will tend tp close up the 
cells. Suspend it in a glass vessel of rectified spi- 



PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION- 105 

rits, and it will exhibit not only air cells, but also 
their extremely minute vascularity. 

To preserve the lungs in oil of turpentine, select 
those that are very small to fill with quicksilver, as 
large lungs will not sustain the great weight of quick- 
silver necessary to fill them. Their arteries and 
veins are to be injected as above directed, and their 
air cells filled with quicksilver, which is to remain in 
the air cells until they are perfectly dried, which re- 
quires considerable length of time. If previously 
immersed and filled with spirits of wine for a day or 
two, they will be less liable to putrefy. When dried, 
they are to be divided by incisions and preserved in 
a glass vessel of oil of turpentine. 

When lungs are too large for quicksilver distention, 
they may be filled with air, though this is apt to es- 
cape from the vessels when greatly distended, but it 
is much the most convenient mode of filling them for 
the purpose of drying. When dried they may be 
divided into longitudinal and transverse slices, and 
preserved in fine oil of turpentine. In this way they 
are rendered transparent, and exhibit a beautiful vas- 
cularity. 

The intestines^ when minutely injected may be dis- 
tended with spirits of wine, in portions six inches 
long, and after they have hardened a few days, in 
pure spirits of wine, a portion may be cut away from 
one side in order to exhibit their vascularity and val- 
vule conniventes. 
14 



106 PBEPARATIONS BY DISTENTIOlf. 



SECTION LX. 

Dry preparations by disteniio?i with Air^ HairJVook 
Cotton^ Quicksilver^ Plaster of Paris. 

In the many parts which require to be distended, 
in order to drying them in their natural form, such 
as bladders, hydatids, intestines, large blood-vessels, 
larynx and pharynx, vagina uterus — corpora caver- 
nosa of the penis, &c. and where the nature of the 
case will admit of it , air is always the best, as the 
distention is more uniform ; for inflation the organ 
must be entire, or nearly so ; but if it should have 
small holes, they may be secured by passing a pin 
through the edges, and winding a ligature round the 
pin, which prevents its slipping off; the sharp end of 
the pin is then to be clipped off to prevent its tearing 
other places. The organ is to be cautiously distend- 
ed, and if its blood-vessels have been previously 
injected, it should be warmed before distention, as 
the injection, if very cold, may break into innumer- 
able pieces by the inflation. 

When parts will not admit of inflation, for the 
purpose of drying, and are large in substance, as 
dropsical ovarise, large arteries, aneurisms, the uterus, 
the rectum, the large capsular ligaments, &c. they 
may be distended with curled hair, such as is common- 
ly used for stufling chair bottoms, which may be had 



PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 107 

of the cabinet-makers and saddlers. For more deli- 
cate preparations, as the Eustachian tube, the pha- 
rynx, a small uterus, vagina, Fallopian tubes, and the 
small capsular ligaments, we may use wool or cotton, 
well oiled, to prevent its sticking to the part. Thus 
prepared, they may be suspended in a current of 
air to dry ; afterwards the hair, wool, or cotton, should 
be removed as clean as possible, and the preparation 
varnished. 



SECTION LXI. 

The Larynx and Trachea and the Pharynx and ceso- 
phagus may be preserved by surrounding the top of 
the pharynx with a wire, fastening the same with a 
needle and thread, so as to preserve the expanded 
form, and then stuffing it, and the oesophagus with oil- 
ed cotton. The epiglottis will remain elevated so as 
to exhibit the rima glottidis. When perfectly dried, 
wash the cartilages of the larynx, to give them their 
natural whiteness, and when dried again, remove the 
distending substance and varnish. The short mus- 
cles running over the larynx may be preserved. The 
oshyoides may also be preserved in connexion with 
the larynx. 

SECTION LXII. 

The Eustachian Tube is best exhibited in a head 
divided vertically from the saggittal suture. Its 



108 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 

mouth is very near the tonsil, and may be distended 
with oiled cotton ; but generally, the common pro- 
cess of drying leaves it sufficiently opened without 
the aid of distention. 



SECTION LXIII. 

The vagina, hymen, bladder and rectum, may he pre- 
pared in (he following maimer. 

Make an incision from the pubis of a small subject 
round each side of the labia and anus, about one inch 
from them, and extend it to the coxcygis. Divide 
the rectum four or five inches from the anus, and 
dissect down round it and the bladder, to meet the 
former outside incision. Draw the organs out of the 
pelvis, and after repeated washings introduce a cork 
into the anus, and surround it with a ligature, corres- 
ponding to the sphincter ani, and stufif the-rectum with 
curled hair or oiled cotton. Introduce a blowpipe 
into the urethra, and secure it with a ligature ; then 
inflate the bladder, and stop the pipe with a plug. 
Distend the vagina with oiled cotton, so as to exhibit 
the hymen ; and after dissecting away all cellular 
substance, surround the skin of the perineum with a 
wire, so as to preserve an expanded form of it, and 
dry the preparation. Afterwards withdraw the dis- 
tending substances and blowpipe, and varnish, and 
afterwards cut open the bladder and varnish the in- 
side of it. 



PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 109 



SECTION LXIV. 

Jl dry preparation of the hearty to shew its cavities^ 
valves^ chordcB tendinece^ S^c, 

A heart for this purpose should be chosen free 
from fat, and it is not necessary to preserve any con- 
siderable length of the vessels. Macerate in water 
several days, changing it frequently, to make the or- 
gan as transparent as possible. When thus prepar- 
ed, tie up the extremities of the vessels ; first fixing 
a pipe in the superior cava, entering the right auri- 
cle, to fill the right side of the heart, and another in 
one of the pulmonary veins, entering the left auricle, 
to fill the left side ; then inject with melted tallow 
and suspend it in the air to dry ; the time necessary 
for which will be several weeks, especially for the 
inside. The next part of the process is, to cut off 
the extremities of the vessels, and make such open- 
ings into the auricles and ventricles, as will afford 
the best view of the internal parts ; then place it at 
a proper distance from the fire, and in such posi- 
tions as may be best adapted for melting and drain- 
ing out the tallow from the cavities and vessels ; or 
it may be removed in part when in a cold state, by 
breakinor the tallow with a stick. Varnish with the 
white spirit varnish, on account of its drying more 
readily on a greasy surface. 



110 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 

Organs may be distended with quicksilver, and af- 
ter drying may have the same discharged. 



SECTION LXV. 

Dry Preparation of the Heart by Quicksilver Disten- 
tion, 

Fill the heart with quicksilver, from the superior 
vena cava and pulmonary vein, and tying every ves- 
sel that leaks. It should be supported while drying 
over a tray, as directed for the hand when injected 
with quicksilver. The coronary vessels become 
finely injected by this method, and the mercury may 
be retained in them, by a small ligature passed round 
them, near their mouths, or by pressing into them 
a little common injection or wax behind the quick- 
silver. 

To fill the lungs in like manner with quicksilver, 
see section 54. 



SECTION LXVI. 

Dry Preparation of the Uterus, Vagina and Hymen^ 
by Distention with Quicksilver, 

Remove the vagina and uterus of a young subject, 
encircle the labia with a wire fastening it to the os 
externum with sutures, and suspend the preparation 



PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. Ill 

ia a frame, having the wire surrounding the labia, 
most elevated. Remove all superfluous cellular sub- 
stance, and tie the Fallapian tubes, then fill the uterus 
and vagina with mercury till it reaches the hymen, 
and place the preparation in a current of cool air to 
Jry, and afterwards pour out the mercury and var- 
nish. 



SECTION LXVII. 

Distending Hollow Preparations with Plaster of Pa- 
ris, 

Parts may be distended with Plaster of Paris, 
where either its removal is not afterwards necessary, 
(as is generally intended, when quicksilver, tal- 
low, &c. are used,) or where the quantity required is 
so large, as to render it expensive to distend with 
injection, as in case of distending the bladder, sto- 
mach, dura mater, intestines, &c. The intention in 
filling such parts with plaster is in some instances, 
merely to give their natural figure, in others, a suffi- 
cient firmness and resistance for the convenience of 
making models to shew their external figure. Plas- 
ter is particularly convenient, where winding canals 
prevent the use of wool, hair, &c. or where the part 
is so thin as to assume a rough, irregular, and unnat- 
ural surface, from the unequal distention made by 
those articles ; and it may be used with less incon- 
venience than any other fluid material, when the 
parts have been lacerated and sewed together again, 



112 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 

being less disposed than air to escape through the 
stitches. Thin injected preparations are also dis- 
tended with it, to shew the distribution of blood-ves- 
sels upon the white ground ; but the various purpo- 
ses for which this material may be employed will 
suggest themselves to one as he becomes acquainted 
with its use. 

Mix it so that it shall not be lumpy, and make it 
rather thinner than for the common purpose of cast- 
ing, so that it may run freely into all parts, and if in- 
tended to fill fine tubes, as in distending the lungs, 
strain it through a coarse cloth; but this should be 
done as quickly as possible, or it will soon harden 
and frustrate the intention. 

Free the part from blood, air, and water, and rinse 
the plaster in a glazed vessel, and pour it into the 
part through a paper funnel ; or if a common funnel 
is used, throw it into water immediately before it 
hardens. Secure the vessel when filled, with a liga- 
ture, and if the mixture has not passed equally, move 
it with the hand, and shake it before it loses its fluid- 
ity. In distending the lungs, and other parts having 
numerous fine tubes, it is necessary to force the part 
with a bladder or large injecting syringe, and it should 
contain the requisite quantity to fill them at once, as 
the time necessary for replenishing the instrument 
would allow the first portion to harden, and prevent 
the passage of any more- 



113 



CHAPTER r. 

W^T PREPARATIONS. 
SECTION LXVIII. 

n^niiseptic Menstrua. 

Many preparations, and almost all pathological 
ones, are best preserved in some antiseptic liquid. 
Those generally employed are, 1. Alcohol, either 
pure or diluted in the form of proof spirit ; 2. Al- 
coholic solutions of a metallic, an alkaline, or an 
earthy salt ; 3. Aqueous solutions of the same salts ; 
4. Oils, particularly oil of turpentine ; 5. Acids ; 
6. Acids and alcohol ; 7. Alcohol and oils ; 8. Am- 
monia. 

The alcohol used for preserving specimens may 
vary in strength, according to their size and thick- 
ness. All those that are thick and massy, should be 
put into pure rectified spirits ; smaller ones may re- 
quire only half the quantity of alcohol with water, 
and such as are thin, as membranes, require only 
common proof spirit. 
15 



114 WET PREPARATIONS. 

The salts usually added to proof spirit, to increase 
its antiseptic quality, are, muriate of mercury, nitrate 
of potash, muriate of soda, muriate of ammonia and 
allum. When muriate of mercury is used, its weight 
should be equal to one fourth of that of the prepara- 
tion. The other salts may be considerably short of 
the strength of saturated solutions, especially when 
dissolved in spirit, as the unavoidable evaporation of 
spirit will cause the salt to crystallize- 

The essential or volatile oils, and especially that 
of turpentine, are recommended for cartilages, fibro- 
cartilages, tendons, and fibrous membranes to give 
them a beautiful transparency. They also preserve 
heads better. Many that were preserved by Ruysch 
himself are now in the museum of natural history 
in Paris, and still present the vividness of their natu- 
ral colours. All those parts that are injected with 
matter that is soluble in alcohol, or which have 
bones in them, which acids would destroy, may be 
preserved in volatile oils, provided they are not 
bulky. 

The acids used, are sulphuric, nitric, muriatic, 
acetic and pyroligneous, diluted very much with dis- 
tilled water. Sir Humphrey Davy suggested an 
economical and convenient preparation of sulphuric 
acid, which consists in burning sulphur matches over 
water, in any glass or leaden vessel, agitating it 
whenever the matches cease to burn ; and when the 
water is sufficiently impregnated, filtering it, to render 



WET PREPARATIONS. 115 

it clear and transparent. The only objection I have 
heard to it is, that after a time, sulphur in form of a 
fine powder is apt to appear in the glass. — Mr. Hay- 
den, Surgeon Dentist in Baltimore, has succeeded in 
preserving anatomical specimens in a superior man- 
ner with pyroligneous acid.* It should be rectified 
and then diluted with water. Vinegar holding arse- 
nic or corrosive sublimate in solution is useful. Chlo- 
rate of lime or common bleaching salts greatly dilut- 
ed has been tried with success. Acids are however 
inadmissible where the preparation contains bone, 
and they are apt to give the soft parts a glutinous 
covering. 

Proof spirit with a small portion of sulphuric, ni- 
tric, or muriatic acid is valuable for preserving the 
brain and nerves. 

Alcohol and volatile oils are valuable for pre- 
serving the brain and muscles. The lungs, liver and 
ligaments, when long immersed, are not only preserv- 
ed from putrefaction, but according to the experi- 
ments of M. Bogros, this mixture will preserve their 
flexibility. 

The fluid used for wet preparations, whatever be its 
kind, should always be clear and free from colour. 
Generally speaking, proof spirit is found to be the 
best of the foregoing, for aluiost all common purpo- 
ses. They all destroy the colour of raw surfaces, and 
thus change their natural appearance, and destroy the 

* Medical Recorder for Jan. 1824, page 223. 



116 WET PREPARATIONS. 

distinctive hue of the different textures. They are 
the only means however of preserving morbid speci- 
mens although they materially alter their natural ap- 
pearance. It has long been a desideratum, therefore, 
to have some fluid that would preserve not only the 
form but the exact colours of soft parts removed in 
surgical operations. The following is the only thing 
that has within my knowledge been suggested, and 
iiiCludes the last of the antiseptic fluids mentioned at 
the head of this section. 



SECTION LXIX. 

To preserve the natural colours of specimens oj 
Morbid Anatomy, 

Mr. Gaskoin, in the London Medical Gazette 
1828, recommends the following means for preserv- 
ing the appearances of diseased parts : 

"Having removed the diseased part from the 
body, it should be as little handled or dissected as 
possible, especially when the effects of inflammation, 
congestion &c. are to be preserved, as the blood may 
be pressed from, or disturbed in, the minute vessels. 
Let the blood which may have escaped from cut ves- 
sels, be gently washed off from the surface, by a solu- 
tion of the muriate of ammonice^ or be absorbed by a 
soft sponge, lightly applied. The part should then be 
wrapped with care in old linen, and be immersed 



WET PREPARATIONS. ' 117 

in one part of a saturated solution of the muriate of 
ammonice, (common sal ammonise) and two of recti- 
fied spirits of wine. After two or three days the linen 
may be removed, and the part restored to the fluid. 

" Should the preparation be large, or from the 
nature of the disease, contain a large quantity of 
aqueous fluid, then an additional portion of the 
muriate of ammonia in powder should be added, to 
meet the excess of aqueous menstruum. 

" The time necessary for maceration, will mainly 
depend upon the size of the part to be preserved ; 
but generally, from ten to fifteen days will be found 
sufficient, although nothing can be lost by an extension 
of the time. Being taken from the macerating fluid, 
it should be again washed in a solution of the muri- 
ate of ammoniae, then dissected as much as requisite, 
and be put up at once, in equal quantities of a saturated 
solution of the above, with salt, in distilled loater and 
rectified spirit of ivine. I should observe that, in 
these proportions, the part is somewhat corrugated, 
which is not the case if one-third of the saline solu- 
tion be used with two of spirit ; yet, in the former 
quantities, I have some reason to think the appear- 
ances of disease may be more securely preserved." 

This solution, he says, seems to have the property 
of fixing the blood in the extreme ramifications, 
without constringing the vessels themselves ; while 
rectified spirit corrogating the delicate membranes 



118 WET PREPARATIONS. 

of the minutest vessels, repels their contents into 
the larger, the thicker coats of which are easily act- 
ed on, and thus reduces the appearances of inflama- 
tion, &c. 



SECTION LXX. 
Vessels io contain ivet preparations. 

These should be made cylindrical, in the form of 
specie jars, varying in height and diameter according 
to the form and magnitude of the pieces to be pre- 
served. For broad thin pieces, jars may be flatten- 
ed, giving their caliber an oval shape. The bottom 
should expand to give them a safer standing, espe- 
cially if they are tall and slender, and they should be 
slightly contracted near the top, to give security to 
the twine that is to bind the covering, and also to af- 
ford a resting place for the ends of a cross bar of 
white wood, or lead, or glass, to which the twine that 
suspends the preparation may be attached ; above 
this contraction, the mouth of the vessel may expand 
again. Professor Horner of Philadelphia uses a tu- 
bulated jar, formed like the above, but having a tube 
in one side near the mouth, through which the jar 
may be replenished, and thus save the trouble of re- 
moving and replacing the covering. This small tube 
is stopped with a ground stopper. 



WET PREPARATIONS. 119 

Some jars are wanted of a broad and flat shape, to 
preserve placentae, female breasts, &:c. which may be 
covered with plates of window glass, cut into a shape 
to correspond with the edges of the basin. 

A useful appendage to some of these jars is, glass 
globes or floats, resembling the shape of a watch, and 
having a glass loop on one side, like the eye of a but- 
toJi, to which light preparations may be attached by 
a thread. 

Very small portions that are to be immersed in 
jars, may be attached to a thin plate of wax, wood or 
glass, by pins or threads. 

A small cross bar of lead, wood, or glass, is used 
to suspend the preparation from, and is placed across 
the mouth of the vessel as above mentioned. Or a 
circular glass plate cut to suit the mouth of the jar, 
may have a small glass loop like the eye of a button in 
the centre of the plate, to which a thread that sus- 
pends the preparation may be attached. 



SECTION LXXI. 

Manner of preparing and inclosing wet prepara- 

lions. 

All parts intended for preservation, should be first 
macerated in water as long as they impart colour to 



120 WET PREPARATIONS. 

it, and should be cleared of all unnecessary matter 
that may obscure what is intended to be shown. It 
should then be suspended in spirits, in a position the 
most favourable for exhibiting the essential parts. If 
hollow, as a bladder, hydatid, intestine, &c. or if it 
has any hollow parts, cavities or sinuses, necessary 
to be shown, distend them with curled hair, wool, 
cotton, or the like, and small ducts and vessels are 
exhibited by the introduction of bristles, quills, or 
bougies. The several parts being thus put in their 
natural position, and suspended in spirits for a week 
or ten days, become much harder and firmer in their 
texture ; so that they will retain their position when 
the hair, wool, and cotton are withdrawn to shew the 
hollow parts that have been distended by them. The 
preparation should then be put into a jar of the right 
size and figure, filled with spirits or other liquid and 
inclosed. 

It is found to be attended with no small difficulty, 
to enclose wet preparations in glasses, so as to pre- 
vent effectually the evaporation of the spirits, which 
occasions very considerable trouble, and no small 
expense to keep a large anatomical collection in 
good order. The method now commonly used is to 
suspend them by a thread, which is brought over the 
rim of the glass, and fastened to another, round the 
neck ; but the thread so placed acts as a capillery 
siphon, and leads the spirits out of the glass to the 
neck, where it has an opportunity of evaporating, 
and therefore is improper — A better method is to 



WET PREPARATIONS. 121 

suspend them by means of a glass float (as described 
in Plate VII. Fig. 6 ) instead of a cork float, used by- 
some Anatomists, which is apt to colour the spirits. 
When the mouth of the glass is small enough, a cork 
may be fitted to it, and the suspending thread carried 
through it, and secured on the top ; but such a cork 
should be chosen as will not be likely to colour the 
spirits, and should not stand above the brim. Some 
place a piece of stick across the mouth of the glass, 
and fasten the suspending thread to that ; either of 
which may be used according to our convenience or 
choice: oil has been sometimes used to cover the 
surface of the spirits, in order to prevent its evapo- 
ration ; but this will also sometimes stain the spirits, 
or render it turbid, by being agitated together from 
time to time. The floating globe, where the prepa- 
ration is not too heavy, is undoubtedly the best meth- 
od, as by it those several inconveniences are avoided. 
The preparation being then properly suspended, the 
edge of the glass is to be covered with mucilage of 
gum arable, a wet bladder drawn smooth and tight 
over it, and bound down by fi»e packthread, wound 
six or eight times round the neck of the glass ; this 
being suffered to dry, is to be lightly rubbed over 
with mucilage, and covered with a fine piece of tin 
foil, cut so as to extend but just over the edge of the 
glass, and rubbed down to it as close as possible ; 
over this a second bladder is drawn tight as before, 
and carefully bound down by as many regular turns 
of packthread as will extend from the rim to the bulge 
of the glass ; this second bladder should smoothly 
16 



122 WET PREPARATIONS, 

cover the bul^e of the glass, and be confined in that 
situation by a cord, binding it below until it is dry, 
when the edges may be cut smooth, as shewn in Plate 
VII. Sometimes the tin foil is put on first, and the 
bladders over it ;* and I think that much the best 
method : care should be taken that there are no holes 
in the foil or bladders. 

There is a mode of securing the spirits, which I 
have found from many years' experience, more effectu- 
al than those in present general use, which is to cover 
the edge or rim of the glass, with fine soft Glazier's 
putty ; then cover the mouth completely with a 
piece of flat common window glass, cut to the exact 
circumference of the rim of the vessel it is designed 
to cover ; the putty should be laid on with great 
smoothness, so as to guard against any air-holes ; 
the surfaces of the glass to come in contact with the 
putty, should be previously rubbed with a little boil- 
ed linseed oil, the glass cover should be then care- 
fully applied ; over this may be stretched a bladder 
or two, and bound as before described, covering the 
bulge of the vessel: when perfectly dry, the edge of 
the bladder round the bulge, should be cut even with 
a knife, and the bladder covered with a black var- 
nishtj to make it more secure, defend it from wet, 
and give it a neater appearance ; or the glass ves- 
sels may be made with covers, fitted on with putty. 



* We cannot in this way prevent the spirits from evaporation, so well as by 
putting on a bladder first, as the bladder sticks firmly to the glass, which the 
lead does not. 

t Black varnish is made by mixing as much lamp black with the copal, or oil 
varnish, as will make it opaque. 



WET PREPARATIONS. 123 

If the liquid in the jar contains an acid, the putty 
will not answer, being liable to decomposition ; and 
an objection exists against putty where spirits of tur- 
pentine is used, on account of its tendency to pene- 
trate and combine with the putty, keeping it soft and 
miscible with the liquid. A lute may in such cases be 
made of finely powered, and dry brick dust, four parts ; 
common rosin, three parts ; yellow wax with suffi- 
cient spirits of turpentine to mix it, one part. 

Mr. Breschel thinks that for pure alcohol, the lute 
ought to be made of gum mastich, chalk, and the white 
of an egg. 

Mr. Peron recommends for glass containing spi- 
rits, a lute composed of common resin, red ochre, 
yellow wax, and oil of turpentine. 

India Rubber was expected for a time to come in- 
to use as a covering to anatomical jars, but experi- 
ence has proved, that spirits, and especially oil of 
turpentine, dissolve it, and render it useless. 



124 



CHAPTER VI. 

DISSECTION, AND PREPARATION OF THE BRAIN AND NERVES. 



SECTION LXXII. 

Preservation oj the Brain. 

The Brain and spinal marrow are preserved in 
different fluids. The one most used is an alcoholic 
solution of oxymuriate of mercury, made with two 
ounces of the salt, to sixteen ounces of the alcohol. 
In about twenty or thirty days the brain may be 
withdrawn from the liquid and dried. The cerebral 
and spinal nerves should be dissected with care, and 
be drawn out with small pins ; the spinal marrow 
may be spread out on a waxed board. 

Mr. Lobstein, principal of the anatomical depart- 
ment of Strasbourg, employs with success for pre- 
serving the brain, a solution of white sugar in un- 
coloured brand}^ 

Dr. Bush, an eminent anatomist in New York, 
informs me, that his method of preserving the brain 
is, to inclose it in muslin and then immerse it in 
boiling oil for some time, and aftet wards in alcohol. 



BRAIN AND NERVES. 125 

M. Bogros of Paris immerses the brain in a mix- 
ture of two parts of spirits of turpentine and one of 
alcohol, which on account of their tendency to sep- 
arate from each other, will require frequent agitation 
with a syringe, drawing it out of the vessel and eject- 
ing it back again. After a month the brain may be re- 
moved and frequently covered with spirit- varnish 
while it is drying. I have employed this means with 
the most happy success. 

Some anatomists recommend alcohol and muriatic 
acid, and others alcohol and muriate of ammoniae. 
The method adopted by Swan for preserving the 
brain and nerv^es is given hereafter. 

The nerves are however, usually preserved in a 
wet state, and common proof spirit is sufficiently 
antiseptic for the purpose. 

For the cerebral, facial and cervical nerves, with 
the long nerves of the thorax and abdomen, and the 
axillary plexus of one side, an adult subject is prefer- 
able, and should be preserved in connexion in a large 
glass case, or wooden keg. The arm of one side, 
and the fore arm of the other, where the axillary 
plexus is preserved, may be cut away, as also the 
lower extremities. But for an entire preparation of 
all the nerves it will be preferable to have a small 
subject, and to preserve it entire in a glass, or in a 
keg made of white wood. 



126 BRAIN AND NERVES, 



SECTION LXXIII. 



Dissection of the JVerves, of the Orbit and Face, to 
shew their Distribution, 

Make an incision from the lower part of the fore- 
head over the sagittal suture to the occiput and turn 
the scalp on each side and make a horizontal section 
of the cranium with a saw ; then remove the brain 
dividing the nerves close to it, from the first to the 
last pair. Saw through the orbit or plate of the os- 
frontis on one side, in two places, leading from the 
foramen opticum, and diverging towards each angle 
of the eye, and raise it carefully so as to avoid 
wounding the nerves. Observing the points at which 
the 4th, 5th and 6th pairs of nerves pass through 
the dura mater, dissect up the latter so as to show 
the further course of these nerves. Attend particu- 
larly to the gasserian ganglion of the fifth pair, and 
the passage of the 6th through the cavernous sinus. 
Dissect the dura mater from the fore part of the pe- 
trous bone and the sphenoid bone, showing the cav- 
ity which it forms here for the lodgment of the gang- 
lion of the fifth pair, the branches of which are inter- 
laced with the fibres of the dura mater. Lay open 
the cavernous sinus, and display the turus of the caro- 
tid artery, and the course of the sixth pair, and the 
begining of the great sympathetic. 

To continue the dissection of the fifth pair of 
nerves, the sphenoid and temporal bones must be cut 



BRAIN AND NERVES* 127 

down SO as to lay open the foramen lacerum, and the 
foramina rotundum and ovale. A small hammer may 
in some parts be convenient for breaking and remov- 
ing such portions of bone as cannot be reached with a 
saw, and will be less likely to divide the nerve. Re- 
move also the cheek bone on the same side, and di- 
vide the lower jaw at the symphysis, and turn back 
the side that is dissected, leaving it attached at the ar- 
ticulation. 

The nerves passing into the orbit are the 3d, or mo- 
tor oculi, the 4th, or trochlearis, the opthalamic branch 
of the 5th, and the tjth, or abducens, all which are to 
be carefully traced from the outside of the optic 
nerve to their places of distribution within the orbit 
and nose, which you are to learn from the descrip- 
tions of authors. 

This will complete the dissection of the first branch 
of the fifth pair of nerves, and the other two branches 
the superior and inferior, and next to be traced which 
will require care and patience, especially the superi- 
or maxillary. This is lodged in the adep fossa, behind 
the maxillary sinus of the upper jaw, amongst loose 
fat, where it sends off many branches. The gang- 
lion of Meikel, with the retrograde Videan nerve, 
and the branches to the nose and palate, are exceed- 
ingly difficult to follow. " The whole of this dissec- 
tion must be done by breaking up the bones, and 
their accidental fracture may tear away the chief 
point of demonstration," It is therefore recommend- 
ed by many eminent anatomists to immerse the head 



128 BRAIN AND NERVES. 

alone of a subject in a weak acid ; of acid, 1 part, 
and water 19 parts, for some months as directed for 
destroying the earthy parts of bones, and afterwards 
using the knife alone, (see section 75,) and preserv- 
ing the preparation in spirits of turpentine. The 
Videan nerve is with the greatest difficulty brought 
to view by any other means. 

Now turn to the other side of the head and trace 
the portio dura of the seventh nerve or nervus com- 
municans facet or lesser sympathetic, as it is some- 
times called. It comes out from the stylo mastoid 
foramen, and forms the pes anserinus under the paro- 
tid gland. This^nerve is connected with the supra- 
orbital nerve, the branches of the fifth on the temple, 
the infra orbitary nerve on the cheek, those of the 
chin, with the ninth and eighth and the sympathetic 
and cervical nerves under the lobe of the ear. 

The lower maxillary nerve gives one large branch 
to the lower jaw, another to the larger called the 
gustatory, a third branch passes into the ear, called 
the chorda tympani, and some small branches go to 
the ninth nerve and to the submaxillary gland. 

The ninth nerve goes to the muscles of the tongue, 
and a branch called descendens noni, goes down upon 
the muscles of the throat, and to join the cervical 
nerves. 



BRAIN AND NERVES. 129 

SECTION LXXIV. 
Dissection of the nerves of the Jfeck and Trunk. 

In dissecting the nerves of the neck, the side of the 
skull is to be cut down and the lower jaw taken 
away which enables the dissector to arrive at the 
parv^agum, the glosso-pharyngeal and spinal accessa- 
ry nerves making together the eighth pair. The 
lesser branches being traced, follow the parvaguni 
down the neck to the throat, larynx and heart, its 
recurrent branch round the great artery and back- 
wards behind the trachea to the larynx. 

Next trace the great sympathetic nerve lying near 
the spine to the chest and the cervical nerves and 
also the phrenic arising from the cervical. After 
this dissect the external respiratory nerve which 
arises from the cervical, like the phrenic, passes 
through the arilla to the muscles clothing the chest. 

The long ?ierves in the thorax may be traced 
throughout their various distributions to the dia- 
phragm, the ribs being cut away on each side to with- 
in a few inches of the spine. The diaphragm may 
be cut from the ribs and spread out to exhibit the 
phrenic nerve and the parvagum. Here the dissec- 
tion may stop unless the object be to go through the 
trunk and preserve all in connexion. The spine is 
therefore to be divided immediately below the dia- 
17 



130 BRAIN AND NERVES. 

phragm and the nerves being properly arranged the 
preparation may be immersed in proof spirit. 

If the subject be young and it is intended to ex- 
hibit the whole nervous system in connexion, the 
foregoing dissection is to be extended in the follow- 
ing manner, into the abdomen. 

The parvagum having coursed along the oesopha- 
gus, passes the diaphragm with it to be distributed 
upon the stomach. Raise the diaphragm and depress 
the stomach and this nerve will exhibit " its distribu- 
tion to the superior orifice and along the arches of 
the stomach. Having exposed the nerves sent to 
the upper side of the stomach, and down to the solar 
plexus, he ties the lower orifice of the stomach, and 
cuts away all the length of the intestines, excepting 
a part of the duodenum and rectum." 

*' Raise the stomach, and seek the splanchnic 
nerve (the anterior branch of the sympathetic in 
the thorax) where it comes into the belly by the side 
of the lesser muscle of the diaphragm. The semi- 
lunar ganglion formed by this splanchnic nerve is 
red and fleshy, resembling a small gland." 

The solar plexus or great central ganglion of the 
abdomen is formed by numerous branches from the 
two semilunar ganglions, and a plexus descends to 
it from the nerves of the stomach. 



BRAIN AND NERVES. 131 

Having found the two ganglia and traced them in- 
to the great solar plexus which lies before the aorta, 
and at the root of the coelise artery^ the lesser divi- 
sion of nerves is to be traced from this centre. We 
do not, however, now follow individual branches, but 
meshes or plexus— viz. the hepatic plexus, along 
the veins and arteries of the biliary ducts, splenic 
plexus along the splenic artery, the superior mesen- 
teric plexus, the inferior mesenteric plexus, on the 
upper and lower mesenteric vessels," 

The next step is to lift " the kidney and its ves- 
sels, and trace down the continued trunk of the sym- 
pathetic nerve, which continues its course from the 
thorax into the abdomen, keeping close on the side 
of the spine. Here are to be observed the branches 
it receives from the lumbar nerves ; the plexus which 
it gives to the kidney ; the additional branches it 
throws to the mesenteric plexus. From the plexus 
of the kidney are to be traced the nerves to the tes- 
ticle or ovaria and womb, and finally the hypogastric 
plexus is to be shewn." 

The nerves given off to the trunk and extremities 
from the spinal marrow are described in all common 
books on anatomy, and are more easily understood 
than the foregoing. 



132 BRAIN AND NERVES. 



SECTION LXXV 



Preparation of the cerebral nerves after dissolving 
the bones with an acid. 

There are two difficulties to be encountered in dis- 
secting the cerebral nerves ; one is, the great length 
of time necessary to finish the work and the conse- 
quent putrefactive changes it undergoes ; the other 
is, the obstacle presented in many places by bones. 
These may be obviated by immersing the head after 
the top of the cranium and the brain are removed, in 
an acid liquid composed of muriatic acid one ounce, 
and water one quart, during two or three months, when 
it may be removed and dissected leisurely in mid- 
summer, without the inconvenience of putrefaction, 
and without the aid of hammer and saw. But the 
acid, with which the preparation has become imbu- 
ed, acts upon the knives and other instruments, much 
to the inconvenience of the dissector. For tracing 
the Videan nerve in the temporal bone, a weak acid 
applied upon this particular part of the bone, answers 
a much better purpose than mechanical violence. It 
may be mixed in proportion of one part of muriatic 
acid to twenty of water, and the part being covered 
with a thick slip of linen or paper, is to be moistened 
with it frequently. 



BRAIN AND NERVES. 133 

SECTION LXXVI. 

Imitation of the Cerebral JVerves. 

The deep situation, and intricate course of many 
of the cerebral nerves render their dissection a diffi- 
cult task to repeat, and the examination of them, af- 
ter they are immersed in spirit, is attended with some 
trouble. I have therefore found an imitation of them, 
and particularly of orbitary and trifacial nerves with 
white cotton thread, when faithfully executed, very 
valuable for reference. 

A dry preparation of the nerves was a great desid- 
eratum with anatomists, and Mr. Swan has succeeded 
in making them. His method is given at the end of 
this work. 



134 



CHAPTER VII. 

PREPARATIONS BY MACERATION. 



General Observations^ 

1. Let the water be frequently changed, until it is 
no longer coloured with blood, but never after the 
blood is steeped away. 2. Let the macerating pan 
be set in a warm place, to facilitate putrefaction. 
Summer heat is sufficient, — but a cool place will pro- 
duce adipocire. 3. Remember that the soft parts, 
particularly the white textures surrounding bones, 
are a long time in detaching themselves. 



SECTION LXXVIL 



Separating and preserving the Chirotheca, or 
cle of the hand, head andpodotheca, or cuticle <j 
foot. 



cuti- 
of the 



These preparations are easily made, especially 
from the hands and feet of infants, where the skin is 
of uniform thickness. A hand separated near the 
middle of the fore arm and a foot above the ancle are 
to be immersed in clean water, changing it as often 
as it is coloured with blood. Macerate for some 



MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 135 

days, or until putrefaction takes place to such a de- 
gree as will entirely loosen the cuticle, and admit of 
its being slipped off by the hand like a stocking. 
Throw it into cold water and draw out the folds, 
handling it very carefully by the fingers or toes, as it 
will tear if suspended full of water by any other part. 
Immerse it in a glass half filled with common proof 
spirit, and by means of a tube introduced carefully 
to the inside of the preparation, pour in more of the 
spirit to distend and give it a natural appearance, and 
to fill the glass. These preparations being light and 
delicate, scarcely require any suspension and are apt 
to be torn by the thread used for the purpose. 



SECTION LXXVIII. 

Preparing the Jlir-vessels of the Lungs by Mace- 
ration. 

The lungs of a still born child are preferable on 
some accounts to those of an adult. Pole prefers 
the lungs of a slink calf. The process though offen- 
sive to the olfactories is very simple. Macerate in 
water until the soft texture can be easily broken 
down with the fingers, which is to be done while the 
preparation is under water. 

A dry preparation of the bronchial vessels of a 
large animal, as a horse, looks well. The lungs may 
be thrown into an old barrel, and left to macerate 



136 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 

during a summer, and in the autumn it may be rolled 
into a river, and its contents being cleaned, are after- 
wards to be dried and varnished. 



SECTION LXXIX. 

Macerated preparation of the arteries and veins of 
the hand and foot ivith the bones. 

Inject the hand or foot both the arteries and veins 
with quicksilver and then with wax. The warm 
injection will be preferable to the cold. Immerse the 
part in water for ten days, changing the water daily ; 
then remove the skin as directed in section for mak- 
ing the Chirotheca and Podotheca, macerate in a close 
vessel filled with water during several weeks. As 
soon as the soft parts are so far decomposed as to 
be easily removed with the fingers and a stream of 
water without injury to the vessels, the part is remov- 
ed and cleaned and varnished. 

SECTION LXXX. 

Macerating and cleaning Bones. 

As much of the fleshy parts should be taken from 
the bones intended for preparation, as can conve- 
niently be done ; but it is not necessary to separate 
them from each other more than is required for the 
convenience of placing them in a vessel, for the pur- 
pose of maceration, as in this process it will readily 



MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 137 

take place. The bones are to be laid in clean water, 
of such a depth as to cover them, and the water 
changed daily for about a week, or as long as it be- 
comes discoloured with blood. They are now to re- 
main without changing, till putrefaction has thorough- 
ly destroyed all the remaining flesh and ligaments, 
which will require from three to six months, more or 
less, according to the season of the year, or tempera- 
ture of the atmosphere, &c. In the extremities of the 
large cylindrical bones, holes should be bored, about 
the size of a quill, to give the water access to their 
cavities, and a free exit to the medullary substance. 
As the water evaporates from the vessel, it should be 
so far renewed, as to keep the bones under its sur- 
face, or they will acquire a disagreeable blackness, 
and dust should be excluded by keeping the vessel 
constantly covered. When the white textures are 
destroyed, they are to be scraped, and again laid in 
water a few days and well washed ; then immerse 
them in lime water, or a solution of pearl-ash, made 
with two ounces to a gallon of water, and after a 
week, they are to be washed again in clean water. 
They are then to be dried in the shade- Bleach 
them in a pure air ; and the best place is on a sea- 
shore where they can be daily washed with water. 

The above is Pole's plan, but Cloquet and Bogros, 
two eminent French anatomists, recommend different 
methods. M. Cloquet directs the bones, after being 
nearly cleared of their integuments, to be put into a 
box, water tight, carefully cutting its cover. Two or 
three pints only of water are put into the vessel, 
18 



138 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 

which serves to keep the air humid, and renders it 
more active as a solvent than water ; six weeks or 
two months being sufficient to destroy the white tex- 
tures. The box is then opened and filled with water, 
and in eight or ten days the maceration is completed, 
and the bones are rendered whiter than by the ordi- 
nary process of maceration. 

M. Bogros directs them to be macerated in water, 
after the manner of Pole, but at the conclusion of 
this, he directs them to be boiled four hours in a 
strong solution of carbonate of potash, or in soap 
suds, adding hot water as fast as it evaporates. They 
are then to be washed frequently in cold water, and 
dried each time quickly, and then moistened (not 
steeped) in weak muriatic acid. The common 
bleaching liquor, in a dilute state, will whiten bones, 
but they should not be immersed in it for any length 
of time. When bleached they may be varnished 
with the white of an egg. 



SECTION LXXXI. 
Preparing the Cancelli of bones. 

Preparations of this kind are made from the cylin- 
drical bones ; generally the os femoris, from its be- 
ing the most complete cylinder ; and the middle por- 
tion only of the bone should be used, where the can- 
celli are most delicate. The bone being firmly fix- 



MACERATED PREPARATIONS, 139 

ed, SO as not to jar and injure the cancelli, cut it into 
portions of about two inches length, with a fine saw ; 
macerate them in clean water two or three months, 
or until the oil has escaped from the cavity ; then dry 
them, and the delicate reticulated structure of the 
cancelli will appear beautifully distributed through 
the cavity. These preparations should always be 
made of recent bones, and handled with great care, 
as by a fall, the beauty of the preparation will proba- 
bly be destroyed. 

SECTION LXXXII. 

Preparing a natural human skeleton^ 

Natural skeletons are made by leaving the liga- 
ments of the joints to preserve the connexion of the 
bones. Very young subjects are unsuitable for mak- 
ing artificial skeletons from, on account of the great 
portion of cartilage that enters into the structure of 
their joints ; the natural ligaments are therefore left 
in these to connect the bones. But the ligaments 
themselves are an interesting part of anatomy to the 
surgeon, and most of them can be advantageously ex- 
hibited, especially on an adult subject, in the dried 
state, although they do not, as usually prepared, af- 
ford any motion to the joints as artificial skeletons do. 
The most favourable season for making them is the 
spring. 

The large cavities of the trunk being cleared, with- 
out removing or dividing the sternum, wash out the 



140 MACERATED PREPARATIONS- 

brain through an opening made with a trephine, far 
back in the sagittal suture ; or, by sawing of the top of 
the cranium on one side of the sagittal suture ver- 
tically, and meeting the section by a horizontal one. 

Dissect the blood-vessels, muscles, &c. if desired, 
taking care not to wound any of the ligaments. The 
arms, with the scapula and clavicle are to be dissect- 
ed from the trunk, and afterwards replaced and fas- 
tened with wires. A large flexible wire, flattened 
and curved at its extremity, is to be introduced into 
the spinal canal, to draw out the upper part of the 
marrow ; the remainder is to be pressed down to the 
opening in the sacrum. A solution of carbonate of 
potash is injected into the canal, to wash out any 
loose matter that remains. 

Dissect the ligaments in the following order. First, 
those of the head, then of the vertebral column, the 
pelvis, the back part of the ribs, the feet, hands, 
knees, ankles, shoulders, and lastly, those of the 
breast. In this order, the most spongy articulations 
are left to macerate longest. The individual liga- 
ments that are to be exhibited, are described in every 
system of anatomy. During the dissection, from 
first to last, those that are cleaned should be kept 
covered with wet cloths, to protect them from dust, 
and prevent their drying until the work is finished 
and in the intervals of dissection the skeleton should 
be kept in clean water and covered ; and every time 
the preparation is taken out of the water, the liga- 



MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 141 

ments are to be wiped in the direction of their fibres. 
The capsules of the joints are not to be opened, and 
should be so dissected as to exhibit their natural 
thickness. Scrape the periosteum from the bones 
every where, excepting at the ends of the ribs where 
the cartilages join. 

When the skeleton is thus deprived of all its soft 
parts, macerate it, changing the water daily till it 
ceases to be coloured, or to present globules of oil 
upon its surface. If continued too long, the liga- 
ments are injured and weakened in their attachment 
to the bones. In about ten days, it is to be washed 
in clean water, slightly acidulated with nitric or mu- 
riatic acid, to destroy the larbae of insects. Thus 
prepared, the capsular ligaments are to be opened 
by a small incision, to let out the synovia, and hair 
smeared with soap and camphor is introduced to 
keep them distended to their natural fulness. 

The skeleton may now be suspended in the shade, 
exposed to a draft air, and particular attention should 
be paid to the position and condition of every joint, 
that it may not present distortions. When dried 
varnish it. 



142 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 



SECTION LXXXIII. 

Maceration and preparation of a natural Skeleton of 
a Fceius, or very young Child* 

This preparation requires more caution in the use 
of the knife than an adult, on account of the greater 
proportion of cartilages that connect the bones, and 
should not be macerated so long. Preserve the 
spine of ihe right curve, by a piece of wood attached 
to its back, and fill the chest with hair to preserve 
its form. The tympanum of the ear should be pre- 
served on one side, and partially cut away on the 
other, leaving the centre where the malleus is attach- 
ed. 



SECTION LXXXIV. 

Preservation of the Ligaments of the joints in a flex- 
ible state when dry- 

To exhibit the motion of the joints, by rendering 
their natural ligaments flexible, has long been a de- 
sideratum. M. M. Cloquet and Bogros have arrived 
at success by different means. M. Bogros' plan con- 
sists, in keeping the parts plunged many weeks in a 
mixture of two parts of essential oil of turpentine, 
and one of alcohol He discovered by accident, 
that when removed from this mixture, the ligaments 
retain a remarkable suppleness, without losing any of 



MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 143 

their solidity. The two liquids separate from each 
other, and require frequent incorporation, by pour- 
ing them out and back again, or by inverting the ves- 
sel. 

M. Cloquet describes his method thus : " Dissolve 
four pounds of muriate of soda and one of alum in 
six pints of water. The ligaments carefully prepar- 
ed, are immersed in this fifteen or twenty days, tak- 
ing care to move them often in the solution, to press 
and twist, and gently strike them with a piece of 
light wood. By this means they are rendered supple. 
Remove the preparation from the liquid and dry it 
four or five days moving it from time to time, and re- 
peat the striking as before. Immerse them in strong 
soap-water, (a pound to three pints of water) then 
remove them and repeat the striking often for seven 
or eight days, this being the time necessary to re- 
move the salts and to permit the soap to strike into 
the inner fibres in the place of the alum. Thirty or 
forty days after the operation, wash the ligaments in 
a solution of carbonate of soda, (one ounce to two 
pints of water) and let them dry. By this pro- 
cess, variously modified, the ligaments may be ren- 
dered perfectly supple, of a dull greyish colour, much 
like chamois leather, very tough, and affording all 
the ordinary motions of joints." 

The ligaments can likewise be preserved perfectly 
supple, in a mixture of equal parts of olive oil and 
essence of turpentine. 



1-44 MACilRATED PREPARATIOXS. 

In whatever way the ligaments are preserved dry, 
they are to be protected from insects, by some liquor, 
as a weak nitric or muriatic acid, or the vestemental 
liquor of Duplex, or the alcoholic solution of arseni- 
cal soap, or the following preservative of Nicolas. 

White soap in fine shavings, 1 ounce ; 
Powder of camphor, 2 ounces ; 
Colocynth grossly powdered, 2 ounces ; 
Rectified alcohol, 2 pounds. 

Macerate durino; four or five davs in a bottle, fre- 
quently shaking it, filter through paper and preserve 
in a well stopped viol. When the layer of preservative 
liquor is perfectly dried to the ligaments, it only re- 
mains, to varnish the skeleton with a mixture of white 
of egg and diluted alcohol ; or what is better, with 
a varnish of savarak, to which may be added an equal 
quantity of gum arable, dissolved in water, a little 
su2:ar candv, and the white of an es^S". This varnish 
which is very brilliant, scales less than common var- 
nish. The varnish may be applied two or three 
times. 



SECTION LXXXV. 
Preparation of the periosteum. 

To exhibit the form and disposition of this mem- 
brane in a long bone, take one that has been injected 
with the minute varnish, and vermillion injection ; re- 



MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 145 

move the soft parts, carefully avoiding the periosteum : 
Then make a longitudinal incision on the sides of the 
bone, the whole length of its shaft, and with the han- 
dle of the scalpel, detach it from the bone, and divide 
the bone, with a Hey's saw, or strong bone-knippers, 
near its middle. The two divided ends are then 
thrust out from the periosteum, and cut off near their 
heads, by which the periosteum is left a cylinder, ter- 
minated by the articulating ends. After washing 
for some time, it is dried, and extended, as much as 
possible, by the two ends ; the incised edges are 
drawn together, and the whole is preserved in 
the form of a cylinder. Its thickness and solidity are 
increased, by applying, after extension and drying, 
several layers of fish glue, by which it may be made 
to sustain itself in any posture. 



SECTION LXXXVI. 
To render solid bones flexible and transparent. 

Take a recent bone of the flat kind, as a scapulae, 
and a long slender bone, as a fibulae, and macerate 
them several weeks in water, frequently changing 
it. Then immerse it in a mixture consisting of twen- 
ty parts of water to one of muriatic acid. The ves- 
sel should be of such a shape as to preserve the 
bone completely covered. In three, six or nine 
months according to the thickness of the bone, it will 
become flexible, but as the bone will neutralize 
some of the acid in the time, a very small quantity 

19 



146 MACERATED PREPARATION*. 

should be occasionally added. When the process is 
completed, immerse the substance in warm water, 
which is to be renewed two or three times to remove 
all the acid, and afterwards steep it in clean cold wa- 
ter for some time. It is now to be dried, in a current 
of cool air, and its substance will preserve the primi- 
tive form of the bone, being of a brownish white, and 
semi-transparent, and will exhibit the fibres, canals 
and vessels. Immersed in a glass vessel of fine oil 
of turpentine, it will immediately be penetrated with 
it, and assume a beautiful transparency, especially 
if the bone have little thickness, as a scapula, and 
when held up to the light it will exhibit the blood- 
vessels beautifully arborescent. In this state the 
long bone may be tied in a knot, and the flat one roll- 
ed up like a parchment, and put into a narrow mouth- 
ed flask of this fluid, where it will expand by its own 
elasticity, and will puzzle the inexperienced observ- 
er to explain how it was introduced ; and especially 
if, instead of the drying, it is immediately immersed 
in a flask of spirits of wine which by preventing its 
transparency will give it still more the appearance of 
a real bone. 



SECTION LXXXVII. 

Cleaning and preparing diseased bodies. 

The directions given for cleaning healthy bones 
are applicable to diseased ones, with the additional 
one to handle them very carefully, both in respect to 



MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 147 

using the knife in removing the soft parts that sur- 
round them, that the delicate lamina and spinala may 
not be injured, and the handling of them during the 
process of maceration and cleaning. They are to be 
steeped in water, changing it as long as any colour 
is imparted to it, and then macerated from five to 
eight months, according to the state of the weather, 
and then washed in a stream of water, as directed for 
corroded preparations of the arteries. After being 
perfectly cleaned, they may be bleached according to 
directions given in Section 80. To preserve them 
safely, they should be inclosed in a glass case. 

SECTION LXXXVIII. 

Preparations to exhibit the development and growth 

of Bones, 

Macerate a foetus entire, from one to six weeks 
according to its age, and separate the bones, which 
after frequent washing and bleaching are to be arrang- 
ed on a black paste-board, and fastened to it with fine 
threads. They may be arranged in three vertical 
lines ; in the middle line are to be single bones ; and 
on each side of this, a line of the double bones, one line 
having one face of the bones presented and the other 
presenting the opposite face. In this way different 
sets of bones may be arranged, varying, according 
to their maturity. 



148 MACERATED PBEPARATIOWS. 

A pelvis of a child one or two years old exhibits 
the separate bones of the ossa-innominata meeting 
to form the glenoid cavity. 

The jaw bones of a child six to eight years old, 
exhibits the two sets of teeth, — the permanent ones 
following the deciduous ones ; and the front face of 
them may be brought to view, by filing through their 
alveolar encasement. 



SECTION LXXXIX. 

Cleaning and separating the Bones of the Head. 

The subject should be between the age of fifteen 
and twenty years ; later than this they become con- 
solidated at the sutures. 

Remove the integuments from the head, and wash 
out the brain through the foramen magnum, previ- 
ously breaking it down with a stick. Macerate some 
weeks, changing the water frequently, and then 
scrape off the periosteum and other remaining soft 
substances. Fill the cranium "with dried peas, and 
immerse it in water, and the swelling of the peas will 
soon force the bones apart at the largest sutures, af- 
ter which, the other bones can be separated by the 
hand. Bleach the bones as directed in section 80, 
and cover them with clean and colourless varnish. 



149 



CHAPTER VIII. 

ARTICULATIONS AND SECTIONS OF THE SKELETON.* 



SECTION XG. 
jlrticulations of the different parts of the Skeleton. 

We commonly begin with the bones of the trunk, 
and then pass to the members. 

The hea d. Articulation of the teeth. The teeth 
are fixed in their sockets by dipping the roots in li- 
quid is\x\g\diss.— Articulation oj the temporal and max- 
iltary bones. 1st. To fasten the condyle in the gle- 
noid cavity, make a hole beginning at the back part of 
the neck of the lower jaw, and coming out at the up- 
per and middle part of its condjde. Make a hole rising 
perpendicularly from the middle of the glenoid cavi- 
ty to the upper and middle part of the base of the zy- 
gomatic process : pass a wire through these two 
openings, and fix it by two hooks, 2d. To imitate 

* Dictionaire dcs sciences medicale8,Tomc LII. page 360. 



150 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

the rising and falling of the lower jaw, make on each 
side two very small holes, one at the top of the coro- 
noids process, the other beginning at the back of 
angular process and ending in the orbit; take a 
spiral spring a line and a half in diameter, and two 
inches long ; fix its lower extremity by a hook to the 
coronoid process, give the spring its proper degree of 
tension, and by a second hook fasten its upper ex- 
tremity to the orbit. The lower jaw, being thus 
jointed can be moved, will be easily pressed down, 
and rise of its own accord to the upper. 

Articulation of the vertebral column. On the body 
of each vertebra cut a piece of thick leather corres- 
ponding exactly in shape to the inte-vertebral sub- 
stance ; there should be twenty-three of these pieces ; 
they should be thicker before than behind in the 
cervical and lumbar regions, and in the dorsal region 
thicker behind than before, in order to accommodate 
them to the natural curve of the spine. Through 
the body of each vertebra and each piece of leather, 
make two parallel, lateral holes passing from top to 
bottom. The holes of the second cervical vertebra 
should be made obliquely, so as to pass from the 
lower to the back part of its hoi\y. Two holes like 
those of the vertebrse should be made to pass from 
theFgreat articulating surface of the sacrum to the 
anterior face of its first division. 

Take a brass wire four feet long ; bend it double 
so as to form an arch ; into this arch introduce a spi- 
ral spring as long as the distance between the two 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 151 

openings on the anterior face of the sacrum. Through 
the openings made in the sacrum, the bodies of the 
vertebrae, and the pieces of leather, pass the ends of 
the wire on each side successively from the bottom 
to the top ; they will come out at the posterior face 
of the second cervical vertebra. Draw them strong- 
ly upwards, and thus the sacrum, the vertebrae, and 
the pieces of leather will be pressed against each 
other. The spring applied transversely on the ante- 
rior face of the sacrum keeps this part from being 
cut by the pressure of the wire. Each of the ex- 
tremities of the wire is kept in its place by a hook at 
the back of the second vertebra. The proper stabil- 
ity of the vertebral column is preserved, and its 
curves are securely maintained by introducing into 
its canal the strip of metal which we mentioned when 
giving general rules for adjusting the articulations. 
This strip of metal is retained by means of brass wires 
passed through holes drilled in it at different points, 
and attached behind to the back part of the plates of 
the vertebrae which should be pierced with small 
holes to receive them. 

Articulation of the Jttlas and Dentatus. 

To arrange this articulation make a little transverse 
groove on the back of the odontoid process about one 
line in depth, with a small saw ; catch into this groove 
the arch of a bent wire, the two extremities of which 
pass forwards through two holes made in the anteri- 
or arch of the atlas in the same direction and about 
four lines distant from each other. By pulling these 



152 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BON£S. 

extremities and securing them firmly by means of two 
hooks on the fore part of the small arch of the atlas, 
the odontoid process is fixed so that it can turn easily 
in the ring which holds it and thus preserve its natu- 
ral movements. 

Articulation of the Sacrum and Coccyx. 

Reunite the three pieces of the coccyx by means 
of a triangular plate of the proper length ; carry it 
past the largest extremity of the summit of the 
sacrum at a point a little distant from its anterior face, 
and bend the two extremities of this plate into rings, 
one on the anterior face of the sacrum, the other on 
a level with the last piece of the coccyx. 

Articulations of the Ribs* 

Begin by articulating them w^ith the vertebral 
column, proceeding from above downwards. To do 
this, fix the head of the right and left ribs two by 
two to the vertebras, by means of a wire passed 
through an opening made in the head of the rib from 
the fore to the back part, and going through the cor- 
responding intervertebral substance ; fasten the two 
extremities of the wire by a hook drawn very tightly. 
To each transverse process fasten the corresponding 
part of the rib by putting a wire through a hole made 
in each, and securing it by two hooks, one on the 
fore part of the rib, the other on the back of the 
transverse process. Having thus articulated the ribs 
with the vertebral column, keep them at equal distan- 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 153 

ces by passing a wire from top to bottom through 
holes made in their middle. Between each intercos- 
tal space, insert into the wire a piece of spiral spring 
of a proper length, and fix the two extremities of 
the wire by hooks, the upper to the posterior plate 
of one of the last cervical vertebra, and the lower 
to the transverse process of the first or second lum- 
bar vertebra. 

To articulate the ribs tvith the sternum, which 
should have been preserved with its cartilages, pierce 
the extremities of each with holes perpendicular to 
their surface. Into the hole in the rib and the carti- 
lage, push the two ends of a bent wire, so^that they 
may come out in the interior of the chest ; after hav- 
ing tightened them sufficiently, fasten them by hooks. 

•Articulations oj the pelvis. Articulation of the 
sacrum and ilium. Make two holes on each side of 
the sacrum one above the other, and at the distance 
of about an inch, passing obliquely from the side 
part of the anterior face to the lateral articulating 
surface. At the corresponding points of the articu- 
lating surface of the ilium, make holes coming out at 
its back part; unite the two bones by a bent brass 
wdre, bringing the middle of it against the sacrum 
and fixing its extremities by a double hook at the 
back of the ilium. 
20 



154 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

Articulation of the Pubis. 

Wrap up in a piece of leather a plate of cork of an 
oblong shape like that of the pubis, and much thicker 
before than behind, to imitate the fibro-cartilage 
belonging to the articulation. Place this between the 
bones of the pubis ; pierce both these bones through, 
from before backwards, with two holes ; through the 
two upper openings pass a wire transversely, with 
its curve embracing the pubes in front, and twisting 
its extremities together on the back of the symphysis. 
Do the same with the lower holes- 

Articulation of the occiput and atlas. 

The following appears to be the best manner of 
adjusting this articulation : fix a brass pin, or what is 
better, a screw without a head into the fore part of 
each condyle. The lower extremity should project 
about six lines, and be received in a hole bored in 
the corresponding of each articulating surface of the 
atlas. The requisite stability is given to this articu- 
lation, by means of a nut with handles at the upper 
extremity of the strip of metal supporting the spine, 
which we have said passes through an openinsf in the 
upper part of the cranium ; this nut presses the head 
upon the first vertebra and prevents the pins from 
escaping from the holes. The contrivance at the 
same time allows the rotation of the head upon the 
dentatus. 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 155 

Articulotion of the acromion and clavicle. 

Fix the extremity of the clavicle to the acromion 
process by a brass wire passed through two vertical 
holes made in this bone, and fasten its two extremi- 
ties by a hook to the lower part of the articulation. 
Fix the base of the coracoid process to the corres- 
ponding part of the clavicle, by passing a thick wire 
vertically through the two bones, and fasten the two 
extremities of the wire by two hooks, one above the 
clavicle and the other below the coracoid process. 
It is well to preserve the small distance commonly 
found between these two bones, by a very short spi- 
ral springe 

Jtriiculaiion of the sternum and clavicle* 

The slight, shuffling motion belonging to this artic- 
ulation, may be preserved in the following manner : 
make a hole in the sternum, beginning at the middle 
of its articulating surface and coming out near the top 
of its posterior face. Let this opening be large 
enough to receive both ends of a bent brass wire ; fas- 
ten these two ends behind by a double hook, so as to 
obtain a kind of little ring at the upper and front part 
of the sternum, formed by the projecting part of 
the wire. Through this little ring pass another bent 
wire, the extremities of which go through a hole 
made in the corresponding part of the clavicle, and 
are secured like the others. In this manner the 
clavicle and sternum w^ill be articulated by two rings 
connected with each other, and susceptible of motion. 

The scapula must also be fixed against the ribs by 
wires attached to its posterior and inferior angles, 



156 ARTICULATION AXD SECTION OF BONES. 

and to the corresponding points of the second and 
seventh ribs. For these simple attachments may be 
substituted two clasps which pass through the above 
mentioned ribs, and can be opened or shut at pleasure. 

^Articulation of the scapula and humerus. 

The common method of proceeding is to make an 
aperture beginning at the back of the neck of the hu- 
merus, and coming out at the middle of its head. A 
pin is then introduced, and its inferior extremity fixed 
by a hook, so that the superior extremity shall be re- 
ceived in a hole passing perpendicularly through the 
glenoid cavity of the scapula, and coming out at the 
anterior part of the fossa subspinalis, where a new 
hook secures the pin : but M. Cloquet (in the Disser- 
tation above cited, page 55th,) says with good rea- 
son that by this method, the articulation is far from 
possessing its natural free movements, and proposes 
the following process, which he says he has employ- 
ed with advantage. '* It consists in making the cen- 
tre of the head of the bone, the centre also of motion. 
To accomplish this, make with a saw two incisions 
crossing each other at right angles and penetrating 
to the centre of the head of the humerus ; take a pin 
jointed in its middle by two rings passing through 
each other. Pierce a hole below the great tubercle 
coming out precisely in the centre of the head, at the 
place where the two cuts made by the saw cross 
each other at their deepest part ; introduce the pin 
by this opening, and when its joint has reached the 
centre of the bone, of which you must convince your- 
self by moving the upper portion through each of the 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 157 

channels made by the saw successiv^ely ; fasten the 
lower portion by a book, and pass the upper portion 
of the pin through another hole made in the middle 
of the glenoid cavity, and fasten that also by a hook. 
This manner of articulating the humerus admits of 
very extended motion in the four most important 
directions, without displacing the head from the gle- 
noid cavity." 

Jlrticulation of the Humerus and Ulna, 

1st. Make a hole passing across from the anterior 
part of the internal condyle of the humerus, to the 
external and middle part of the outer condyle ; this 
hole will be parallel to the axis of motion in the joint. 
2d. Make, with a saw, a perpendicular slit directed 
from before backward, in the groove which separates 
the trochlea from that projection of the humerus 
which is received between the radius arid ulna, and 
terminating in the cavity which receives the olecra- 
non. 3d. With a narrow chisel, make a slit five lines 
in length, and eight or ten in depth, in the middle of 
the projection which divides the great sigmoid cavity 
of the ulna. Fix into this slit a slip of brass, fifteen 
or sixteen lines long, and five wide ; secure it 
by a pin passing through it and the base of the ole- 
cranon. Introduce the free part of the brass slip 
into the sht made in the humerus, and when the 
bones are exactly in contact, pass a drill through the 
hole made in the inner condyle, and pierce the slip of 
brass ; fasten it to the humerus so that it will move 
easily, by a pin, which will form the axis of its mo- 
tion. 



158 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

^Articulation of the Radius and Ulna. 

The following process is pointed out by M. Clo- 
quet as best for preserving the natural movements of 
the radius on the ulna. Make a hole transversely, be- 
ginning at the upper part of the outer face of the ul- 
na, four or five lines under the lesser sigmoid cavity, 
and coming out at the corresponding part of the in- 
ternal face. Pass through this opening, from with- 
out inwards, the two ends of a bent wire ; make a 
little ring in the wire placed vertically directly under 
the lesser sigmoid cavity ; fasten the two ends of the 
wire on the inner side by hooking them together. 
2d. Make a transverse hole in the back part of the 
neck of the radius, at the same height with the ring 
on the ulna ; pass a wire through the ring, carry its 
extremities in opposite directions through the hole 
in the neck of the radius, and fasten each of them by 
a hook. By this contrivance the neck of the radius 
is embraced, before and at the sides, through three 
quarters of its circumference, by a large ring which 
passes through the small ring on the ulna, and allows 
the head of the radius to turn in the lesser sigmoid 
cavity. — A similar arrangement is employed for the 
lower articulation of the same bones, but here the 
little vertical ring is on the inner side of the lower 
end of the radius and the great horizontal ring up 
on the ulna. 

Articidations of the Bones of the Carpus, 

The bones of each row must be separately articu- 
lated ; the first row by making holes in the scap- 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 159 

hoides, the lunare, and cuneiforme through the mid- 
dle of their lateral articulating surfaces, and from the 
fore to the back part of the pisiforme ; a wire must 
then be passed through them, and one of its extrem- 
ities fastened at the fore part of the pisiforme, the 
other at the outside of the scaphoides. The second 
row is connected transversely in a similar manner. 

To unite the two rows thus separately articulated, 
1st, make an opening in the scaphoides, beginning at 
its upper extremity and bifurcating in the interior of 
the bone in such a manner that one hole comes out 
in the middle of that articulating surface which is 
united to the trapezium, and the other by that which 
is joined to the trapezoides. Pass the two ends of a 
wire into these holes ; make one go through the tra- 
pezium and the other through the trapezoides. Let 
the two ends of the wire remain, to articulate the two 
last bones with the two first of the metacarpus. 2d, 
make an aperture in the middle of the upper face of 
the OS lunare, and continue it through the whole 
length of the os magnum, from the middle of its head 
to the inferior surface which is articulated with the 
third bone of the metacarpus. Pass a wire through 
this hole^ secure its upper extremity by a hook, and 
preserve its projecting lower extremity for the ar- 
ticulation of the OS magnum with the bones of the 
metacarpus. Sd, make a hole in the highest part of 
the cuneiforme like that in the scaphoides, that is to 
say, single at its commencement, and dividing lower 
down into two branches which come out near each 



160 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

other, on that surface of the bone which is united to 
the cuneiforme ; continue the same passages into the 
last mentioned bone, by making two holes, beginning 
at its upper surface and coming out, one at the mid- 
dle of that face of the cuneiforme which joins the 
fourth bone of the metacarpus, the other at the sur- 
face which joins the fifth metacarpal bone. 

Articulation of the Carpus and Metacarpus, 

The bones of the carpus are to be united to those 
of the metacarpus by the ends of the bent wires 
which served to articulate the bones of the first row 
of the carpus with those of the second, and which 
come out by the holes made in the trapezium, the 
trapezoides, the os magnum, and the unciforme. To 
do this, make an oblique opening in each of the 
metacarpal bones beginning at the middle of its head, 
^and after passing the distance of six or seven lines, 
coming out at the upper part of their palmae surface. 
Introduce the corresponding wires into these holes, 
and fasten each of them by a hook. The four last 
bones of the metacarpus must be connected with each 
other at their lower extremity. This is done by 
passing a wire through holes made transversely in 
each of them at the point where the head is united to 
the body. Each end of the wire should be made fast 
by a hook, and the bones of the metacarpus may be 
kept at a slight distance from each other by fixing 
between them a short piece of spiral spring. 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 161 

Articulations of the metacarpus and phalanges. 

As these articulations are straight hinges, their 
motions of flexion and extension must be preserved. 
To do this, in the upper extremity of the first phalan- 
ges, fix a metallic plate three lines wide, and twelve 
or fifteen long, in the manner described already of 
fixing a similar plate to the ulna ; let this plate pro- 
ject ten or twelve lines beyond the upper extremity 
and roundoff the end with scissors. In this make a slit 
with a very thin saw, through the middle of the heads 
of the metacarpal bones, and reaching to the anterior 
part of their bodies, and which only extends through 
the anterior half of the thickness of thebone. Drill a 
hole transversely through the head of each of the 
metacarpal bones and the small metallic plates which 
have been introduced into the slits made in them ; 
fix the metallic plates to the bones by means of small 
pins fixed in the centre of motion and riveted at the 
sides. The motions which this will execute will be 
very similar to those of nature. 

Articulations of the phalanges with each other. 

These are united in precisely the same manner as 
the carpus and phalanges, for which we have just 
given directions. 
21 



162 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

ArtiCulaUoji of the ha?id ivith the bones of the fore 



arm. 



This consists simply in two attachments, one on 
the outer and the other on the inner side, between 
the bones of the fore arm and those of the carpus. 
Holes are made in the lower extremities of the bones 
of the fore arm from above downwards ; a brass wire 
is then fastened to the bent wires on the upper part 
of the OS scaphoides and os cuneiforme. 

Ariicidatioji of the femur with the pelvis. 

Make a hole extending from the upper part of the 
base of the neck of the femur to the middle of its 
head ; introduce the two ends of a wire into this 
opening, carry them through, from above downwards, 
and fasten them with hooks at the base of the neck of 
the femur. The middle of the wire forms a narrow 
loop six or eight lines long, above the middle of the 
head of the femur ; make this loop pass through an 
opening in the bottom of the acetabulum and fasten it 
on the inside of the pelvis by a strong clasp. 

Articulation of the femur with the Tibia, 

Make a hole transversely through both condyles 
of the femur, precisely in the centre of motion, and 
a little below the tuberosities of that bone. Make 
two holes in the tibia from above downwards, from 
the back part of its spine to the upper part of its 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES- 163 

posterior face ; let one of these holes be about six 
lines above the other. Take a thick brass wire, 
bend the middle of it upon a steel rod into curves 
like those of a spiral spring, and preserve its extremi- 
ties unbent ; place the part thus spirally twisted in 
the bottom of the cavity which separates the two con- 
dyles of the femur, and pass a thick pin through these 
spiral rings carrying it through the hole made in the 
condyles and riveting it on each side ; then carry the 
extremities of the twisted wire through the openings 
made in the tibia, from below upwards, and fasten 
both of them by hooks on a level with the posterior 
face of the tibia. 

To secure the patella before the joint, fix a brass 
plate three inches long and five lines wide to its lower 
part, and fasten the plate of brass by its lower ex. 
tremity in a slitm ade in the middle tuberosity of the 
tibia. 

nStrticulaiion of the fibula with the tibia. 

The upper extremity of the fibula is fixed to the 
tibia by a wire which passes through the head of the 
fibula, the outer tuberosity of the tibia, with its ends 
beat into hooks and turned towards the back of the 
joint. The bones are united at their lower articula- 
tion by means of the pin which connects the tibia 
with the tacsus. 



164 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 



Articulaiion of the Foot, 

Unite the astra2:alus to the os calcis bv a wire 
which enters at the upper part of the neck of the as- 
tragalus, and comes out at the lower part of the small 
process of the os calcis ; fasten the two ends by a 
hook above and one below ; unite the three cunei- 
form bones and the cuboides with each other, by a 
wire passing transversely through them, and fixed at 
one end by a hook on the inside of the first cunei- 
form bone, and on the outside by another hook in 
that groove of the cuboides through which glides the 
tendon of the peroneus longas ; attach the cuboides 
to the OS calcis by two wires whose posterior extrem- 
ities pass out by the lower face of the os calcis, and 
its anterior, by the two faces of the cuboides which 
join the fourth and fifth metatarsal bone. These 
ends should be left in order to articulate the tarsus 
with the metatacsus. 

To articulate the scaphoides, three wires should 
be taken which will serve to unite it to the astraga- 
lus and the three cuneiform bones. The first passes 
forward from the outer and back part of the neck of 
the astragalus, through the outer part of the scapho- 
ides and the middle of the third cuneiform bone. The 
second, or middle wire passes forwards through the 
middle of the scaphoides and the os cuneiform suc- 
cessively. The third goes in the same direction 
through the inner parts of the neck of the astragalus 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 165 

through the scaphoid and the first cuneiform bone . 
The posterior extremities of these three wires are re- 
tained by hooks at the places where they belong, 
their anterior extremities, which come out at the fore 
part of the cuneiform bones being preserved, as well 
as the wires which connect them with the cuboides, 
to articulate the tarsus with the five bones of the me- 
tatarsus. This articulation is arranged like that of 
the carpus and metacarpus. 

The phalanges of the foot are articulated with each 
other and with the bones of the metatacsus in the 
same manner as those of the hand. 

Articulation of the Tibia with the Tarsus, 

The bones of the foot being connected with each 
other, they are united to the bones of the leg by 
means of a pin placed in the centre of motion and 
passing through the inner malleolus the astragalus, 
and the outer malleolus successively, and thus uniting 
the lower extremity of the fibula to the tibia, and 
allowing the astragalus to move in the cavity formed 
for it by the bones of the leg. 

These are the rules generally followed for articu- 
lating the diflferent bones of the skeleton, rules 
which the ingenious anatomist will modify and alter 
according to circumstances ; we will only add, that 
to put together a young skeleton the epiphyses of 
which are already separated from the bodies of the 
bones, it is necessary to replace these epiphyses and 



166 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

fasten them by means of isinglass, and afterwards to 
secure them more firmly by metallic connections ar- 
ranged differently according to the different bones. 



SECTION XCI. 

Sections to be made in the bones in order to display the 
cavities J ormed by their union. 

We shall mention in succession, the sections which 
should be made in the head, the vertebral column, 
the thorax, and the pelvis. 

A wood saw with a flexible plate may be used for 
all these sections, and the track should always be 
guided by a line traced with a crayon, before begin- 
ning to saw. 

I. Sections in the head ; the cavity of the cranium. 

The sections for displaying the cavity of the crani- 
um, are commonly two, one horizontal, the other 
vertical. 

For the horizontal section, the saw should be carri- 
ed in a line passing from the upper part of the nasal 
prominence over the upper part of the squamose 
suture and going round to the external occipital pro- 
tuberance. 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 167 

The vertical section, is to be made in the longitu- 
dinal diameter of the head. We proceed from above 
downwards, avoiding the septum of the nasal cavities, 
by carrying the saw on one side of it, about two lines 
from the anterior nasal spine, cutting through the sa- 
gittal suture, the os frontis, one side of the fonto-nasal 
articulations, one of the nasal bones, one of the 
upper maxillary bones, the basilar process, and the 
middle and back part of the os occipitis. This sec- 
tion displays, not only the form and vertical dimen- 
sions of the cranium, but also the articulation of the 
bones which form this receptacle, the arrangement 
of the bones of the face with each other on the me- 
dian line, the septum of the nasal cavities and those 
cavities themselves. 

To understand better the connections between the 
bones of the cranium, different vertical sections may 
be made in transverse and longitudinal directions. 

Cavities of the face- 

By different incisions we demonstrate the cavities 
of the orbits, the nasal canal, the nasal fossae and the 
sinus, and the temporal and zygomatic fossae. 

Sections to display the orbits. 1st. Vertical section 
in the direction of their axis. Carry a saw through 
the middle of the base of the orbit and that of the op- 
tic hole. This will show the internal and external 
walls. 2d. Vertical and transverse section. The up- 
per part of the cavity may be well seen by carrying 



168 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

an incision on one side, by the anterior extremity of 
the sphens maxillary slit, and on the other by the 
middle of the os planum. 3d. Horizontal section. 
This should be made in the direction indicated by 
these three points ; namely : the lower part of the 
OS nasi, the upper angle of the os malse and the optic 
hole. It displays chiefly the upper and lower walls 
of the orbit. 4th. The upper part of the orbit may 
be opened by raising the bone at that part, by means 
of two incisions with the saw, one of them beginning 
at the upper internal angle, and the other at the up- 
per external angle of the orbit, and both meeting at 
the optic hole. This cannot be done unless the 
vault of the cranium is removed. 

Sections relating to the nasal canal. 

An exact knowledge of the position, form, length, 
and direction of this canal is of the utmost conse- 
quence, not only to the anatomist, but to the surgeon. 
This passage may be opened through its anterior 
wall : "lay open the anterior part of the maxillary si- 
nus, by taking out with a very small chisel and a mal- 
let a triangular piece of bone, the shape of which is 
determined by these three lines : the upper, which 
runs parallel to the lower border of the orbit, extends 
from the base of the process rising from the upper 
maxillary bone, to the inner third of the cutaneous 
face of the os malse ; the outer extending from this 
last point to the first large molar hook, passing by 
the ridge which separates the canine and zygomatic 
fossse ; the third going inwards, almost horizontally 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 169 

at first, and then vertically along the external part of 
the ascending process of the upper maxillary bone 
near the anterior part of the lachrymal canal. The si- 
nus being opened with a very small saw, a piece of 
bone only three lines wide, but extending the whole 
height of the sinus, from the anterior part of its inter- 
nal wall ; the inner wall of the nasal canal will be ex- 
posed by making this excision. To open this cav- 
ity through its inner wall, make a vertical division in 
the head, with a file having one of its edges very 
sharp ; cut the os unguis transversely through the 
middle of its inner face, and in this place, lift by two 
vertical cuts, that part of the subethmoidal cornet 
which is beneath it. The form of the floor of the na- 
sal cavity may be shown by dividing it with a trans- 
verse incision which passes by the lower border of 
the base of the orbit, or a little above it, according to 
the subject. To open the lachrymal canal length- 
wise, it is necessary in most heads that the saw should 
pass through the interval between the two small mo- 
lar teeth, and to the outside of the suture which 
unites the ascending process of the os maxillare with 
the nasal slope of the coronal (M. J. Cloquet in the 
dissertation before cited.) 

Sections relating to the nasal fossce and their sinus. 

To show the nasal fossae in the necessary points of 
view, the following vertical and horizontal sections 
should be made. 

22 



170 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 



1*/. Vertical section Jrom before backwards^ 

We have already pointed out the manner of mak- 
ing this, when speaking of the vertical division of 
the cranium. It displays the internal and external 
walls of the nasal fossae, the frontal and sphenoid si- 
nus. 

2d, Vertical sectiojis Jrom side to side- 

These should be made at different depths in the 
nasal fossae. They exhibit the anterior and posterior 
walls of these cavities, the form and arrangement of 
the canals, and of the maxillary sinus. 

3rf. Lower horizontal section. 

This should be made immediately above the lower 
wall. It shows the depth of the nasal fossae, the 
lower and upper walls of the maxillary sinus, the 
lower margin of the septum, and the lower opening 
of the nasal canal. 

Ath. Upper horizontal section. 

This should be made immediately under the upper 
wall of the nasal fossae, from the fronto-nasal suture, 
to the supra sphenoid or pituitary suture. By means 
of this section will be seen the transverse diameters 
of the upper part of the nasal fossae, the communica- 
tion of the frontal sinus with the cells of the ethmoid 
bone, and the upper part of the sphenoidal sinus- 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 171 

The heads of old persons should be selected to 
display the nasal fossae, because in them the parts of 
the small bones whicli form their interior are less 
easily broken. 

Although the different sinuses which open into the 
nasal fossae may be shown, as we hare just seen, by 
means of different sections made in these fossse, we 
may devote to them a single preparation which will 
exhibit them all in the same head. To do this the 
frontal sinus should be laid open by raising its ante- 
rior wall ; the sphenoidal sinus by removing the up- 
per part of the body of the sphenoid bone ; the max- 
illary sinus according to the directions given when 
speaking of the nasal canal ; and lastly, the ethmoid 
cells by taking away from the coronal on each side 
of the cribriform plate, a piece of bone from two to 
three lines wide and extending backwards, from the 
transverse suture of the sphenoid ^bone with the co- 
ronal, to a point even with the anterior part of the 
crista gain* 

SECTIONS OF BONES. 

Sections relating to the temporal and zijgoraatic fossa* 

To have a good view of these cavities, it is suffi- 
cient to make a vertical section in the head, passing 
through the lower angle of the os malse, the middle 
of the glenoid cavity, and the inner part of the mas- 
toid process. On a part of the head in which the 
vertical and longitudinal section of the nasal fossa) 



172 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

has been made, there may also be made a transverse 
vertical section from above downwards, following the 
anterior border of the pterygoid process of the sphe- 
noid bone. But the best manner of obtaining an idea 
of the upper part of the zygomatic fossa, is by study- 
ing the bones of a head which has been disunited 
and putting together those which form this cavity. 

11. Sections to be made in the vertebral column. 

These sections are vertical, and transverse ; they 
should be made in a spine recently deprived of its 
soft parts, and generally, separated from the bones 
with which it is articulated. 

\st' Vertical sectiojijr am bejore backwards* 

By means of this section we have the vertebral 
column in two lateral divisions perfectly similar. 
For this purpose, with a very strong scalpel trace a 
line along the middle of its anterior surface,, from the 
tubercle on the front part of the atlas to the fore part 
of the coccyx. Fix the spine wrapped in three 
thicknesses of cloth, in a vice, by the lower part of 
the cervical region. Saw through the middle for- 
wards and downwards, the row of spinous processes, 
so as to make the instrument come out at the line 
traced on the fore part of the vertebral column. As 
the saw penetrates deeper the sides should be kept 
apart by assistants, or by putting sticks between 
them. The greatest possible stabihty should be 
given to the part through which the saw is passing, 
by fixing it with the vice. 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 173 

When the section is finished it is necessary to 
clear out the canal of the spine, to cleanse and dry 
the parts. During this last operation, to preserve 
the natural curves of the spine from being distorted, 
we ought, after firmly reuniting the two parts, to fas- 
ten them securely to a thick plank, one of whose edges 
is cut exactly to the curves of the spine. To do 
this, we apply the spine to the plank and trace its out- 
line^ 

2. Vertical mid transverse section. 

This section should be made from above down- 
wards, passing through the middle of the cervical ar- 
ticulating processes, and in the dorsal and lumbar re- 
gions, dividing the bony projections which unite the 
bodies of the vertebrae to their transverse and artic- 
ulating processes, and which separate from each oth- 
er the groves that conjointly form holes : in the sa- 
crum the saw should pass on each side between the 
anterior and posterior sacral holes. The preparation 
should be cleaned, and fixed while drying like the 
preceding. 

3d- To lay open the vertebral canal one of the 
three following methods should be pursued. The 
first consists in sawing away on each side the poste- 
rior plates of the vertebrae from the base of the trans- 
verse and articulating processes, and removing them 
with the spinous processes. The second, in sawing 
with a hand saw through the middle of the spinous 
processes, each in succession, from behind forwards. 



174 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

and then by making an oblique section on one side 
of the spine, penetrating to the vertebral canal, 
through the middle of the transverse articulating pro- 
cesses in the cervical region, and of the transverse 
processes in the dorsal, the back of the transverse 
processes in the lumbar region, and the posterior sa- 
cral holes. The third method consists in making on 
both sides the oblique section just described, and 
taking out the intermediate portion of bone as before. 

4th' Transverse sections of the spine. 

These should be made in the different regions of 
the vertebral column, and are so simple that they re- 
quire no rules for making them. 

III. Sections of the thorax. 

These are vertical and transverse. 

1^/. Vertical and Longitudinal Section. 

This consists in dividing the sternum and verte- 
bral column from above downwards through their 
middle in the manner which has been already ex- 
plained. 

2d. Vertical and Horizontal Section. 

This should be made in a perfectly dry thorax 
prepared with its ligaments. The ribs should be 
cut, both sides from above downwards, in a line exj 



ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 175 

tending from the middle of the first rib, to the ante- 
rior extremity of the eleventh. 

3d* Horizontal sections. These are seldom made, 
but it may be useful to divide the whole extent of the 
thorax by means of them into layers, having for their 
height one or more intercostal spaces, and which 
may be reunited at pleasure by means of a metallic 
rod. 

IV. Sections of the Pelvis, Vertical sections, 

1st, Through the longitudinal diameter. This 
should pass through the middle of the pubis, the sa- 
crum, and the coccyx. 2d* Through the transverse 
diameter. This should pass on each side, from about 
an inch behind the anterior superior spine of the ili- 
um, to the spine of the ischium. Sd, Through the 
oblique diameter* This should pass from the back 
of one of the articulatin g cavities to the opposite sa- 
cro-iliac symphysis. 

The horizontal sections should be made at diiferent 
heights in the pelvis, one of them being on a level 
with its upper opening. These preparations are par- 
ticularly useful in studying the female pelvis. 

Such are the principal sections which facilitate 
the thorough study of osteology. It may be well to 
make also a vertical sectioii of the whole skeleton. 
This may be done by following the directions given 



176 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 

for each part separately. The sternum and symphy- 
sis of the pubis should first be sawed, and then the 
spine, beginning with the coccyx and proceeding up- 
wards. It is finished by dividing the head, which 
should be done from above downwards, taking care, 
as we have already mentioned, to incline the saw to 
one side or the other, so as to avoid the septum of 
the nasal fossae. (Legouais.) 



177 



CHAPTER IX. 

Mr. Sw€t7i^s 7iew Method of making dried Anatomi- 
cal Preparations- 

Mb.. Joseph Swai^, an eminent English surgeon 
has published a second edition of a work, bearing the 
above title, the principal part of which is here copied 
from the book. The principal features of his plan 
are durability against the ravages of insects, and un- 
changableness by vicissitudes of atmosphere. His 
whole plan is however given in detail from which the 
practical anatomist may form his own opinion. It 
may not be improper to remark that the claim to 
originality so strongly urged by Mr. Swan is contested 
by French writers. In the dictionary of medical sci- 
ences Vol. 45, p. 61. it is remarked that '' this me- 
thod which the author gives as new and his own in- 
vention, was discovered and published a long time 
since by Professor Chaussier." 



SECTION XCII. 

On the advantages of Mr, Swanks method. 

Every one who has paid attention to anatom}^ 
whilst he has been convinced of the utility of dried 
23 



178 swan's new method. 

preparations, must have regretted the difficulty of 
preserving parts, after much time and expense have 
been employed in developing them. The plan which 
I have adopted, and which I am about to detail in 
the following pages, will not only prevent many of 
the usual disappointments of the anatomist in this re- 
spect, but add many advantages which dried prepa- 
rations never before possessed. These advantages 
are 

1st. That the muscles do not shrink so much as 
they do in the usual method. 

2nd. The tendinous parts are preserved distinct 
from the fleshy, so that the muscles preserve nearly 
the same appearances as when first dissected. 

8d. The disparity in the bulk of the muscles and 
injected blood vessels is so far diminished, that the 
surgeon may form a better idea of those important 
parts, the arteries. 

4th, The nerves are also preserved of their natu- 
ral size, and in their usual situation. And thus the 
muscles, arteries, veins, and nerves are exhibited in 
the places which they naturally occupy. 

Sth. The most minute nerves may be preserved 
dry, equally as well as the small arteries ; thus afford- 
ing a much easier method of obtaining a complete 



swan's new method. 179 

knowledge of the nervous system, than can be acquir- 
ed in any other manner. 

6th. Preparations thus made will keep in any cli- 
mate, heat affects them but little ; so that they may 
be preserved in the hot climates of our colonies, as 
in the East or West Indies. 

7th. A damp air does not destroy them, nor hard- 
ly at all affect their appearance. 

8th. They are not offensive to the smell, and may 
consequently be preserved in situations where other 
preparations could not be borne. 

9th. Insects will not touch them, so that they are 
not liable to the destruction which the Dermestes 
are sure to produce in preparations made in the or- 
dinary methods. 

10th. A putrefactive state of the body, although 
existing to such a degree as to render it extremely 
offensive, does not prevent such subjects from form- 
ing good preparations ; the putrefaction is checked 
by the substances employed in preparing them, and 
is not afterwards liable to return. 

11th. They dry rapidly, and whilst drying, flies 
and other insects avoid them. 



180 swan's new methob. 



SECTION XCIIL 



On the 'preparation of an Arm^ as a General Illustra- 
tion of a neiv Method of making dried Anatomical 
Preparations. 

A limb being chosen as free from fat as possible, a 
solution of two ounces ofoxymuriate of mercury in 
half a pint of rectified spirit of wine is to be injected 
into the arteries ; and the next day as much white 
spirit varnish, to which one fifth part of turpentine 
varnish has been added, and some vermilion : the 
limb is then to be put into hot water, where it is to 
remain until properly heated, when the coarse injec- 
tion is to be thrown into the arteries, and veins if re- 
quired. If the veins are to be injected, it is better to 
wash the blood out of them with water before the so- 
lution of oxymuriate of mercury is thrown into the 
arteries, as some of it returns by the veins, and by 
coagulating any blood which they might contain^ 
would prevent the injection from passing into the 
smaller branches. 

After the limb has been injected, it is to be dis- 
sected. Every time it is left, and sometimes during 
the dissection, it is advisable to cover those parts 
which have been exposed, with a cloth made damp 
with water ; and I may here observe the great advan- 
tage which will be experienced in dissecting it after in- 
jection, for as the limb when injected with the solu- 
tion of oxymuriate of mercury, undergoes very little 



swan's new method. 181 

change in nciany days, when the dissection is recom- 
menced, the parts will all be found in the state in 
which they were left ; whereas in the usual way, in 
one, or at most two days, every thing is so changed, 
that there is very little use in reviewing what has 
been done ; and if the dissection is tedious, what 
was first done can hardly be recognised at the finish- 
ing of all the parts. Another advantage is, that the 
dissection may be carried on in almost any place, as 
every offensive smell is generally entirely prevented. 

When a subject is very putrid, and the muscles 
very large, the quantity of the solution of oxymuriate 
of mercury that has been used may not sufficiently 
have stopped the putrefactive process ; or if it has 
not been injected with the solution, and from any 
change of weather or other circumstances, it has be- 
come suddenly putrid, and it is probable the time re- 
quired for finishing the dissection will be so long as 
to lead to a supposition that many of the parts will 
be destroyed before this can be accomplished ; or if 
the smell is so offensive as to be prejudicial to the 
health of the anatomist, after removing part of the 
integuments the subject may be immersed in the so- 
lution of oxymuriate of mercury for twenty-four 
hours, or longer if absolutely necessary. 

It is true there are several objections to this mode 
of proceeding, but as they may be obviated in a 
great measure by proper care, they do not counter- 
balance the advantages frequently derivable from it ; 



182 swan's new method. 

nevertheless when the dissection can be finished 
without having recourse to it, it is better avoided. 

The principal objections are three : 

In the first place the constant handling of the sub- 
ject frequently produces soreness of the hands, if it 
is continued for several days together ; but this in- 
convenience may be guarded against in a great de- 
gree by wearing gloves made of oiled silk ; second- 
ly, the instruments are so much acted upon by the 
solution, that it is impossible for them to keep any 
edge for more than a very few minutes ; this effect 
can only be partly prevented by frequently dipping 
them in a little of the white varnish : thirdly, the 
colour of the muscles is in a great measure destroyed, 
which is inconvenient for any one just entering on the 
study of anatomy, as the parts are thus rendered too 
obscure. 

The objections I have just stated do not exist ex- 
cept in a very trifling degree, when the small quan- 
tity of the solution above recommended, has been in- 
jected into the arteries. 

To discover a method not only to prevent the pu- 
trefactive process, but to put a stop to it when it is 
far advanced, and at the same time to do away the 
objections which I have above stated, as existing un- 
der the use of the solution of oxymuriate of mercu- 
ry, I was well satisfied must be an object of the 



swan's new method. 183 

greatest importance to the practical anatomist, as he 
would thus be enabled to dissect subjects, which it 
would have been otherwise next to impossible for 
him to have meddled with. And a discovery of this 
sort must not only be of great advantage to those in 
general who are constantly investigating the various 
structures of the animal creation in this country, but 
more particularly to such as are pursuing their ana- 
tomical investigations, with much risk and danger, 
on account of the putrid effluvia being prejudicial to 
the health ; and most of all, to those who practise 
medicine and surgery in the hot climates. Under 
such considerations, I have made several experi- 
ments, and from the results of them, which I will pre- 
sently mention, have much reason to suppose that 
the plan 1 propose will be found productive of every 
advantage that is possible to be produced by any 
process for putting a stop to putrefaction. I may 
just observe that for the same purpose, nitrate of pot- 
ash and other substances might be used, but none of 
them have the decided effect that is produced by ox- 
ymuriate of mercury, and besides, if the parts are to 
be made into preparations, there are positive objec- 
tions to their employment. 

Having found that when a piece of flesh had been 
immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of mercury 
until it was completely changed, and afterwards put 
into a large vessel containing water for some days, 
though the greatest part of the oxymuriate of mer- 
cury was thus washed away, it did not even then 
appear to become in the least degree putrid, I pro- 



184 swan's new method. 

cured half of the head and neck of a large horse, 
which 1 first injected with the solution of oxymuriate 
of mercury, but as the putrefactive process was not 
thus sufficiently stopped, without dissecting off the 
skin, I immersed it in the solution of oxymuriate of 
mercury for several days, and as no marks of putre- 
faction remained, (the offensive smell being entirely 
removed,) I then put it into a vessel containing a 
large quantity of water for two or three days more, 
by which means nearly all the solution was removed 
from it. I was thus able to proceed with the dissec- 
tion during the hot weather, without being in the 
least incommoded either by the smell, or soreness of 
the hands, and without finding the instruments acted 
upon in any degree, that rendered the process at all 
objectionable. By putting a wet cloth over it when 
I left it, I was further enabled to make a very minute 
dissection of the nerves, which I could not otherwise 
have done, without the use of a large quantity of 
spirit of wine, and then not with half the convenience 
and pleasure 1 have thus experienced. 

It is necessary that the dissection should be con- 
ducted in a different manner from that which has 
hitherto been usual for making preparations, as it has 
been too frequently thought sufficient to expose the 
blood vessels at the expense of every other part, but 
preparations made according to the directions here- 
inafter detailed will most commonly be good or 
otherwise, in proportion to the pains that have been 
taken in the dissection. All the fat and cellular 



185 

membrane should be removed. The muscles,* ten- 
dons, arteries, veins, nerves, and ligaments, which it 
is intended to exhibit distinctly in a dry preparation, 
must be made distinct before any attempts are 
made to dry it. 

It must always be recollected that this method of 
making preparations is entirely different from that 
generally adopted. For in this, after the dissected 
parts have been subjected to the influence of the so- 
lution of oxymuriate of mercury, the moisture con- 
tained in them is merely dissipated whilst they are 
drying, and no ulterior changes take place during 
this process, so that every part that has been left 
will remain ; whereas in the old method, not only dur- 
ing the time it is dryin/^, but long after the dissection 
has been completed, the putrefactive process still 
goes on in some degree, so that portions of cellular 
membrane, &c. that have been left, become so much 
decomposed as to be in a great measure easily re- 
moved by washing. 

If the directions that have been given are attended 
to, making the limb into a dry preparation will be 
very easy, and accomplished with very little trouble ; 
but, if on the contrary they are neglected, it will be 
found tedious and difficult, and the method itself will 



♦The different portions of each muscle, as far as they are connected by cellular 
membmne only, should always be separated, except when the surrounding parts 
will be injured by so doing. 

24 



186 swan's new method 

be condemned, when the fault is wholly attributable 
to the slovenly mode of dissecting. 

After the dissection is finished, the limb must be 
immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of mercury, 
for a fortnight, but the longer the better, and espe.- 
cially if the subject has been very putrid. The time 
it is in the solution must always be reckoned from 
the finishing of the dissection. 

An oaken box, or one made of very good deal, is 
the fittest for keeping the limb in the solution, as me- 
tallic vessels do not answer. In a box six feet long, 
it is better to have the top closed at one end, at least 
a foot, and at the other six inches, so that the lid will 
be between those parts, the edges of which should 
be cut sloping, by which means the lid will fit the 
closer. It should be made of wood, of a sufficient 
thickness, and perfectly dry, care being taken that 
the joints should fit in as exact a manner as possible. 
When finished, it should be twice well varnished in 
the inside with oak varnish. The outside should be 
painted, and if there are any small holes, they should 
be carefully filled up with putty, and the whole paint- 
ed over again once or twice. 

In order to save the solution, the shoulder should 
be put quite to one end of the box, and as little is 
required to cover the hand, so the other end should 
be raised, by which the greatest quantity of the solu- 
tion will be directed to the part that requires the 
most to cover it ; and as there are great spaces be- 



swan's new method. 187 

tweenthe arm and sides of the box, bottles half filled 
with water may be put into them, which make much 
less of the solution necessary. The bottles should 
not press on the limb, as the solution ought to get 
freely to every part of it. The limb may be taken 
out every two or three days, and any cellular mem- 
brane that has been left should be removed ; it 
should then be returned into the box, with that part 
upwards which before was at the bottom. 

Much trouble will be saved by having the dissec- 
tion entirely finished before the limb is put into the 
solution, as it will not then be necessary to take it 
completely out of the box, but only to turn it over, 
and this should always be done several times if the 
dissection has not been of such a nature as to incur 
any risk of its being injured thereb}^ or otherwise, 
when the limb is large, the part at the bottom will 
frequently lie so close to the box as to prevent the 
solution getting to it. 

The best thing to put the limb on when it is taken 
out of the solution is a butcher's tray, which when 
new should be well oiled several times until it is com- 
pletely saturated, as otherwise every time it is used 
it will absorb so much of the solution as to cause 
great waste. 

Every thing used must be clean and free from dust 
and this precaution ought most especially to be at- 
tended to after the limb has been in the solution, as 
it then so readily attracts every particle of dirt, and 



188 SWAIi's NEW METHOD. 

by neglecting this, a preparation may be entirely 
spoiled. 

When the limb has been long enough in the solu- 
tion, it is to be taken out in order to be varnished 
and painted ; for the convenience of which, a piece 
of wood about a foot and a half long and three inches 
broad should be nailed to each end of a table or 
board. Near the top of each piece of wood there is 
to be a hole for a wooden screw, which should be 
half an inch in diameter, and six inches long. A 
hole is to be made through the end of each screw to 
admit strings, by which the scapula may be tied at 
one end, and the hand at the other. The best way 
of fixing the hand is by a bit of wood four inches 
long and half an inch thick, through which eight holes 
should be made at about a third of an inch from each 
other ; then a piece of string is to be passed through 
the tip of each finger, and each end of the string 
through one of the holes, by which means all the fin- 
gers will be tied to the wood. Another hole is to be 
made near the middle of the wood, by which it is to 
be tied to the screw. When the limb is suspended, 
it is to be wiped with a piece of clean linen, and a 
small bit of wood should be put between the tendons 
of the flexor sublimis and profundus muscles near the 
wrist, and then the whole limb *must be covered with 
the white varnish. On the three succeeding days 



+ When it is intended to use oil paint, the fleshy parts of the muscles should 
not be varnished. 



METPIOD. 189 

the whole of the nerves, tendons, and tendinous ex- 
pansions must be done over with the same varnish. 

On the fifth day the tendons must be painted with 
equal parts of the yellow* varnish and white paint ; 
and the same on the seventh, eighth, and ninth. The 
nerves must be painted as often as appears necessary 
with equal parts of the white paint and white varnish. 
Care must be taken to varnish and paint the under 
surface of the tendons and nerves, as well as that 
which is superficial, if it can be done without much 
inconvenience. 

Several of the tendons would look very well with- 
out paint, but in drying, they do not all preserve the 
same appearance, and some of them assume a very 
dark colour, and where the tendinous part is thin, as 
in the fascia of the fore arm, or when it arises from a 
muscle it dries so as not to bear the least resemblance 
to a tendon. It was therefore thought necessary to 
paint all the tendons that they might have a uniform 
appearance. To accomplish this by other means a 
great variety of different trials was made with var- 
nishes, but as the results of them were not satisfac- 
tory, others were made by adding paints to the var- 
nishes, both with a view to render the process as 
simple as possible, and Ukewise to retain the most 
natural appearances ; and the rules I have laid down 

* The yellow varnish gives the tendons a rather better appearance than the 
white, but it is not of very great consequence which is used ; it saves much trou- 
ble to use only one sort. 



190 SWAX'S NEW METHOD. 

for preserving these parts are founded on those ex- 
periments which seemed to answer both these inten- 
tions the most decidedly. 

As soon as the muscles have become stiff they may 
be painted ; in doing which much care is necessary to 
be taken that the tendons and nerves are not touched, 
and this may be avoided when they are very near to 
the muscles, by interposing small pieces of wood. 

As by this mode of making preparations the parts 
very soon become stiff, and must then remain in the 
same position they have acquired, it is necessary at 
first, or at furthest within the first two or three days, 
to put every part in the exact place it is intended it 
should keep, and with this view it is proper to ob- 
serve occasionally the progress of the preparation, 
until the parts have become so hard as to preserve by 
themselves their proper situation. For though a pre- 
paration may not frequently be spoiled by leaving 
the parts to drj^ in the situations they first acquired 
after being suspended, yet much may be added to 
the appearance of some parts, by attending to this 
seemino-lv triflins: circumstance, for instance in the 
deltoid muscle, as in the position it will in all proba- 
bility acquire if left to itself, it will dry flat, or in 
wrinkles, whereas by just putting a finger behind it, 
and pressing it outwards when it is becoming stiff, it 
will preserve the rounded form it naturally has, and 
will thus appear to much greater advantage. 



swan's new method. 191 

In other parts of the body and especially in animals 
where the muscles are large, it may be necessary to 
separate some of the parts by pieces of wood, or by 
a string fixed to a particular part to which a small 
weight can be suspended, or in any other more con- 
venient manner. 

About a month after it has been taken out of the 
solution, those nerves and tendons that are not suffi- 
ciently painted should be covered with the paint and 
varnish as before, as many times as are thought neces- 
sary ; but one day should intervene between each 
time of doing them ; at the same time parts of the 
muscles will appear that have not been painted, which 
may now be done. But it is better to wait some 
time longer, and then to paint any parts of the mus- 
cles that may require it. After this, the tendons 
and nerves should be covered with boiled linseed 
oil. In using it as little oil as possible should be in 
the brush, which should be drawn gently over them 
once. This is material to be attended to, as the oil 
is apt to make some impression on the paint ; and if 
it is drawn over a second time, the paint may be dis- 
turbed, which will spoil the appearance of the part. 
In two days, if the oil is perfectly dry, the whole 
limb must be again covered with the oil ; and when 
this last is also perfectly dry, the whole must be var- 
nished two or three times with the white spirit var- 
nish. After this the preparation will have its perfect 
appearance, but to make it more durable and like- 
wise capable of being washed, it is best to varnish it 
with the best copal varnish, which when dry, should 



192 swan's new method. 

be repeated a second time, and even a third if re- 
quired. 

In using the varnishes care should be taken that 
too much is not laid on at one time, as in that case, 
it either settles in drops on the preparation or joins 
parts together which ought to appear separate, and 
makes the whole appear confused. In varnishing, 
it is necessary to finish the part immediately when it 
is once begun, for if any delay takes place, and a 
brush is drawn over a part a few minutes or even a 
few seconds after the varnish has been first applied to 
it, the appearance is very much altered. 

After the tendons have been painted, on the ninth 
day the limb may be hung in a paper bag and left for 
any time, and the nerves and muscles may be painted 
when convenient ; and it will be a great saving of 
time to those who are studying anatomy to proceed 
thus far in the winter, and finish the preparations in 
the summer when they have leisure, as it may be 
done in any place on account of there being no 
smell. 

After being subjected to the influence of the oxy- 
muriate of mercury, the coats of the arteries and 
veins remain opaque, and do not shew through them 
the colour of the injection as they do in the usual 
mode of making dry preparations, and therefore for 
the necessary distinction, as well as for the better ap- 
pearance of the preparation, it is requisite that the 
arteries and veins should be covered with copal var- 



swan's new method. 193 

nish, to which a little vermilion has been added for 
the arteries, and prussian blue for the veins ; and this 
should be done before the whole limb is varnished 
with the white spirit varnish. 

The method I have pointed out for suspending the 
limb is the most convenient, but when the anatomist 
has not sufficient room it may be done by fixing a string 
on the scapula, and tying it to a staple or any thing 
else fastened on a wall, where it may remain until it 
is finished, 

I think in a general way it is best to wait until the 
muscles are perfectly dry before they are painted. 
I formerly used the paint made with varnish, and 
where there is much dust in the room in which the 
preparation is made I think it the best, because it 
soon dries, but otherwise I now prefer that made 
with oil. 

In painting the muscles with oil paint, much may 
be added to the appearance of a preparation by a lit- 
tle management, as where tendinous and fleshy 
fibres appear intermixed, or where the redness of a 
muscle is in some degree apparent through a tendin- 
ous aponeurosis. In the first instance the tendinous 
parts should be varnished with the white varnish, &c. 
as before directed, and the muscular fibres tinged 
with very light red paint. When the muscle is in 
some degree apparent through the aponeurosis, the 
white varnish is to be used every day as for the ten- 
dons, and then once or twice with the addition of a 
25 



194 swan's new method. 

little of the \vhite paint, and when it is perfectly 
dry the whole should be tinged with very light red 
paint. 

The only objection to the paint made with oil is, 
that it is sometimes apt to impart a very disagreeable 
smell to the preparation, if the oil has not been very 
good. 

When the paint made with oil has been used, it is 
necessary to cover the tendons, and tendinous expan- 
sions, and nen'es with the boiled linseed oil. as has 
been directed, before the use of the white spirit var- 
nish, but the application of the oil to the muscles is 
not then necessary. 

If the place where the preparation is varnished 
and painted should be dusty, some contrivance must 
be used to keep the dust from it, or it will be entirely 
spoiled. 

The varnishes and paints are apt to stick to the 
fingers and cause much trouble by the difficulty there 
is in washing them off, so that if the anatomist is fre- 
quently interrupted during the time he is using them, 
it will be an advantage for him to wear thin gloves. 

Some months after a preparation has been made, 
an exudation will now and then take place from the 
muscles, causing them to have a whitish appearance. 
When this is the case nothing more is necessary than 
the application of white spirit varnish. 



swan's new method. 195 

Though a preparation will seldom be greasy if 
due care has been taken to remove all the fat, yet 
this will sometimes be the case. And the best me- 
thod of cleaning it in such a state, and of preventing 
the exudation of grease, will be to rub it as clean as 
possible with a piece of soft rag, and then to wash it 
well with the solution of acetate of lead of the Lon- 
don Pharmacopseia, which should the next day be 
applied by means of a brush, and when perfectly dry 
repeated in the same manner several times, after 
which the part must be covered three or four times 
with white spirit varnish. 

I have thus given an account of the method of mak- 
ing preparations to possess all the advantages detail- 
ed in the introduction, but if the shrinking of the 
muscles is not an object with the anatomist, much 
trouble will undoubtedly be saved by having a limb 
injected in the common way, first with a little varnish 
and red lead, and then with coarse injection. And 
indeed when it is wished to make a preparation of 
the minute arteries, the usual method will be found 
the best, because after the solution of oxymuriate of 
mercury has first been injected, the coarse injection 
will not generally fill the vessels so well as will thus 
be required. 

When the solution of oxymuriate of mercury has 
not been injected, should the subject become putrid 
sooner than might be expected during the dissection, 
it may be immersed in some of the solution for a few 
hours, as has been before directed. But when the 



196 SWAIS^'S >'EW METHOD. 

dissection is finished, the part must nevertheless be 
subjected to the influence of the solution for a prop- 
er time, and the preparation finished according to 
the directions before given. It must be expected 
that the muscles will thus shrink in a much greater 
degree than if the method were adopted which it is 
my object to recommend, yet still not near so much 
as when the solution of oxymuriate of mercury has 
not been used before drying them. 

When a subject is putrid, whether it is wished to 
preserve the size of the muscles or not, and especial- 
ly if it is a large one, it will by all means be advisable 
that it should be injected with the solution of oxymu- 
riate of mercury. 



SECTION XCIV. 
Of Solutions of Oxymuriate of Mercury, 

In using solutions of oxymuriate of mercury for 
anatomical preparations, it must always be kept in 
mind that unless animal substances are entirely 
changed by the solution, it must not be expected they 
will retain the properties of preparations made ac- 
cording to the rules which have just been laid down. 
When I first used the solution for preparations I did 
not submit the animal bodies to its influence for more 
than a few days, and the consequence was, that when 
I had kept them for some time in a damp place, all 
the deeper seated parts became mouldy, and emitted 
a putrid smell which w^as very offensive, and more- 



swan's new method. 197 

over had a very different appearance from the super- 
ficial ones. 

Solution oj Oxymuriate oj Mercury in Spirit of 

Wine- 

Dissolve two ounces of oxymuriate of mercury in 
sixteen ounces of spirit of wine. 

This solution has been found to answer best the 
purposes required of it, but it is very expensive, and 
therefore if any cheaper liquid could be substituted 
that would produce nearly the same effect, it would 
undoubtedly be very desirable. With this view, as 
it was my wish not only to be able to make prepara- 
tions superior to those hitherto in use, but likewise 
to have the means of doing so without such a great 
additional expense, I have lately tried the following 
solution, and from the results of such experiments as 
I have hitherto made with it, I have little doubt but 
tiiat it will answer the purpose nearly if not quite as 
well as that made with spirit of wine ; thus saving by 
much the largest part of the expense. I cannot in- 
deed, for want of sufficient experience, speak of the 
preparations thus made in the same decided manner 
as I can of those made with the solution of oxymu- 
riate of mercury in spirit of wine ; nevertheless when 
I observe that the effects produced on animal sub- 
stances when subjected to the influence of either of 
these solutions are exactly similar, I see very little 
reason for apprehending any material inferiority. 



198 swan's new method. 

Solutmi of Oxymuriate of Mercury in Water- 

Take of oxymuriate of mercury, two ounces.* 
Muriate of ammonia, seventy grains. 
Water, one pint. 

The oxymuriate of mercury and muriate of ammo- 
nia must be rubbed together in a mortar, and then 
the water must be added gradually until the solution 
is complete. 

Though this solution no longer contains oxymuri- 
ate of mercury in the same state as when dissolved 
in spirit of wine, yet it has the eifect of hardening an- 
imal bodies in the same manner. 

I had supposed that preparations made in this man- 
ner might be more liable to be affected by damp air, 
on account of the addition of muriate of ammonia, but 
from several experiments I have made I do not think 
it likely that they will sustain any injury of this sort. 
Partly for this reason, and likewise because crystals 
are apt to form on the preparation which it is after- 
wards rather difficult to remove, I think it better af- 
ter removing the part that has been subjected to its 
influence, immediately to immerse it in cold water 
for a short time, by which any superfluous quantity 
of solution will be washed away. 

* The weights and measures are those used by Apothecaries. 



swan's new method. 199 

A white precipitate is thrown down during the 
time an animal body is immersed in it, which most 
probably is partly albumen, and partly the effect of 
ammonia contained in the body. On this account it 
is sometimes necessary to add a small portion of ox- 
ymuriate of mercury for fresh preparations. This 
precipitate should likewise be removed after making 
one or two preparations, for if it is suffered to collect 
in any quantity at the bottom of the box, it prevents 
the solution getting freely enough to the animal body, 
and in consequence the necessary changes are not so 
well accomplished. 

Of the Solution of Oxymuriate of Mercury in Py- 
roligneous Jtcid* 

With this I tried experiments before I made any 
with the solution in water, but I thought if water 
could be substituted for the pyroligneous acid, it 
would not only diminish the expense still further, 
but would likewise afford a great advantage to the 
anatomist, by enabling him to use a fluid which can 
at all times be so easily procured, so that as the oxy- 
muriate of mercury and muriate of ammonia can be 
put in a very small compass, he might have the 
means for preserving animal bodies always ready 
without inconvenience. I should not therefore have 
mentioned this solution, but that as I find it has the 
power of hardening animal substances more than 
those already described, I thought it might answer 
some particular purposes in a superior manner. This 
solution is to be made exactly in the same manner as 



200 swan's new method. 

that made with water, substituting pyroUgneous acid 
for the water. 



SECTION XCV. 

On preparations of the minute nerves- 

It is supposed by many, that young children are 
better subjects on which to prosecute the anatomy of 
the nervous system than those of more advanced age. 
In beginning this part of anatomy therefore I chose 
such subjects, but not finding them to answer the 
purpose so well as I had been taught to expect, I 
have since had recourse to others. In a child the 
nerves are certainly larger in proportion to the oth- 
er parts than in the adult, and the larger nerves may 
be conveniently enough dissected in them, but I have 
not found it so with the more minute branches. 

In a child even the thinnest that can possibly be 
procured, still so much fat is always left in different 
parts as to make the dissection very tedious, besides 
which as far as the nerves themselves are concerned, 
I do not think they are so strong as in the adult, so 
that much disappointment is occasioned by their fre- 
quent breaking. 

The minute nerves of the face and neck are gener- 
ally the largest and most distinct in the male, so that 
for making preparations of the nerves of these parts, 
I should prefer a male subject between twenty and 



swan's new method. 201 

fifty years old, in which the features are well marked, 
and as free from fat as possible. I have almost inva- 
riably found the nerves of the face in the female more 
delicate than those in the male, and in very advanced 
age so much so as to be totally unfit for dissection. 

For the dissection of the nerves of the neck a 
thin subject is to be preferred, but it should not be 
one who has died of disease of the lungs, for it gene- 
rally happens in cases of this sort, that besides the 
disease of these viscera, all the absorbent glands and 
vessels of the neck and thorax are so much enlarged, 
and there is frequently such a thickening of the parts 
at the bottom of the neck, as to create a degree of 
confusion, which renders the dissection of the grand 
sympathetic nerve and par vagum very unsatisfac- 
tory. 

What I have said about the choice of human sub- 
jects, as far as respects the age, does not apply in 
the same manner to animals, for in many of them 
and especially the larger ones, the nerves in general 
are never so conveniently dissected, as they are 
within a week or two after birth, for they are at that 
age generally more free from fat in every part, than 
at any later period, as it is so difficult to procure 
such as have been in a diseased state long enough for 
all the fat to have been absorbed. 

In dissecting the nerves of the face, the skin must 
be carefully removed from that part of the parotid 
gland lying on the face, and from the face a short dis- 
26 



202 swan's new METHOD' 

tance towards the mouth, but nothing should be re- 
moved except the skin itself. 

Over the parotid gland so much nicety is not re- 
quired, but beyond it the greatest care must be tak- 
en, or many of the nerves will be divided, and to 
avoid this, the blade of the knife must be held hori- 
zontally, with the edge rather inclining towards the 
skin. When the skin has been removed, the fat and 
parotid gland must be carefully separated from the 
nerves with the point of one of the blades of a pair of 
scissors. If the scalpel is used in this part, many of 
the branches will be divided. It is better to sepa- 
rate most of the nerves from the fat, before attempts 
are made to remove much of it, and as it must be en- 
tirely removed, and in hot weather it is of so soft a 
consistence, as to make its removal very difficult and 
tedious by means of instruments, it will be found than 
much of it may be absorbed by blotting paper, after 
which, the little remains, which will not be much 
more in fact than the membrane that incloses it, can 
be removed with much greater facility, and less risk 
of destroying the minute branches, than if the paper 
had not been used. 

If a preparation of only some of the nerves of the 
head and face is to be made, and the subject is thin, 
it will be a saving of much trouble, and a great addi- 
tion to the good appearance of the whole, to leave 
the skin untouched that covers the parts not wanted, 
and the head will also look better if the hair is suffer- 
ed to remain on it. If all the nerves of the face are 



IWAn's ffEW METHOD. 203 

to be dissected, it is an advantage to leave a small 
portion of skin on the tip of the nose and margin of 
the lips. 

In dissecting the nerves of the neck, and indeed 
those that are minute in every other part of the body, 
the scalpel as I have just now mentioned in speaking 
of the dissection of the nerves of the face must be 
very little used except for removing the skin, for 
when the nervous branches are very numerous, 
it is next to impossible to separate them from 
the parts that surround them with an instrument of 
this kind, let the care and knowledge of the anato- 
mist be ever so great. In a general way the most 
convenient instrument will be one of the blades of 
a pair of scissors. 

If the nerves are covered by a strong fascia, which 
the single blade of a pair of scissors will not easily 
divide, as is sometimes the case in animals, and in 
consequence it T^ecomes necessary to use a scalpel, 
it should cut on one side only. If a delicate nerve is to 
be dissected w.ith this instrument, and its course and 
connexions with other nerves cannot be seen, it 
should be held with the forceps so as just to keep it 
on the stretch, the parts covering it are then to be 
divided by frequent short strokes with the point of 
the scalpel, which should always be insinuated be- 
tween the nerve and the part to be divided. If the 
scalpel is not generally used in this manner in the 
dissection of the minute nerves, but on the contrary 
its edge is held towards the subject, and the part cov~ 



204 swan's new method. 

ering the nerve is thus divided ; or if the division is 
made to one side of the nerve, either the nerve it- 
self will frequently be divided or injured, or all the 
branches communicating with it will be cut off, as 
must almost always be the case when the facial and 
grand sympathetic nerves, and many others are thus 
dissected. 

Every portion of fat must be removed, for if it is 
not, it will sooner or later shew itself in the prepara- 
tion by its transudation, softening any varnish that 
may be applied over it ; a circumstance which not 
only renders the preparation unpleasant by its stick- 
ing to the fingers whenever taken hold of, but also 
causes it to attract every portion of dust, so as in 
point of fact to take very much both from its appear- 
ance and utility. 

It is farther necessary to remove every portion of 
cellular membrane from the nerves, that the}'^ may be 
as distinct as possible, otherwise where there are 
many minute nerves in a small space, they will have 
such a confused appearance as to defeat the main 
purposes for which the preparations are made. 

Whilst prosecuting the dissection it is desirable 
that the part should be kept in spirits,* if it is pro- 
bable that it will be long before it can be finished ; 
but at all events the minute nerves should be mois- 



* For a more economical and convenient plan where it is expected the subject 
will be too much affected by the putrefactive process, see the account of an ex- 
periment in page 153. 



swan's new method. 205 

tened from time to time with spirit of wine or water, 
as otherwise if suffered to get very dry they will be 
very liable to break, 

la a general way for preparations of the nerves, I 
think it is better not to inject the subject with minute 
injection for the preservation of the size of the mus- 
cles, for if the first object is the demonstration of the 
nerves, they will appear to greater advantage by the 
shrinking of the muscles. If the part to be dissected 
is large and cannot be easily kept in spirits, and it is 
probable it will be more than a few days before the 
dissection can be finished, any further changes will 
be prevented by injecting it with some of the solution 
of oxymuriate of mercury. 

When all the nerves intended to be exhibited in 
the preparation have been sufficiently dissected, the 
part is to be immersed in the solution of oxymuriate 
of mercury as has been described in the general il- 
lustration,* and it must remain there a sufficient time. 
In a general way a fortnight will be sufficient, hut if 
the part is very bulky and the muscles have not been 
much separated, a longer lime must be allowed, as 
in this instance the deep seated parts will not so soon 
imbibe the necessary influence of the solution. 

When the part is taken out of the solution, a string 
of sufficient length should be fixed to some part of 
it, by which it is to be suspended to some conve- 
nient place in a wall, or in any other way that 
may be thought preferable. After which it will be 

* See Section XCII, &c. 



206 swan's new method. 

advisable that some of the moisture from the nerves 
should be absorbed by means of linen rags, as it 
may then be immediately varnished, which other- 
wise cannot so well be done. After this the nerves 
must be separated from each other with the forceps 
and then covered with white varnish ; immediately 
after which the nerves must again be separated from 
each other with the forceps. All the tendinous parts 
must at the same time be varnished as is required for 
other preparations, which must be done according to 
the directions given in the general illustration for the 
preparations of tendons. The next day the same 
process of varnishing and separating the nerves 
must be repeated, and they must be separated often 
enough to keep them from drying together, which they 
wuU do if this attention is not paid to them. Using the 
varnish twice is generally sufficient for the minute 
branches, but the process of separating them must be 
daily repeated until they are so dry as to keep the 
situations they were placed in. If more varnish is 
required than has been used, it will be known by the 
the nerves not shining as things always do that are 
saturated with varnish ; on the contrary if too much 
is used, the branches will not easily be kept sufficient- 
ly apart to be distinct, especially where they form a 
net work, as it fills up the meshes, and when they are 
painted they exhibit nearly a flat surface, not by any 
means conveying the exact appearances they ought 
to do, and which they will do if properly managed. 

Again if too little varnish is used, the paint does 
not adhere well, and the nerves have not an uniform 
appearance. 



swan's new method. 207 

The application of spirituous varnishes to wet sur- 
faces is I believe a plan which has seldom been re- 
curred to in any of the arts, and it is owing to this 
particular mode of using varnish that parts of animal 
bodies seldom made into dry preparations, can now 
not only be dried, but can at the same time be made 
to retain their natural appearances. It is the knowl- 
edge of this circumstance that has enabled me to 
preserve the most minute nerves dry. It is necessa- 
ry that the varnish for this purpose should be of a 
similar composition to the white varnish, that when 
it becomes dry it may preserve a sufficient degree of 
tenacity to adhere to the surface it was applied to. 

When the nerves are dry, which will be in about 
a week, they may be painted, but this process may 
be deferred for any length of time to suit the conve- 
nience of the anatomist. The paint as recommended 
for the nerves in the general illustration is to be used 
as often as may seem necessary, but twice for the 
smallest branches will in a general way be sufficient. 
As little should be laid on at one time as possible, 
much of it obscuring the branches, and it should be 
used with small brushes when the finer branches are 
painted, with very little paint in the brush at one 
time, otherwise it settles in drops on the nerves, giv- 
ing them a knotted appearance, and if there are ma- 
ny branches together, causing them to adhere, or fill- 
ing up the meshes formed by diffi^rent branches, and 
thus constituting a confused mass. In some situa- 
tions it is necessary to interpose some very small bits 
of wood to keep the branches asunder until the pre- 
paration is entirely finished. 



208 swanV new method. 

About the lips there is usually so much fat amongst 
the muscular fibres, and especially in animals, that it 
is sometimes extremely difficult to remove the whole 
of it, and preserve the terminations of the nerves. 
When however every particle has been removed that 
is possible without dividing the nerves, the parts must 
be suffered to dry, and then if there be an exudation 
of grease before the parts are painted, it will be bet- 
ter to make use of the solution of acetate of lead, as 
directed in page 159, but without the use of the white 
spirit varnish. The same rules will apply to every 
other part of the body where the fat cannot be en- 
tirely removed. 

When it is thought all the nerves have been suffi- 
ciently painted, after a few days allowed for their be- 
coming perfectly dry, they may be done over with 
boiled linseed oil. When the muscles are dry they 
must be painted red, as likewise the inside of the 
nose, mouth, &c. ; and when the paint is dry the 
whole preparation must be varnished with the best 
copal varnish, taking care that what is used the first 
time is perfectly dry before a second application of it 
is made. Here the same caution is necessary not to 
use too much varnish, and for the same reasons I 
have given both respecting its first application as well 
as in the use of the paint. The preparation being 
thus finished may be wrapped in paper to protect it 
from the dust. 

In making preparations of the cutaneous nerves of 
the arm, it is a great advantage to have both the ar- 
teries and veins first filled with coarse injection, as 



209 

these nerves are confined to their exact situations by 
the veins. 

The distribution of the cutaneous nerves of the arm 
may likewise be preserved with the skin itself. In 
this case the skin should be divided from the axilla 
over the inner edge of the biceps muscle to the 
elbow, and from thence the incision should be con- 
tinued down the middle of the fore arm. It is best 
to begin to trace the nerves from the a xillary plexus, 
to their terminations in the skin. As this is done the 
skin may be turned back each way, but should be 
left adhering to the muscles at the back of the limb in 
two or three places. When the skin has been turn- 
ed back, as much as possible of the fat adhering to it 
should be removed. 

When it is taken out of the solution to be dried, 
the inside of the skin may be done over once with 
the white varnish, and when it is dry, a second appli- 
cation of it may be made, adding a little of the white 
paint used for the tendons. 

The outside of the skin, both in the face and any 
other part, w^hen it has been left must be painted 
when perfectly dry. And here I would observe that 
it is difficult to paint the head unless the hair has been 
entirely shaved off, and that therefore before begin- 
ning the dissection it should be determined either to 
have this done op the hair left long. For the skin 
common white paint should be used with the least 
possible quantity of lake added to it. 
27 



210 swan's new method. 

In making preparations of the arm it is sometimes 
required to have one to exhibit the parts nearly as 
far as the hand, in this case as the hand does not look 
well unless it is properly dissected, and as it requires 
so much time to finish it perfectly, it will generally 
be best to leave the skin entire ; as when it has been 
dried and painted it will not diminish the general 
good appearance of the preparation, and a great deal 
of trouble will thus be saved. 

A head very far advanced in putrescency is not 
rendered unfit for making a preparation of the nerves 
of the face, &c. Indeed one of the best prepara- 
tions I ever made was of a head of this descrip- 
tion, and which was likewise full of maggots. The 
method I used was to put the head in a vessel and 
pour on it boiling water, which in a few minutes de- 
stroyed the maggots. I then dissected off the skin 
and kept the head in a tin canister, which contained 
a little spirit of wine, at all times when I was not dis- 
secting ; and when the dissection of it was complet- 
ed, subjecting it to the process for making prepara- 
tions which I have already described. 

It may be thought from the number of directions I 
have detailed in the foregoing pages, that the mak- 
ing of dry preparations of the nerves is very labo<- 
rious and takes up a great deal of time, but I can 
safely say that when the dissection has been tolera- 
bly well performed, a preparation may be completed 
with very little trouble, and if any one will use the 
necessary means, I think he will not be disappointed. 



swan's new method. 211 

I would advise every one however who engages in a 
work of this sort to adhere entirely at first to the rules 
I have laid down, as any alteration that may supposed 
to be for the better may lead in the end to a serious 
disappointment. I say this with the more confidence, 
because in bringing this mode of making preparations 
step by step, as 1 have done to its present state, I 
have myself made a great variety of experiments, 
and have attempted what I conceived might be im- 
provements, but after all have found nothing to an- 
swer the purpose nearly so well as the method pre- 
scribed in the foregoing rules. 



SECTION XCVI. 

Of Preparations of the parts concerned in Hernia- 

Having chosen a thin subject, the abdomen of 
which has been opened, the peritoneum is to be strip- 
ped off from the inside of the abdominal muscles, or 
rather from the inside of the fascia transversalis and 
iliaca, and at the same time any cellular membrane 
and fat must be removed. The skin and fascia su- 
perficialis, and every portion of fat and cellular 
membrane must then be separated from the external 
oblique muscle, and likewise from the upper part of 
the thigh. The tendon of the external oblique mus- 
cle is then to be divided by beginning a very short 
distance from the anterior and superior spinous pro- 
cess of the ilium, about the third of an inch above 
Poupart's ligament, and continuing the incision so as 



212 swan's ^ew method. 

to reach just above the external ring, which must be 
left entire. Then the tendon is to be divided a little 
higher by the side of the rectus muscle, and then by 
raising this portion of the tendon of the external ob- 
lique muscle, the lower margin of the internal oblique 
and transversalis muscle will be exposed, the lower 
edge of which must be carefully separated from the 
fascia transversalis ; and if this separation is not 
sufficient for bringing the fascia properly into view, a 
small portion of the muscle must be removed. This 
being done, the round ligament or spermatic chord 
will be seen coming from the abdomen, at which 
place the fascia transversalis is much thinner than at 
any other part. If the fascia lata on the outside of 
the thigh is removed, and the handle of a scalpel is 
passed behind Poupart's ligament, the fascia iliaca 
may be separated some distance from the muscle, and 
thus both of the fascise arising from Poupart's liga- 
ment may be seen, forming a complete barrier to the 
protrusion of the bowels, except where the sperma- 
tic chord and femoral vessels escape from the abdo- 
men. These parts are shewn to much greater ad- 
vantage if the femoral vessels are removed. 

If it is desired, other preparations can be made to 
shew the exact position of the blood vessels, and 
likewise the falciform process of the fascia lata, but 
these must be done according to the same plan, 
which it is not my intention particularly to point out, 
as I do not wish to enter more fully into the anatom}^ 
of the parts concerned in herniae than is just suffi- 



swan's i^ew method. 213 

cient for enabling me to point out in what manner 
these parts may in general be preserved. 

If the parts already described are to be shewn in a 
preparation where the whole limb is preserved, the 
dissection may be finished according to the wish of the 
anatomist, but if it is intended entirely for a prepara- 
tion of the parts concerned in hernise, it will be best 
to divide the subject about the beginning of the 
lumbar vertebrae, and then divide the pelvis through 
the sacrum and symphysis pubis, leaving about eight 
or nine inches of the thigh. I think it best to remove 
the gluteus maximus muscle and most of the mus- 
cles on the thigh, but this may depend on the wish 
of the anatomist. 

When the dissection is finished, the part must be 
put into the solution of oxymuriate of mercury for 
about a fortnight. When it is taken out it should 
be suspended by a string fixed to the vertebrae, ano- 
ther being fastened to the corner of the abdominal 
muscles, so as to keep these parts and the fascia 
transversalis on the stretch, and likewise to prevent 
them from falling too much in contact with the spine. 
If there is nolhino; more convenient a chair bnck will 
suffice, when the string fixed to the vertebrae must 
hang on one corner, and that fastened the abdominal 
muscles towards the other. 

When it is suspended the tendon of the external 
oblique muscle, the fascia transversalis and iliaca are 
to be covered with the white varnish every day for 



214 

three days. The tendon must be finished according 
to the directions given in the general illustration for 
the preparation of tendons. And the fascia trans- 
versalis and iliaca must be covered afterwards once 
or twice with the white varnish, to which a very little 
of the white paint has been added, if the proper ap- 
pearance has not been sufficiently preserved. The 
edges of the external ring, and the separated portion 
of the tendon of the external oblique muscle, should 
be put in a proper position before they are quite stiff. 
The muscular parts are then to be painted red, and 
as pale a covering as possible of red paint is to be 
put over the inside of the fascia tranversalis and il- 
iaca. When the paint is quite dry, the tendinous 
parts must be done over with a little drying oil, and 
the whole preparation must be varnished with the 
copal varnish twice or three times. 

SECTION XCVII. 

V reparations oj the Liver. 

In order to preserve the natural appearance and 
size of the liver, it is necessary that the blood vessels 
and excretory ducts which compose so great a part of 
it, should be filled with injection to keep them dis- 
tended, otherwise, when it dries it will shrink so 
much as not to retain its form in that degree which 
is requisite to render a preparation of any material 
use. 

The method I have found the best is to add one 
fifth part of turpentine varnish to white spirit varnish, 



swan's new method. 215 

and some colouring matter as red lead, which should 
be gently thrown into the vena portee and excretory 
ducts, and then coarse injection, which is necessary 
for the distension of the larger vessels. Some coarse 
injection should likewise be thrown into the hepatic 
artery. It does not require to be heated before it is 
injected. 

After the injection is finished, if it is a small liver, 
as a dog's, a fortnight will be sufficient for its immer- 
sion in the solution of oxymuriate of mercury ; but 
if it is a much larger liver a month will be necessary. 

When it is dry it must be painted the natural col- 
our, and then varnished with the copal varnish as of- 
ten as may appear necessary. 

In the same manner I have every reason to sup- 
pose the kidnies may be preserved so as to have 
their natural appearance. 



SECTION XCVIII. 
Preparations of the JSTose^ S^c. 

In making dry preparations of the nose, mouth, 
larynx, &c. when any of the soft parts are preserved, 
it is better to put them into the solution of oxymuri- 
ate of mercury for some time, as they will not then 
undergo any further changes, and they will Hke- 
wise be effectually preserved from the ravages of in- 
sects. 



216 swan's new method. 

When they have been removed from the solution 
and have become dry, they may be painted and var- 
nished so as to restore the appearances they original- 
ly possessed. 



SECTION XCIX. 

Preparation of the absorbents. 

Though I have not yet had leisure for making pre- 
parations of the absorbent system, by the same 
means I have made use of for preparations in gen- 
eral, yet I think it most probable that they may be 
made nearly according to the directions given in 
the general illustration, so as to be much more 
durable than by the common method ; for as it is 
owing to insects eating away the solid parts of all 
dry preparations in the manner they have hitherto 
been made, the delicate absorbent vessels thus lose 
their support, and consequently give way to the least 
pressure or agitation communicated to them. It is 
therefore reasonable to suppose that when the solid 
parts have been saturated with the solution of the 
oxymuriate of mercury, which will prevent insects 
from touching them, the absorbents, with moderate 
care may be preserved for a great length of time. 



swan's new method. 217 

SECTION C. 

Oft preparations of the Brain- 

The brain should be carefully removed from the 
skull, and the nerves left as long as possible, and it 
should be immediately immersed in rectified spirit of 
wine to harden it a little, after which the pia mater 
should be carefully removed, if it is wished to shew 
distinctly the different eminences and convolutions. 

When the pia mater has been removed, the brain 
should be put into the solution of oxymuriate of 
mercury, where it should remain at least a month if 
it is a large brain, but if it is a small one, as that of a 
sheep, a fortnight will be long enough. 

When it is taken out of the solution for the purpose 
of drying, it should be covered once with the white 
varnish; it must then be put on a clean plate, but 
the part in contact with the plate should be changed 
two or three times in the twenty-four hours for the 
first few days, otherwise the pressure on the flat sur- 
face of the plate will totally efface any of the emi- 
nences, &c. that have been in contact with it too 
long. 

When it is perfectly dry it must be painted. For 
this purpose some of the white paint, mentioned 
amongst the paints is to be used. Having poured off 
from it the thin liquid, which is chiefly spirit of tur- 

28 



218 swan's new method* 

pentine, a little of the white paint, which is nearly in 
the same state it was before the spirit of turpentine 
was added to it, is to be mixed with as much mastich 
varnish as gives it the consistence of cream. With 
this the brain is to be painted so often as is required 
to give it the desired appearance. When this is done, 
it should be covered with mastich varnish, to which 
a very small quantity of the paint has been added. 
Care must be taken that the paint which has been 
used each time is perfectly dry, before another appli- 
cation of it is made. 

After it has been sufficiently painted it must be 
varnished with the white spirit varnish two or three 
times. As it is impossible to suspend it for this pur- 
pose, the upper surface must be varnished and suffer- 
ed to dry; it must then be turned over, so that the 
varnish may be applied to the part that was in con- 
tact with the plate. Every time the varnish is used 
it is necessary to have very little in the brush, which 
should only just touch each part once. This precau- 
tion is necessary, or the paint will be disturbed so 
as to destroy its proper appearance. 

In the same manner both the brain and medulla 
spinalis are to be preserved, when they^have not been 
removed from the subject, as in making preparations 
of the nervous system, and it is wished to shew the 
origins of the nerves from these parts. 



swan's new method. 219 

SECTION CI. 

On preparations of the Joints^ 

The joints in general are very unfavourable for 
making good dry preparations, on account of the 
quantity of fat contained in them, but when the dis- 
section of any one is completed, and all the fat re- 
moved, it must be put into the solution of the oxy mu- 
riate of mercury, where it must remain a fortnight, 
and it must then be varnished twice with the white 
varnish, and in the course o f a few weeks when it 
appears to be perfectly dry, it must be covered twice 
with the best copal varnish. 

The joint should not be taken from an old sub- 
ject, and the varnish should never be applied to the 
bone. 

In the same manner a whole limb, or indeed a 
whole subject, may be preserved so as to shew all 
the joints. 

When the ligaments of a whole subject are to be 
preserved, it might be advisable to fix the different 
parts in such a manner, that when the ligaments, &c. 
have become dry, the exact situation of every bone 
may be kept. 

In preserving a capsular ligament, as that of the 
knee, it is best to saw through the patella transverse- 
ly, (which mode also shews the other ligaments of 



220 swan's new method. 

this joint to the best advantage,) and as the ligament 
dries, it should from time to time be put into a pro- 
per form, by pressing it outwards with the finger. 



SECTION CII. 
On Preparations of the Ear^ 

I shall in the present section enter more into an 
anatomical description than I intended in any part of 
this work, as I conceive it may be useful to those un- 
acquainted with the structure of the ear, by enabling 
them to understand the relative situations of its most 
intricate parts, in such a manner as is absolutely ne- 
cessary before they can attempt to make prepara- 
tions. 

When the top of a skull has been sawn off, and 
the lower jaw removed, the base may be turned up- 
wards and divided lengthwise, by carrying the saw 
through the middle of the palate and the foramen 
magnum. The bone which forms the inferior part of 
each meatus auditorius externus must be laid bare, 
and carefully removed with a chisel and mallet, until 
the membrana tympani is fully exposed. In one of 
these portions the extremity of the Eustachian tube 
must be detached from the pharynx, and turned a 
little aside ; the anterior part of the skull must then 
be removed by sawing through the glenoid cavity, so 
as to leave the membrana tympani and Eustachian 
tube perfect. In this portion the cavity of the tym- 
panum may be laid open, by cutting away with a 



221 

strong knife or chisel a thin piece of bone which is 
at the side, and opposite the middle of the petrous 
portion of the temporal bone, and between its sharp 
edge and the squamous portion, which will expose 
the malleus and incus. Then the Eustachian tube 
must be cut open quite into the tympanum. In this 
dissection, the tympanum will be seen communicat- 
ing backwards with the mastoid cells, and at the same 
time the situations of the four small bones must be 
observed. That the malleus is fixed by its handle to 
the membrana tympani, and that its processus gracilis 
is articulated in a groove at the anterior part of the 
tympanum. That the body of the incus is articulated 
with the head of the malleus ; that its short crus is 
resting in a groove in the bone near the entrance of 
the mastoid cells ; and after a little of the petrous 
portion, opposite to the incus, has been cut away that 
its long crus is joined to the os orbiculare, which is 
a very small round bone. That the stapes goes 
across the tympanum, its head being articulated with 
the OS orbiculare, and its base with the fenestra ova- 
lis. To have these bones separate, and at the same 
time perfect, it is necessary to macerate a temporal 
bone until they are quite loose. In a similar portion 
of the skull the muscles of the tympanum must also 
be dissected. 

Each auricle should be left perfect by beginning to 
open the meatus auditorius externus, where the con- 
cha terminates. All the skin maybe removed that 
surrounds it, and likewise all the flesh from every 
part of the skull, care being taken to leave the Eus- 
tachian tubes perfect. 



222 swan's new method. 

These parts may be thus made into preparations. 
One half of the skull may shew the Eustachian tube 
entire, and its exact situation in the pharynx ; the 
other may shew it cut open into the tympanum. If 
it is wished to shew the semicircular canals and coch- 
lea in one of these preparations, it may be done ; 
otherwise both parts may be put into the solution of 
oxymuriate of mercury for some time. When taken 
out to dry, a bit of wood or quill should be put into 
the Eustachian tubes, that they may dry open. The 
soft parts may be covered once with the'white varnish, 
and when dry, the muscular parts, &c. may be colour- 
ed if necessary. When the whole is perfectly dry, it 
may be varnished twice with copal varnish. 

Before beginning the dissection of the labyrinth, 
it will be necessary in a macerated temporal bone, to 
saw ofif the squamous portion just at the superior 
part of the meatus auditorius externus ; and then to 
lay open the meatus auditorius externus and tympa- 
num, by detaching a piece of bone with a saw, 
which is first to be directed from the inferior part of 
the meatus auditorius externus, between the styloid 
process and the foramen stylo-mastoideum into the 
inferior extremity, or beginning of the canalis caro- 
ticus, and then from the superior part of the meatus 
auditorius externus into the superior part of the ca- 
nalis caroticus. 



In the bone thus prepared, on the outside of the 
petrous portion, and about its middle, within the ca- 



swan's new method* 223 

vity of the tympanum, an oval hole to which the 
stapes is fixed, called fenestra ovalis will be observ- 
ed, and immediately below the fenestra ovalis, a pro- 
jection of the bone called promontory, and at the un- 
der part of the promontory a hole called fenestra ro- 
tunda, which is about one-twelfth of an inch below 
the fenestra ovalis, and which in a recent bone is 
closed by a membrane ; behind the fenestra rotunda, 
may be seen a hollow, which is the cavern from which 
the stapedius muscle originates. 

On the posterior or inner surface of the petrous 
portion, may be observed the meatus auditorious in- 
ternus, the bottom of which is divided into two hol- 
lows by a sharp ridge. The fore part of the inferior 
hollow is perforated by many minute holes, through 
which the branches of the portio moHis of the seventh 
pair of nerves go to the cochlea, and in the back part of 
this hollow are several holes, through which branch- 
es of the portio mollis go to the vestibule and semi- 
circular canals. In the superior hollow are two 
holes, the lower or smaller one for the transmission 
of branches of nerves into the vestibule, the upper or 
larger one for the transmission of the portio dura of 
the seventh pair of nerves, which may now be traced 
through its extent ; it goes from the meatus auditor!- 
us internus, between the cochlea and outer extremity 
of the superior semicircular canal, it then passes over 
the superior edge of the fenestra ovalis and then 
backwards and downwards, and terminates at the fo- 
ramen stylo-mastoideum. The bone thus dissected 



224 swan's new method. 

may be kept to shew the parts that have been de- 
scribed, or the labyrinth may be dissected in it 

For making a preparation of the labyrinth, it is ne- 
cessary to begin to file about the middle of the pe- 
trous portion of the temporal bone, and between its 
ridge and the cavity of the tympanum and the supe- 
rior semicircular canal will be opened, and by trac- 
ing it towards the tympanum, will be found termi- 
nating in the vestibule, nearly opposite to the head 
of the malleus ; the other extremity will be found 
terminating in common with the upper extremity of 
the posterior semicircular canal, which termination 
is about three-twelfths of an inch from the middle of 
the posterior part of the meatus auditorius internus, 
and in the foetus two-twelfths. 

In tracing the posterior canal backwards, its infe- 
rior extremity will be found at about three and a half 
twelfths of an inch from the jugular fossa, and in the 
foetus rather more than two-twelfths of an inch from 
the foramen stylo-mastoideum. 

These two canals being laid open, the petrous por- 
tion behind them must be cut away until the exterior 
semicircular canal is opened. It is placed horizon- 
tally about four twelfths of an inch deeper in the 
bone than the top of the superior canal, and is near- 
ly even with the superior part of the incus. In the 
foetus it is three twelfths of an inch deeper in the 
bone than the top of the superior canal. The laby- 
rinth is most easily dissected in the foetus, for it is as 



swan's new method. 225 

perfect, as in the adult, whilst the surrounding bone 
is so soft as to be very easily cut with a knife, but 
the adult ear makes the most beautiful preparation. 
In the foetus the course of a great part of the supe- 
rior and posterior semicircular canals may be seen 
without any dissection. 

The cochlea is now to be dissected. It lies with 
its base to the meatus auditorius internus, and its apex 
to the tympanum. It is three twelfths of an inch 
from the entrance of the outer extremity of the su- 
perior semicircular canal into the vestibule ; in the 
foetus it is two twelfths of an inch. It must be open- 
ed by carefully cutting away the bone with a knife, 
the point being inclined a little downwards towards 
the tympanum. When the cochlea is laid open, 
something like a pillar in the middle, going from the 
base to the apex may be observed ; the lower two 
thirds of which have been called modiolus, and the 
upper third infundibulum. The lamina spiralis, which 
is a thin plate of bone with a membranous edge 
winds round the pillar ; it begins at the fenestra ro- 
tunda, and divides the cochlea into two canals called 
scalas, these two canals communicate at the apex, 
where the lamina spiralis terminates in a sharp point. 

To have a more perfect knowledge of the laby- 
rinth it will be necessary to separate the petrous 
portion from the rest of the temporal bone ; the re- 
maining part of the shell of the cochlea must then 
be carefully removed so as to expose the whole of 
the lamina spiralis, when it may be observed that 
29 



226 swan's new method. 

one of the canals called scala tympani terminates at 
the foramen rotundum, and the other called scala 
vestibuli, at the vestibule. The vestibule may be 
laid open either by filing away the bone between the 
meatus auditorius internus, and the common termi- 
nation of the superior and posterior semicircular ca- 
nals, or by cutting away the bit of bone between the 
fenestra ovalis and fenestra rotunda. 

There are two aqueducts, one leading from the 
vestibule, called aquaeductus vestibuli, and the other 
from the cochlea called aquseductus cochleae. Both 
of the aqueducts may be seen in that preparation, 
where the vestibule has been laid open by cutting 
away the bone between the fenestra ovalis and fenes- 
tra rotunda. The aquseductus vestibuli may be seen 
begining just opposite the opening made in the vesti- 
bule, and just below the common termination of the 
superior and posterior semicircular canals. It termi- 
nates at a hole on the posterior or inner surface of 
the petrous portion three twelfths of an inch behind 
the meatus auditorius internus. 

The aquseductus cochlea may be seen in the same 
preparation beginning at the under part of the scala 
tympani, very near the fenestra rotunda, and termi- 
nating by a wide opening, about three twelfths of an 
inch below the meatus auditorius internus, and one 
twelfth of an inch from the anterior part of the jugu- 
lar fossa. 



swan's new method. . 227 

SECTION cm. 
On preparations oj the Lungs and Heart, 

The heart and lungs may be preserved dry so as 
to have their natural appearance. When it is wish- 
ed to preserve the heart alone, it should be injected 
according to the usual method with injection made of 
plaster of Paris, which answers as well as any other 
injection, and has this advantage, that when a wound 
has been made in any part of it, as it remains unal- 
tered by heat, the risk of the preparations being des- 
troyed is entirely obviated. 

When both the heart and lungs are to be pre- 
served together, the heart should be first injected as 
I have just now directed, and then a pipe fixed in the 
trachea, as near the size of the trachea as possible, 
care being taken to tie it in very fast. It must then 
be injected with plaster of Paris injection. The sy- 
ringe should be proportioned to the size of the lungs, 
and the trachea should not be left of a much greater 
length than it is wished to have it in the preparation. 

In injecting the trachea the injection should be sent 
in until with moderate force no more will enter. The 
heart and lungs should be from a young subject, and 
as free from fat as possible. And the same precau- 
tion should be observed in the choice of the parts 
when they are to be taken from an animal. 



228 swan's new method. 

When it is wished to preserve the lungs alone, it is 
better to fill the branches of the pulmonary artery by 
fixing a pipe in the trunk of this artery. The pul- 
monary veins may be filled by fixing the pipe in the 
left auricle ; the trachea is then to be injected as 
before described. After the injection is finished, all 
the fat and cellular membrane should be removed, 
when the part should be immersed in the solution of 
oxy muriate of mercury for a fortnight. 

When it is taken out it must be hung up to dry. 
The trachea and the whole surface of the lungs 
should be immediately varnished with the white var- 
nish, and then the trachea alone should be varnished 
once every day, for two or three days. 

The heart will require painting. To give the nat- 
ural appearance both ventricles may be painted red, 
the vense cavse and pulmonary artery and right auri- 
cle purple, and the left auricle and aorta red. Or 
the whole of the right side of the heart may be 
made purple, and the left red. The coronary arteries 
and vein will also require painting. 

When the lungs are dry they must be painted with 
the red paint used for the muscles, and must then be 
varnished as well as the trachea with the white spi- 
rit and copal varnishes. 

In making preparations of the heart to shew its 
internal structure, its cavities should be opened so as 
not to injure the valves, and when it is wished to 



swan's new method. 229 

shew all the valves distinctly, it is better to divide the 
heart so as to make a separate preparation of each 
side. Before doing this, the right ventricle should 
be opened nearly as far as the origin of the pulmona- 
ry artery, and then the pulmonary artery itself should 
be divided nearly down to the valves, that it may 
thus be seen how to cut between two of the semilu- 
nar valves, so that they may all be preserved perfect, 
any further dissection required to shew the tricuspid 
valves should be made at the same time. Nearly in 
the same manner the left ventricle and aorta must be 
opened, after which the two sides of the heart should 
be separated. 

In making these dissections, about two or three 
inches of the aorta and pulmonary artery should be 
left. So much of each auricle may be removed as to 
shew distinctly the opening into the ventricles. 

It is necessar}^ to remove all fat and cellular mem- 
brane, and after the dissection is finished, the parts 
are to be immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of 
mercurv for a fortnioht. 

When the parts are taken out, they must be sus- 
pended in the most convenient position for the pre- 
servation of the valves, which should be kept as much 
upon the stretch as possible. In several instances 
after the auricle has been opened and a great 
part of it removed, I have sewed the circumference 
to a common ring proportioned to its size, by which 
the opening from the auricle to the ventricle is kept 



230 swan's new method. 

open : a ring made of bone is to be preferred. By this 
ring, or by a piece of string passed through any por- 
tion of the heart with a needle, the part is to be sus- 
pended to a nail driven into the wall, or a piece of 
wood. It will also be proper, by hanging small 
weights in different parts, or by fixing them with 
strings to several nails placed in different directions 
of the wall, or piece of wood, or by any other simi- 
lar contriv^ance, to keep all the parts constantly on 
the stretch, in which state they should remain until 
perfectly dry. if these precautions are not attended 
to, the valves cannot be preserved so as to be satis- 
factorily shewn, because the heart when left to it- 
self contracts so much in drying as hardly to bear 
any resemblance of the shape it had in its fresh state. 

It is necessar}^ to put some small bits of wood in- 
to the semilunar valves to keep them separated 
from the vessels, or they would dry so much in con- 
tact with the sides of the vessel as not to be distinct- 
ly seen. 

After this the whole heart must be varnished with 
the white varnish, and then the valves, the pulmona- 
ry artery and aorta, must be varnished every day for 
three or four days. When the heart is perfectly dry 
the chordae tendinese and aorta, and pulmonary arte- 
ry and valves, if they dry so as to have a very dark 
appearance, must be painted once or twice with the 
white varnish to which a little white paint has been 
added, and all the muscular part must be coloured 
with the red paint. It must then be varnished two 



swan's new method. 231 

cr three times over with white spirit varnish, and 
twice with copal varnish. 

In a general way however, it will not be necessary 
to paint the valves, so that after they have been var- 
nished with the white varnish a sufficient number of 
times, when the muscular partis painted, they as well 
as the chordae tendineae, and aorta and pulmonary ar- 
tery, may be done over with oil, to which the least 
possible portion of red paint has been added that 
will serve to give them a tinge. The whole must af- 
terwards be covered with the white spirit and copal 
varnishes, as has been just directed. 



SECTION CIV. 
On preparations of Animals. 

When it is is intended to make preparations of 
animals which are very putrid, before beginning the 
dissection, some of the solution of oxymuriate of 
mercury should be injected into the arteries, and then 
if it is not wished to fill the vessels with coarse injec- 
tion for their preservation, the skin should if possi- 
ble be entirely removed. If the putrefactive process 
has not been stopped by the injection, the animal 
should be immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of 
mercury for twenty-four hours, or longer if necessa- 
ry. This might be done with part of the skin re- 
maining, but it usually contains so much dirt, and the 
hairs so frequently fall off, and by adhering to the 
different parts, not only spoil their appearance if the 



232 swan's new method. 

dissection has been begun of, but likewise spoil the 
solution for many purposes, so that if this method is 
pursued, the animal ought at least to be well washed 
before it is immersed in the solution. 

The dissection must be finished in the usual way, 
when the animal must be immersed in the solution of 
oxymuriate of mercury a proper time, according to 
the directions given in the general illustration. 

When it is taken out of the solution for the purpose 
of being dried, if it has naturally white flesh, as a 
cat, rabbit, common fowl, or fish, it should be var- 
nished over with the white varnish immediately after 
having been dried with a cloth, and this should be 
repeated the next day. The tendons, nerves, &c. 
should be managed according to the directions al- 
ready given for the preservation of these parts in the 
general illustration, and the muscles, when dry, 
should be tinged with very pale red paint made with 
varnish ; the whole animal should then be covered 
with boiled linseed oil and varnish, according to the 
directions given in the general illustration. When 
the muscles are of a deep red colour, as in the hu- 
man subject, they must be treated in an exactly simi- 
lar manner as is recommended for those of the hu- 
man subject in the general illustration. 



23S 



SECTION CV. 

On Varnishes and Paints, 

The following are the receipts for the paints and 
varnishes, which are made by the weights and mea- 
sures of apothecaries. The copal varnish, mastich 
varnish, white spirit varnish, and turpentine varnish, 
may be bought at the colour shops. 

The White Varnish. 

Canada balsam, 

Spirit of turpentine, of each three ounces ; 

Mastich varnish, two ounces ; 
Put them into a bottle, and shake them together until 
they are properly mixed. That Canada balsam an- 
swers best which is white and rather opaque. 

Mastich Varnish 

This may be made by putting four ounces of pow- 
dered mastich and one pint of spirit of turpentine 
into a bottle, which should be well shaken every day 
until the greatest part of the mastich is dissolved. 

Yellow Varnish 

Infuse one ounce of powdered gamboge in eight 
ounces of spirit of turpentine for fifteen days ; after 
which equal parts of the clear liquor, Canada balsam, 
and mastich varnish, are to be mixed together. 
80 



234 swan's new method. 



White Faint. 

Three ounces of the best white paint and one 
ounce of spirit of turpentine, are to be put into a 
bottle and shaken together. When it is used with 
the varnish, a little of each should be mixed at once. 

Faint for the Muscles 

Is made by grinding on a slab, lake with the white 
varnish, to which one fourth part of turpentine var- 
nish has been added. That for the liver requires 
lake, Prussian blue, and vermilion, mixed in the same 
way. Prussian blue may be mixed by itself in this 
way, and a little of it may be added to copal varnish 
for the veins. 

For convenience, small vials containing these dif- 
ferent paints should be kept, and a little should be 
poured out as it is wanted. 

As 1 have before stated I now generally prefer 
using paint made with oil, which is made by grinding 
lake with drying oil. I generally make it of a very 
deep colour, and when I use it, add as much more oil 
to it as will give it the exact tint I wish. The oil 
should be of a very drying quality, but if this cannot 
be procured, some acetate of lead made into as fine 
a powder as possible should be added to linseed oil, 
and they should be well mixed together on a slab in 
the same way as is usual in mixing paint. The paint 
and oil may be kept in vials, and a little only poured 
out as it is wanted. 



swan's new method. 235 

If Prussian blue is used with oil, it is necessary to 
add much acetate of lead to the oil, as it is so very- 
long in drying. 

As the brushes used in varnishing and painting, 
when left for some hours exposed to the air are en- 
tirely spoiled, and in this manner much expense is in- 
curred, it is proper to keep a few vials on purpose for 
them. All the brushes used with the oil paint, and with 
varnishes made with spirit of turpentine should be pre- 
served in vials containing spirit of turpentine, and those 
used for the white spirit varnish, or any other varnish 
made with spirit of wine, should be put in vials con- 
taining rectified spirit of wine. It is better to have 
the brushes used for different colours in separate vials. 

Camels' hair brushes made in quills are the best 
for all purposes, for the large ones made in tin, which 
are very convenient for using once, are fastened in 
with resin, or some similar substance, in consequence 
of which, if they are put in vials with spirit of turpen- 
tine, the resin becomes dissolved, and they are then 
totally unfit for use again, as this dissolved resin 
mixes with the varnish that is about to be used, and 
will in all probability spoil the whole preparation. If 
large brushes made in tin and fastened in with glue 
were used, this objection would not exist to the same 
extent. 



;Sd 



CHAPTER X. 



MODELLING. 



SECTION CVL 

Of the requisite properties of Plaster of Paris for 

modelling. 

Plaster of Paris may bebought of toy-makers in 
the large cities of the United States, at three or four 
shillings a peck. It is prepared by taking common 
clean plaster as it comes in ships, and having it finely 
ground and then bake it in an oven to dissipate its 
water of crystalUzation. It however imbibes moisture 
again, if exposed for a length of time to the atmos- 
phere, and will require farther drying. Where a ve- 
ry smooth surface is wanted to the cast, the plaster 
used should be sifted finely, and the coarser kind, 
may be reserved for filling up the centre of casts. 
The peculiar quality, which renders it so convenient 
for the purposes of receiving the impressions of both 
hard and soft bodies is, that when mixed with water 
to the consistence of cream, it absorbs the water in a 
few minutes, and becomes a firm solid mass, without 
diminishing its bulk, and consequently without crack- 



MODELLING. 237 

ing. That which is of a good quality becomes harder 
and stronger than chalk, and perfectly white, in about 
seven or ten minutes. When longer in hardening, 
it proves to be weaker in its texture and acquires a 
soft pasty feel, and afterwards crumbles easily. When 
once applied for making a mould or a cast, and it has 
partially hardened, it will be injured by the addition 
of more water ; the requisite quantity of water to 
give it the proper degree of fluidity should therefore 
be added at once. 

Plaster of Paris may be coloured by adding to it 
almost any colouring powder in a dry state, and mix- 
ing them intimately in a mortar before the water is 
added. The strength and hardness of the composi- 
tion may be increased by the addition of a small quan- 
tity of common size. 



SECTION CVIL* 

General Observations on making Models in Plaster 

oj Farts, 

The art of modelling is both pleasing and useful, 
and may be employed to a great variety of purposes, 
by the Anatomist, Antiquary, and Naturalist. 

The advantage of using this substance in prefer- 
ence to others, is, that notwithstanding a slight cal- 
cination of the alabaster (of which it is made) redu- 
ces it to a pulverable state, it becomes again a tena- 
cious and cohering body, by being moistened with wa- 
ter, and afterwards suffered to dry ; by this means, 



238 MODELLmG. 

either a concave or a convex figure, may be given to 
it when wet, by a proper mould or model, which it 
retains by the hardness it acquires when dry ; and 
from these qualities it is suitable to the double pur- 
pose of making both moulds and models. 

The particular manner of making Models, (or 
Casts, as they are commonly called) depends on the 
form of the subject to be taken ; where there are 
only slightly elevated parts, the process is simple 
and easy ; likewise, where there are such, as form 
only a right, or any greater angle with the principal 
surface or plan, from which they project : but where 
parts project in lesser angles, or form curves, inclin- 
ed toward the principal surface or plan, the work is 
more difficult. These observations apply to moulds 
made upon hard inflexible bodies ; but the case is 
very dififerent with respect to those made upon soft 
and yielding substances, as are all the soft parts of 
an animal body, for if a mould is made by pouring 
the fluid plaster on such substances, it may often 
be freed from the mould, even where the object of 
the experiment projects in acute angles, from the 
surface upon which it is laid ; but when the cast is 
made in such moulds, the mould must be removed 
cautiously by piece-meals, by reason of the cast not 
being flexible, as the original is to imitate. 

The Moulds should be made of different degrees 
of strength, according to the size of the cast intended 
to be made in it ; small subjects will not require them 
more than about half an inch thick ; large ones will 



MODELLING. 239 

require them an inch, or if very large an inch and a 
half ; as the large moulds, from the size of the pieces, 
the weight of the casts, and frequently some difficul- 
ty in removing them from the models, render them 
more liable to accidents ; and where a considerable 
number of casts are intended to be made from one 
mould, it will require particular care that the mould 
be accurately and strongly made, and as equal in its 
thickness as may be. 



SECTION CVIII. 

Making Moulds of Plaster of Paris on soft Bodies^ 
and casting their Models. 

When the original to be copied by a Plaster Model 
is soft and pliable, it will generally render the process 
much more simple and easy, as is the case with the 
viscera of the body ; for in such case, let the parts 
project as they may, this need not be considered in 
constructing the mould, for the original yields freely 
to pressure, and may easily be extracted from the 
mould, even through an aperture less than the bulk of 
the subject ; this is particularly the case with the in- 
testines, or any inflated part. 

The first step to be taken, is to grease the surface 
of the original, to prevent the plaster sticking to it ; 
this may be done with olive oil, laid on with a soft 
painter's brush ; but if the part is naturally slip- 
pery, this will be unnecessary, as is the case with most 
of the internal parts of the body. Then lay the 



240 MODELLING. 

original on a smooth table, or other flat surface, pre- 
viously greased, or covered with a cloth, to prevent 
the plaster sticking to it ; then surround the original 
with a frame or ridge of glazier's putty, at such a dis- 
tance from it as will admit the plaster to rest upon 
the table, on all sides of the subject, for about an 
inch, or so much as to give sufficient strength to the 
mould ; then a sufficient quantity of fluid plaster is to 
be poured as uniformly as possible, over the whole 
surface, until it is every where covered to such a 
thickness, as to give a proper subsistence to the 
mould, which may vary in proportion to the size. 
The whole must then be suffered to remain in this 
condition, till the plaster has attained its hardness ; 
when the frame is taken away, the mould may be 
inverted, the subject removed from it, and when the 
plaster is perfectly dry, let it be well seasoned. 

For making the Casts in these moulds, the whole 
of the cavity must be first greased with a mixture of 
olive oil and lard, in equal parts, and then filled with 
fine fluid plaster, and the plain of the mould formed 
by its resting on the surface of the table, covered to 
a sufficient thickness with coarse plaster, to form a 
strong basis or support for the Cast, if such basis is 
requisite, which is particularly the case, where the 
parts represented are thin and membranous, and 
would not have sufficient strength of themselves. 

The plaster being thus poured into the mould, suf- 
fer it to stand until it has acquired its greatest degree 
of hardness ; then the mould is to be removed, the 



MODELLmO. 241 

effecting of which is more or less difficult, according 
to the figure of the model ; if the projecting parts 
only form right or greater angles with the plain of 
the base or principal surface, the mould may be re- 
moved without breaking ; but if the parts project in 
any lesser angles, or form curved lines, inclining to- 
ward the general surface or plain, it will be more dif- 
ficult, and endanger the model ; for in this case the 
mould must be broken away in small pieces, by 
means of a small mallet and chisel. 

Should any pieces of the mould be broken off, it 
may be cemented, by making the two broken sur- 
faces perfectly wet, and applying them together with 
a little fresh mixed plaster interposed ; and after it 
is hardened, the joint may be smoothed, by paring off 
the rough plaster which may have been pressed out 
in fixing the piece. If any small holes should be ac- 
cidentally made by the chissel, they may be thorough- 
ly wetted with water, and then filled up with a fresh 
mixed plaster, and smoothed over with the edge of a 
knife. When the model is perfectly dry, it will be 
fit for colouring if necessary. 



SECTION CIX. * 
Making Moulds of Plaster of Paris on hard Bodies, 

It has been already mentioned in the general ob- 
servations, that the mould is simple, and easil}^ made, 
even upon hard substances, if none of the projecting 
parts of the figure form acute angles with the plain 
31 



242 MODELLmG. 

upon which it is raised ; in this case, the subject being 
greased with a mixture of olive oil and hog's lard, in 
equal proportions, the plaster may be poured over the 
whole surface at once, to a proper thickness ; and when 
perfectly hardened, it may be removed in one entire 
piece, by separating it from the pattern with the fin- 
gers, or by carefully introducing the blade of a knife 
into the joint, betsveen the mould and original ; then 
the mould is to be dried in any exposed situation, or, 
if requisite, it may be done more expeditiously by ar- 
tificial heat ; and afterwards seasoned (see section 
110.) when it will be ready for use. If the mould is 
not a very deep concave, the fine plaster may be 
poured into it, and managed similar to the making of 
the mould, spreading it equally thick over the whole 
surface. It is always to be remembered, that before 
the plaster is poured into the mould, its surface must 
be very thinly spread over with the oil and lard, by 
means of a small painter's brush, and this is to be re- 
peated every time a cast is made. 

When the object of experiment, or what the artists 
call the Pattern, is of an irregular figure, consisting 
of a number of projections, hollows, curves, and an- 
gles, the work is more complicated, in respect to con- 
structing the mould, but not so much difference in 
making the cast. — To form the mould properly, it will 
be necessary to view attentively the pattern, and first 
consider in what way to proceed, that the mould may 
be composed of as fev/ parts or pieces as possible ; 
that is done by making every piece cover as much of 
the pattern as may be, without surrounding such 



MODELLING. 243 

projecting parts, or running into such hollows, as when 
the plaster is hardened will not admit the piece to 
come off (or what is technically called relieve or de- 
liver) from the pattern without breaking, as, for ex- 
ample, would be the case with the head of the os fe- 
moris, if it w^as entirely enclosed in a body of hard 
plaster ; for the cervix being of less diameter than the 
head, the aperture in the plaster situated round the 
cervix, would be too small for the head to deliver, 
so that the plaster should not exceed an exact hemis- 
phere. 

The same difficulty would occur by the plaster 
running into a hollow, the outer orifice of which is any 
where of less diameter than the internal part ; so that 
the mould is to be constructed according to the figure 
of the pattern (see plate IV. Fig. 3.) So simple a 
figure as a common, round, or oval calculus may be 
moulded in three parts only, but to mould an os femo- 
ris would probably require ten or twelve pieces, and 
the joints formed by the junction of those several 
pieces, must run along the most prominent parts of 
the pattern : a little reflection will be sufficient to 
shew the necessity of following this rule invariably, 
when the mould is constructed of two or more parts, 
for their more convenient relief, and the stronger for- 
mation of the internal part ; for where the inner sur- 
face projects into any hollow part of the pattern, such 
projecting ridge or point is the most liable to acci- 
dent ; and if divided by a joint running through it, 
each part being but half the thickness and strength it 



244 MODELLING. 

otherwise would have been, consequently will be 
much more liable to such accidents. 



Where there is a necessity of internal pieces, for 
the filling up of any hollows, these are to be first 
made, and the outer pieces after the first has become 
hard. 

The first thing to be observed in making a mould 
upon a hard and dry surface, is to have it smoothly 
rubbed over with the mixture of oil and lard, in equal 
parts ; then such hollows as require internal pieces, 
are to be filled up with a sufficient quantity of fluid 
plaster, and while in a soft state fix a w^ire loop into 
it, as shewn in Plate IV. Fig, 3. The plaster should 
be a little raised in a pyramidal form round the wire, 
and when it is hard, the surface of it cut smooth with 
a knife, preserving two or three angular ridges from 
the loop to the outer edge ; that it may fix more 
steadily in the outer piece of the mould afterwards 
to be made upon it ; then let the outer surface be 
well greased, to prevent the second piece from adher- 
ing; the loop which is left projecting, is to be enclos- 
ed in a little glaziers' putty, or some such substance 
before the second piece is laid on ; this may prevent 
an accident by the second piece taking hold of the 
loop, and preserves a hollow place for the cord. — 
For the formation of the second or outside piece, 
mix a proper quantity of plaster, proportioned to 
the extent of surface it is to cover, and the intended 
thickness of the mould ; when it is just beginning to 
thicken, or assumes such a consistence, as not very 



MODELLING. 245 

freely to run off the surface, begin and spread it over 
the internal piece or pieces, and the pattern as far as 
possible, so as not to include more than will safely 
deliver ; and as the plaster becomes more tenacious, 
add more on the pattern, until it is of sufficient thick- 
ness, keeping the edges smooth and square like the 
edge of a board: the plaster should be spread equal- 
ly on all parts, and the best instrument for doing this, 
is a painter's palate knife, or what apothecaries call 
a bolus knife ; but for this purpose it should be 
chosen not so pliable as they are generally made. 
When the outside piece is hardened, the edges are to 
be pared smooth, and nearly squared with a small 
pointed knife ; in the edges are to be formed with the 
point of the knife, small conical holes, an inch or 
more distance from each other, according to the size 
of the piece (see Plate IV. Fig. 1.) These hollows 
receive the fluid plaster in forming the adjoining 
parts of the mould, and occasion points correspond- 
ing with the hollows, and are intended to preserve 
the edges of the different pieces steadily in their 
proper relative situations ; the third piece is then to 
be formed in a manner similar to the second, greas- 
ing the edges of the former plentifully with the oil 
and lard, to prevent the pieces from adhering to each 
other, and thus the pattern is to be wholly enclosed, 
and afterwards an aperture cut in a suitable part of 
the mould for pouring in the plaster, and small holes 
are also to be bored throuojh the mould, opposite to 
the wire loops fixed in the inside pieces, through 
which a cord is to be conveyed from the loop, to 
confine such pieces in their proper situation during 
the casting. 



246 MODELLING. 

There are frequently occurring, cases in which the 
pattern is not to be wholly enclosed in the mould as 
before ; for instance, the mould of a pedestal is to be 
left open at the bottom, where the fluid plaster is to 
be poured in, also the bottom of a bust where the 
supposed section of the body is made ; likewise, 
when it may be designed to model part of the subject 
only, as a face, extremity, &c. In these cases where 
the mould terminates, there will be, of course, an 
aperture left for the pouring in of the plaster. 

The mould being completely formed, the pieces are 
to be removed from the pattern or original, and 
exposed to the air to dry, or dried by artificial heat, 
and then seasoned according to the rules given in 
Section 110, w^hen it will be fit for use. 



SECTION CX*. 
Reasoning of Plaster of Paris Moulds. - 

By seasoning of moulds, is meant the preparing them 
for use, after their first formation. The first part of 
this process is to make them perfectly dry, which, if 
the mould is of considerable thickness, will require 
two or three weeks, unless it is expedited by artificial 
heat ; when dry, they are to be brushed over plenti- 
fully with boiled linseed oil, made more drying by the 
addition of finely levigated litharge, white vitriol, or 
sugar of lead. The inside and the joints of the mould 
should be particularly well supplied with it ; if it be 



MODELLING. 247 

large, the outside need not be attended to, as it 
would be an unnecessary waste ; very small moulds 
are sometimes boiled in the oil, which fills the pores 
more perfectly, and gives a greater hardness to the 
plaster. After the mould is sufficiently oiled, it is to 
be set aside until perfectly dried ; when, if the sur- 
face and joints are thinly brushed over with the olive 
oil and lard, they will be fit for use. 

If linseed oil be used instead of lard, to grease the 
mould, in order for casting, it will occasion the cast 
in a short time to assume a disagreeable yellow col- 
our. 



SECTION CXI.* 

Of Casting with Plaster oj Paris. 

Casting with Plaster of Paris in moulds made of 
one entire piece, where the projecting parts form 
obtuse angles with the general plane, is very simple 
and easy : nothing more is necessary than to thinly 
grease the inner surface with the oil and lard before 
mentioned, by means of a painter's brush ; and then 
pour into it first a small quantity of plaster, mixed to 
proper consistence, to flow into all the minute parts, 
which may be assisted by shaking the mould ; then add 
more, so as to cover the whole inner surface ; and 
as the plaster begins to acquire a degree of firmness, 
it may be disposed in any manner we wish, when it 
should be raised to a proper and equal tliickness on 



248 MODELLING. 

the mould, by means of a bolus knife ; the edges 
should be kept square and even, whilst the plaster is 
sufficiently fluid ; but this should always be done as 
expeditiously as possible, carefully avoiding any dis- 
turbance to the stratum of plaster in conjunction with 
the mould. If we continue working the plaster with 
the knife for an unnecessary length of time, whilst it 
is hardening or setting, it will greatly diminish its co- 
hesion, and render the model brittle- When the 
model has acquired a sufficient hardness, it may be 
removed from the mould by a careful separation ; but 
where the mould is such as will not admit the deliv- 
ery of the model, it is to be removed by piece-meals, 
with a amall hammer and chisel : this will require 
great caution not to break the body of the model, or 
chip out pieces from the surface ; if small pieces 
should be thus accidently broken off, it may be af- 
terwards repaired by thoroughly wetting the parts, 
and then filling them with a little fresh mixed plas- 
ter. 

For casting in moulds of a more complete cavity 
and complicated construction, it will require a diffe- 
rent process ; the several parts of which the mould 
is composed, having their internal surfaces and edges 
greased with the oil and lard as before, are to be pro- 
perly put together, and bound by a cord round the 
mould, in such a manner as to secure them in that 
situation, and prevent the fluid plaster escaping 
through the several joints : some fine plaster is then 
to be poured in at the open end or aperture, and the 
mould turned about in all directions, so as to give the 
plaster repeated opportunities of spreading itself 



MODELLING. 24^ 

over the internal surface : when this is sufficiently 
hardened, pour in more fresh mixed plaster, and turn 
the mould about as before, so as to spread it over the 
whole of the plaster first introduced, and then the 
thickness of the cast (varying according to its size) 
may be made up by a repetition of the same process, 
with the cheaper kind of plaster ; this will give a 
fine surface to the cast, which will look and answer as 
well as if the whole was composed of the same ma- 
terials. If the model is to be made solid, it may be 
filled with the coarse plaster after the mould is suffi- 
ciently lined w4th the fine as above. When the cast 
is hardened, the cord may be taken off, and the pieces 
of the mould carefully removed. To finish the mo- 
del, nothing more is necessary than to smooth off 
the seams, and mend any little imperfection in the 
surface, by the means mentioned in Section 115. 

Where internal pieces are required in the mould, 
they are to be securely fixed to the external, as al- 
ready described, before the several outer parts are 
put together for casting ; and the cords, after casting, 
are always to be loosened by removing the twisting- 
sticks, and untying the knots, otherwise the cast or 
mould will be broken in their separation. 

Such subjects as will not admit of being cast en- 
tire (as a human figure with its extremities extended) 
are to be cast in detached parts, and joined after- 
wards : the legs and arms may be strengthened, by 
introducing a stick into the centre of the mould, 
whilst the plaster is in a fluid state ; but this is only 
32 



250 MODELLING. 

done when the cast is made solid, that is, no cavity 
left in its centre. In very small slender parts a brass 
wire may be used instead of wood ; iron wire is apt 
to rust and give a stain to the model. 



SECTION CXIL* 
Of moulding and casting Busts from living Subjects^. 

This is an operation which should be conducted 
with considerable caution, otherwise the person sub- 
jected to it may be suffocated. This branch of the 
art of modelHng, will frequently be found very useful 
to those who wish to enrich their anatomical cabinets 
with rare and extraordinary cases of disease, pro- 
ducing considerable alterations in the external figure 
of the parts. 

For the purpose of making the mould, the person 
should be laid horizontally on the back, with the head 
raised by a pillow to that exact position (relative to 
the body) in which it is naturally carried when the 
body is erect ; then the parts to be represented, are 
to be very thinly covered with fine oil of almonds, by 
means of a soft painter's brush ; the face is then first 
to be covered with fine fluid plaster,* beginning at 
the upper part of the forehead, and spreading it over 
the eyes, which are to be kept close, that the plaster 
may not come in contact with the globe, yet not clos- 



* The plaster for moulding from a li\dng subject will be less disagreeable, if'mix- 
ed with warm, rather than cold water. 



MODELLIJVG. 251 

ed so forcibly as to cause wrinkles, unnatural to the 
part ; then cover the nose and ears, first plugging 
up the meatus auditorii with cotton, and the nostrils 
by a small quantity of tow rolled up, of a proper size, 
to exclude the plaster from those cavities ; during the 
time the nose is thus stopped, the person is to breathe 
through the mouth ; in this state the fluid plaster is 
to be brought down so low as to cover the upper lip, 
observing to leave the rolls of tow projecting out of 
the plaster ; the process being carried thus far, the 
plaster must be suffered to harden, when the tow 
may be withdraw^n, which will leave the nostrils open 
and free to breathe through ; then the mouth is to be 
closed in a natural and easy position, and the plaster 
advanced to the extremity of the chin : afterwards 
begin to cover that part of the breast to be repre- 
sented, and spread the plaster to the outsides of the 
arms, and upward, so as to meet and join that which 
is previously laid on the face ; when the whole of the 
mass has acquired its due hardness, it is to be cau- 
tiously lifted off, so as not to break in any part, or 
give pain to the person ; which may easily be pre- 
vented by a httle deliberation and care. 

The mould being thus constructed, let it be dried 
and seasoned, the cast or model is then to be made by 
pouring fluid plaster over its concave or inner sur- 
face, and distributing it equally on all parts ; but the 
holes in the mould, occasioned by the tow placed in 
the nostrils, should be first stopped by a little plaster 
placed externally after the cast is thus formed, of suf- 
ficient thickness in the mould, the latter is to be re- 



252 MODELLING. 

moved by carefully breaking it into small pieces with 
a mallet and chisel. The eyes, which are necessari- 
ly shown closed, are to be carved, so as to represent 
the lids elevated, which is performed without diffi- 
culty ; the nostrils are also to be hollowed out with 
the point of a knife ; the back part of the head, which 
is not represented, on account of the difficulty of 
moulding parts covered with hair, being always dis- 
posed to adhere to the mould, is to be afterwards 
formed by plaster from the fancy or ingenuity of 
the artist : the edges of the model are to be neatly 
smoothed off, and then the bust fixed on a proper pe- 
destaL 

Some artists, who are in the frequent practice of 
taking masks* and busts, use metallic tubes to place 
in the nostrils instead of the tow ; but I have repeat- 
edly used tow without any inconvenience : which ever 
is used, they should be introduced so as not to distort 
the part where an exact representation of the expres- 
sion of the countenance is required. 

This operation, though it may strike an inexperi- 
enced person with disgust, is performed without 
much inconvenience to the person subjected to it, 
and what personages of high rank submit to, as the 
means of preserving the most accurate and infallible 
likenesses. 

* So called when the face only is cast. 



MODELLmG. 253 



SECTION CXIII. 



A Method of representing the Outlines of any Fig- 
ure in Plaster of Paris* 

First draw with a black-lead pencil the subject 
to be represented ; then take a quire of paper, and 
lay upon it a smooth piece of tin foil, large enough 
to include the sketch made with the pencil ; lay the 
drawing on the foil, and with a blunt-pointed instru- 
ment, as large as a needle, fixed in a proper handle, 
trace the drawing over, bearing the point upon it suf- 
ficiently hard to make a deep impression in the foil, 
which afterwards is to be very lightly rubbed over 
with olive oil, by means of a fine camel's-hair pencil ; 
then mix a sufficient quantity of plaster of Paris, and 
pour over it to a proper thickness : when it has ac- 
quired a proper hardness, raise it from the foil, and 
there will appear in a raised line a copy of the draw- 
ing. 

By a little care not to injure the foil, it will serve 
for a considerable number of copies. It must be re- 
membered, that if the drawing is traced upon that 
side of the paper on which it is made, the plaster im- 
pression will show it reversed ; so that to represent 
it according to the original, it should be traced on 
the reverse side of the paper, and for which reason 
oiled paper is preferable, as in that the drawing may 
be seen on the contrary side. This mode of taking 
impressions from foil, is simple, easy, and expedi- 



254 MODELLING. 

tious, where a considerable number of copies is want- 
ed ; and it seems probable, that with some little im- 
provement, it may become much more useful ; if a 
method can be acquired to impress deep concaves 
upon it, in such a manner as to retain the impres- 
sions, it may be employed in making slightly raised 
figures in the manner of basso-relievos : this may be 
assisted by spreading the foil on a smooth even bed 
of glaziers' putty, half an inch in thickness ; the sur- 
face may be made an exact plain, by pressing the 
foil upon it with a smooth piece of board ; the putty, 
if not made too soft, will receive and retain the im- 
pression made by pressure on the foil with proper 
instruments, much better than if the foil lay on a 
hard table. 



SECTION CXIV.* 

Of making Moulds in Wax on irregular Bodies, and 
casting in Plaster of Paris^ without Seams. 

This is a mode of making Casts, which I believe 
has never been practised by any other person, though 
it is attended with very little difficulty ; nor is that 
difficulty increased by the greater irregularity of bod- 
ies upon which the mould is made ; but it must be 
remembered, that only such bodies can be modelled 
in this way as may be readily destroyed by acids, 
therefore any fleshy or bony substances are favourable 
for the purpose. The mould is to be made of a com- 
position of wax, rosin and turpentine varnish ; which 
ingredients are to be used in the same proportions 



MODELLING. 255 

as for coarse injection, only omitting the colouring 
matter, not as hurtful, but unnecessary. The prepara- 
tion to be modelled should be placed upon a smooth 
board (made sufficiently wet to prevent the wax from 
sticking to it) in that exact position in which it 
should be represented ; then gradually pour on the 
composition, liquified by heat, and as it cools on the 
surface, add more from time to time, until every part 
is covered to a sufficient thickness, to bear handling 
without bending, which would deform the mould, 
and consequently the model : it should be made at 
least a quarter of an inch thick upon every part ; when 
the wax is perfectly cold, let it be carefully removed 
from the board, and in its lower part an opening will 
be left, by a part of the orignal being in contact with 
the table or board, through which the whole or a part 
of the preparation may be withdrawn, without injur- 
ing the mould. If it can by any means be wholly 
withdrawn, there is no occasion for corrosion ; but if 
it cannot, it must be laid in the diluted muriatic acid 
to corrode it so perfectly, that it may be washed 
away with a stream of water. The acid is to be pre- 
pared in the same manner as directed for corroding 
injected preparations. The preparation being en- 
tirely dissolved, and washed away, suffer the wax 
mould to get perfectly dry, then fill the cavit}^ with 
plaster of Paris ; when this is hardened, put it into a 
proper vessel of water, and set it over the fire, in or- 
der that the wax may liquify and rise to the surface, 
which when cold may be removed, and the plaster 
model taken out ; the water does not break down the 
texture of the plaster. The model will not be of a 



256 MODELLING. 

good white, on account of the wax entering the pores 
on the surface, and communicating its colour ; but 
this is a circumstance of no consequence, when it is 
to be painted after nature : if it should be wished to 
preserve the model of a better white, white wax, 
without any mixture, should be used. 

To make a mould of some preparations, it may be 
necessary to immerse them in a vessel of melted wax 
until it is cold ; but care should be taken that no 
part touches the bottom or sides of the vessel, or 
floats to the surface ; as this, however small the points 
of contact, would form openings in the mould in im- 
proper places : when the wax is cold, remove the 
mass from the vessel in its entire form, and make 
an opening with the knife in the mould, opposite to 
that part of the preparation, which is of least con- 
sequence if disfigured ; this opening is to give the 
acid access to the preparation, which is then to be 
corroded, and the process conducted as before de- 
scribed. 



SECTION CXV.* 

Of making Moulds with Putty^ and casting with Plas- 
ter of Paris, 

Putty* is not adapted to the making of moulds, to 
afford so accurate an imitation of the original as plas- 



* The Putty here meant is that kind used by the Glaziers ; but with raw in- 
. stead of boiled linseed oil. — It should be kept under water when not used, to 
preserve it from drying. 



MODELLING. 257 

ter of Paris, but may sometimes be used for subjects 
whose figure will not admit of being moulded in plas- 
ter, as is the case where there are numerous project- 
ing points, incapable of delivering from a more solid 
mould, as is sometimes the case with diseased bones. 
One surface only, consisting of not more than an hem- 
isphere or semi-cylinder, can be represented in one 
cast ; so that to exhibit the whole surface of a bone 
it will require at least two casts. 

The manner of conducting this process, is first to 
prepare a bed of putty upon a table, of such size and 
shape as the original may require ; it should be squar- 
ed at the sides, and its upper surface made smooth 
and even ; then the original is to be thoroughly wet- 
ted and placed upon the putty, with that side down- 
ward intended to be represented ; in that direction it 
must be pressed into it, so as to include half its cir- 
cumference, and the edges of the putty round the orig- 
inal should be pressed close to it ; then let it be care- 
fully removed, preserving the flatness of its upper 
surface by the assistance of a bolus knife. Upon the 
flat surface of the putty, make a rim at a sufficient 
distance from the impression, when it may be filled 
with fluid plaster until it flows over the upper smooth 
surface to a proper thickness ; that on the surface of 
the putty will afford a base to the model of a suffi- 
cient strength, if such base is needful, which may 
not always be the case. When the plaster is suffi- 
ciently hardened, remove the putty from the cast, 
pick out such pieces as may be left in the interstices, 
then cut the edges of the base square and even. A 
33 



258 MODELLING. 

repetition of the same kind of process with the other 
side or sides of the original, will give a good repre- 
sentation of the subject. Thus I have frequently 
taken moulds of bones, shells, fossils, &c. None but 
such things as are tolerably hard and inflexible, can 
be imitated in this way, on account of the force ne- 
cessary to be made to impress them in the putty, 
which, if they are yielding, will disfigure their seve- 
ral parts. 



SECTION CXVI*. 

Of smoothing the Surface of Plaster Models- 

This is done by means offish skin and Dutch rush- 
es, such as are used by cabinet-makers. When a 
cast is taken from a mould, constructed of several parts 
or pieces, there will be small projecting lines formed 
by the plaster running a small distance into the joints 
of the mould : these projecting lines, called seams, 
are to be carefully removed with a small knife bent 
laterally, so that the point may not cut the surround- 
ing parts ; afterwards they may be more neatly 
smoothed by a Dutch rush. 

The fish-skin is used to take off any more consid- 
erable roughness which may arise from a bad mould, 
or otherwise ; but as it leaves a scratched rough sur- 
face, it should be finished by the rushes. 

It frequently happens that there is a considerable 
number of air holes in the surface of a model, owing 



MODELLING. 259 

to small bubbles being retained under the plaster, 
when poured into the mould, especially if the plaster 
should be too thick ; they are to be filled up with a 
little fluid plaster with the point of a knife ; but the 
holes should be thoroughly wetted, by means of a 
sponge dipped in clean water, immediately previous 
to the application of the plaster. These parts are 
afterwards to be smoothed over as before described. 



SECTION CXVII.* 
Of colouring Models in Plaster of Paris- 

There are several kinds of colouring used upon 
plaster of Paris, but I do not know any better for 
anatomical models, than the common oil paint used 
by Sign and House Painters ; for this has one con- 
siderable advantage, in not being injured by washing 
with warm soap-water and a soft Painter's brush : it 
should be done at least two or three times over where 
the cast is designed to shew any thing which has a 
natural gloss, as any internal part from its moisture, 
the globe of the eye, &c. When models of this kind 
are raised upon a plaster ground or base, they may, 
if necessary, have a gloss, and the ground be painted 
of a dead colour ; this distinction may be made by 
painting the model twice over, and the ground but 
once ; or if it is not necessary to paint the model 
twice, it may be varnished when dry, with oil varnish. 
Where the oil colouring is used, any little injury in 
the cast or model may be repaired with Glaziers' 



^^0 MODELLING. 

putty, which would not answer if water colours were 
used. 

With respect to the art of imitating nature by col- 
ours, this can only be acquired by practice and the 
exercise of genius ; it is an art distinct from anato- 
my, yet is very necessary for an anatomist to be ac- 
quainted with ; and was it more regarded as a neces- 
sary part of education in youth, designed for this 
study, we should not have had so many badly exe- 
cuted anatomical plates published by eminent authors ; 
and by this means too, many important cases might 
have been communicated to the world, which for 
want of it are buried in oblivion. 



SECTION CXVIIL* 

Of repairing injured Casts in Plaster of Paris- 

Casts in Plaster of Paris are very liable to acciden- 
tal injuries ; and without some knowledge of this 
kind, many valuable cases may be wholly lost. 

When the casts have never been oiled or painted, 
the pieces accidentally broken off may be replaced, 
by first thoroughly wetting the two parts which are 
to be joined, then spreading on each a little fluid plas- 
ter, and applying the surfaces, pressing them close 
upon each other, and wiping off the superfluous plas- 
ter, which may be pressed out of the joints : if any 
pieces should be lost, the space may be filled up with 
fresh mixed plaster ; and when hardened, shaped 



MODELLING. 261 

with a knife, to imitate the original figure of the part, 
and afterwards smoothed with a Dutch rush, if neces- 
sary. When casts have been oiled or painted with 
oil colours, they are not so favourable for repairing 
in this way, except when a fracture happens through 
a part of considerable thickness ; for that which has 
once imbibed the oil, is unfavourable for the adhesion 
of fresh mixed plaster ; those not disposed, on this 
account, to adhere firmly, may be fixed by means of 
strong glue ; and if such pieces, not very large, 
should be lost, the part may be supplied with bees- 
wax, rendered more pliable by the addition of a small 
quantity of common turpentine : this may be used in 
such a degree of heat, as will facilitate the formation 
of it according to the original figure of the part ; 
should it get cold and hard during the application, it 
may be easily softened by holding near to it a hot 
iron of considerable thickness. Glaziers' putty may 
be used for the filling up of any very small chasms ; 
the part being lightly brushed over with boiled lin- 
seed oil, before the putty is laid on, that it may strike 
the better ; when the part is neatly painted, it will be 
quite unobservable. If putty is used to fill any con- 
siderable vacuities, it will shrink in the process of 
drying, and give an uneven, unnatural surface ; for 
which reason wax is recommended in such cases. 



262 MODELLmG. 



SECTION CXIX. 

Of casting a Model of the Labyrinth of the Ear 
ivith leady and Corroding the bone in an Acid. 

Take a temporal bone, and heat it in the fire, un- 
til its animal substance is consumed, the lime being 
left uninjured. Then having suffered it to cool, in- 
close the petrous portion in plaster of Paris, or in 
soft clay, and suffer it to dry, taking care that all the 
foramina leading out of it are closed ; after which 
heat the whole, and while in this state pour molten 
lead into the external opening of the ear, which will 
run into the labyrinth by the foramen ovale, or, (if 
the stapes has previously been removed,) into the for- 
amen ovale. The clay or plaster covering of the bone 
is now to be broken off, and the bone immersed in a 
mixture of sulphuric or muriatic acid one part, and 
water three parts, which will immediately destroy 
the bone without acting on the lead, which will, rep- 
resent the form of the semi-circular canals, the coch- 
lea and the vestibule. 



263 



CHAPTER XI. 

COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 



Directions for preserving animals and parts of ani- 
mals for anatomical investigatiofi. 

Preliminary Observations, 

When the practical anatomist has acquired an ac- 
curate knowledge of the structure of the human 
body, and has made a collection of preparations as 
memorials of his industry, and for future reference in 
practice, he generally feels inclined to extend his in- 
vestigations into the structure of such animals as ex- 
hibit traces of resemblance to man— to observe their 
points of difference and similarity, and the wonder- 
ful adaptation of structure to use in all, according to 
the various wants and circumstances of each. 

But besides gratifying the curiosity, such a study 
furnishes the mind with many interesting illustrations 
of human anatomy and physiology, a knowledge of 
which is so essential to success in the practice of 
physic and surgery. The celebrated Mr. John Hun- 
ter was fully aware of this truth, and with a zeal 



264 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

worthy of the subject and of his philosophical mind, 
pushed his inquiries into every department of com- 
parative anatomy, and gathered a rich harvest of 
facts and observations, interesting to himself and 
to the medical world. 

The invaluable collection made by this truly great 
man, was purchased by the British government, and 
placed under the care of the Royal college of sur- 
geons of London, who have made extensive addi- 
tions and diffused its benefits far and wide by lectures 
and publications. 

The conservator of the Hunterian museum, Mr. 
William Clift, F. R. S. was a pupil of the celebrat- 
ed Mr. Hunter, and imbibed from him those qualities 
of ardent zeal, patient industry and candid inquiry that 
characterized in so extraordinary a degree his illus- 
trious teacher. The life of Mr. Clift has been de- 
voted exclusively to the interests of this establish- 
ment, and with a success that has already secured 
to him the gratitude of his countrymen, and of all 
persons interested in medicine and surgery, who re- 
sort to the capital of Christendom for professional 
improvement. 

The directions contained in the next seven sec- 
tions, are taken from a recent pamphlet sent me by 
Mr. Clift, and were " principally framed by the late 
Mr. Hunter, to facilitate and render effectual the en- 
deavours of the friends of scientific inquiries, but 
who are not well acquainted with the art of prepar- 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 265 

ing and preserving animal substances for anatomical 
investigation." — But although the special object of 
the directions is, to inform the friends of the Royal 
College of physicians and surgeons how they can 
best aid the establishment, which renders them more 
extensive than is necessary for the wants and purpo- 
ses of an individual anatomist in this country, yet 
they comprise a brief notice of such objects as are 
most worthy of attention for his own improvement. 

Brute animals it has justly been remarked, fre- 
quently afford instances of extraordinary productions, 
and of expressions of deviations from the healthy con- 
ditions and offices of parts ; useful in explaining alter- 
ations in the human organs, besides advancing vete- 
rinary knowledge. Examples of such productions 
and expressions, are, therefore, to be sought for 
among persons who have opportunities of making ob- 
servations upon dead animals. 



SECTION CXX. 

Of the Methods of Catching Jlnimals ; and of the 
Primary Objects of Attention in Them* 

All Animals are naturally wild ; and, in many 
instances, it needs considerable art to catch them. 
The more perfect Animals which have much pro- 
gressive motion, require to be caught by means, 
which, generally, produce some degree of injury to 
their different parts, and often to their external 
34 



266 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY, 

form ; this injury will necessarily be in proportion to 
the difficulty of capture. 

Quadrupeds in general, are either caught in traps, 
or shot ; consequently some parts of the body are 
injured. Birds, also, are usually shot, to the inju- 
ry of their plumage. 

At the time of taking an Animal, it would be prop- 
er to collect, on the spot, as many circumstances con- 
nected with its history as possible ; particularly with 
regard to food, locomotion, propagation, &c. 

Snakes, Lizards, and Reptiles in general, being 
taken without serious injury, suffer little in their ex- 
ternal form : yet, even these may be considerably 
injured without care ; for, as they are commonly ob- 
tained in the breeding season, it is possible that the 
organs of generation, and their contents, as eggs, &c. 
may be destructively compressed ; it is therefore 
proper to seize them by the neck, and immediately to 
immerse them in spirit, so as to drown them ; or to 
keep them in a bag until spirit can be procured. 

Turtles, Fishes, Crustacea, and Insects, suffer very 
little from the manner of being caught. 

The softer animals, most of which inhabit the sea, 
sustain little injury from the mode of their prehen- 
sion ; but, as their shape, and size, admit of conside- 
rable variation, their form may suffer from the man* 
ner in which they die. 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 267 

Animals, without bone to determine their shape or 
locomotion, yet, having a considerable extent of mus- 
cular contraction, vary their figure according to cir- 
cumstances ; of this kind are the Actiniae, Holothu- 
ria, Testacea, &c. which should, therefore, be allow- 
ed to die gradually in the water to which they are 
accustomed ; whence, dying in a relaxed state, more 
of their external form will be displayed : but it is 
desirable to have specimens in the different degrees 
of expansion, and contraction. 

When dead, they are immediately to be put into 
spirit, to prevent putrefaction ; which, otherwise, 
would soon follow, 

A sketch, however slight, or ill executed, of Mol- 
luscse, and others whose form and colour are materi- 
ally altered by death, or when put into spirit, will 
greatly assist in rendering a description intelligible. 
A memorandum of the scale upon which the drawing 
is made, whether of the natural size, or so many inch- 
es to a foot, affords essential information ; the admea- 
surements, also, of an animal where parts only are 
preserved, is ver}'- necessary. Moveover, the Sex 
of the individual should be noted, if not expressed by 
the part preserved. 

Animals, of whatever class, which are small enough 
to be preserved whole, should be kept in that slate. 
Such as are so large that they cannot possibl}^ be 
brought home entire in spirit, should be divided into 
those parts which characterize them ; but only some 



368 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

of the larger Fishes, Birds, and Quadrupeds, require 
this treatment. 

When this separation of parts is requisite, it will 
be necessary, previously, to notice the external ap- 
pearances ; the number of mammae in the female, 
and their situation ; whether between the anterior 
extremities, as in the Monkey, Elephant, &c. or 
along the abdomen, as in the Sow, Bitch, Rat, &c. or 
between the hind legs, as in the Mare, Cow, &c. If 
the female cannot be procured, inquiry should be 
made concerning the mammae of the male ; for it 
sometimes happens, that the male, as the horse, for 
instance, has no such parts. 

It is hardly necessary to describe the external 
parts of the female ; as, generally, the whole of them 
maybe preserved. 

The situation, and external appearances, of the 
male organ, in its natural state, must be remarked ; 
whether it be along the abdomen, as in the Dog; 
pointing backwards, as in the Cat ; w^hether cover- 
ed by the common skin, as in the Bull ; or by 
a proper skin, and only attached to the abdomen on 
one side, as in the Dog. Any other external part 
which cannot be preserved, or which is too large to 
be kept entire, should be particularly noticed. 

When the examination has proceeded thus far, 
the separation is to be begun, by opening the abdo- 
men, &c. to ascertain what internal parts are worthy 
of preservation. 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 269 

When the animal is opened for the purpose of sep- 
aration, it will be proper to take a general view of the 
viscera in their natural situation ; to ascertain the 
number of lobes of the liver ; whether there be a 
gall-bladder, &c. What be the kind of kidneys, 
whether conglobate, or conglomerate ; their situation, 
&c. Also to make such other observations upon the 
different organs as may be deemed necessary ; after 
which they may be divided, and severally distin- 
guished. 

Animals whose food is not known, should have the 
contents of the stomach examined, to ascertain, if 
possible, w^hat aliment they had last taken ; and also 
of the colon and rectum, to determine the kind of 
faeces which they may contain. 

The stomach and alimentary can^il of Fishes, and 
other marine animals, merit particular examination, 
as frequently containing not only animals and parts 
of animals which inhabit great depths, and other sit- 
uations, equally beyond the reach of ordinary endeav- 
ours ; but also singularly formed intestinal worms. 

Memoranda should be made of the localities from 
whence specimens have been obtained, whether 
sea or on land ; and the period of the year when 
taken, as material to determine the breeding season, 
&c, the vernacular names, and the meaning thereof, 
if any, in the language of the country. If there be 
no name for a specimen, a number should be at- 



270 TREATMENT OF QUADRUPEDS. 

tached to it, corresponding with that of the descrip- 
tion or memorandum respecting it. A wooden tally 
or label should be attached to each specimen, where 
several are put into the same bottle ; these are eas- 
ily made with a penknife, thus — [ i 1 1 y x x 1 1 ]/^ 
as tallies of sheet lead, parchment, leather, &c. are 
liable to be defaced or obliterated. 

Such tallies are preferable, also for dried speci- 
mens ; as those written with ink are liable to be de- 
faced, by moisture, or insects, during the voyage. 

The bottles being numbered, little trouble will 
be required to keep an account of their contents, 
which will add greatly to their value. If this be 
neglected, much confusion and uncertainty may en- 
sue. 

A description should be taken of form, colour, 
&c. while the animal be alive, or immediately after 
death, before it be put into spirit ; which frequent- 
ly produces a collapse or contraction of parts, and 
changes or destroys the colours, particularly those 
which are delicate or evanescent. 



SECTION. CXXI. 

OJ the Treatment^ and Preservation^ of Quadru- 
peds, 

The head of a Quadruped should be preserved, 
particularly on account of the teeth ; if two large, 
that part in which the teeth are placed, may be cut 
off; but this will seldom be necessary. The feet 



TREATMENT OF QUADRUPEDS. 271 

and tail may be kept attached to the skin, and dried ; 
or, if the skin be not preserved, the feet and tail 
only may be either dried, or put into spirit. 

The oesophagus, and stomach, should be preserv- 
ed in spirit, with a part of the duodenum ; and the 
coecum, if any, with a small portion of the ilium, and 
of the colon. But, if the animal be not too large, 
it will be preferable to cut off, from the mesentery^ 
the jejunum and ilium, which need not be preserved ; 
and then to strip down from the spine the contents 
of the abdomen, beginning at the diaphragm ; so 
that the stomach, liver, spleen, pancreas, colon, &c. 
with their attachments, may be taken out together, 
as low as the rectum where it lies in the pelvis, 
and, after being cleansed, put into spirit. 

The heart, and lungs, may be preserved in connec- 
tion, if not too bulky ; if so, the heart, with part of 
the large blood-vessels. ^ 

The contents of the pelvis, namely, the bladder 
and rectum, with the internal parts of generation, 
both male and female ; and the external parts not 
separated from the internal, with a large portion of 
the surrounding skin, should be preserved together 
in spirit. 

Should the female parts be in a state of impreg- 
nation, they are to be taken out, as before described, 
without opening the uterus ; or only sufficiently to 
admit the spirit for their preservation. 

Abortions should be preserved entire. The fetus, 
when found in the abdomen, may be taken out with 
the whole of the vagina, uterus, ovaria, &c. 



272 TREATMENT OF QUADRUPEDS. 

Also the young of large animals, as of the Whale, 
the Seal, the Walrus, &c. if of a small size ; but 
when of too advanced a growth, the tail or extremi- 
ties may be cut off, and the body put into spirit. 

Of very large full-grown animals, the following 
parts should be preserved : 

The eyes with a portion of the external skin, 
their muscles, and fat, in an entire mass. 

The organs of hearing. 

The beginning of the aorta, and pulmonary artery, 
for their valves. 

The mammae of the female ; with part of the sur- 
rounding skin. 

The organ of the male, taken off with part of the 
anus ; and the testes. 

The bones of animals should be preserved ; and 
if possible, be from adult, but not aged individuals ; 
the flesh being removed, the bones may be either 
boiled, or, put into a cask, and securely headed in ; 
if the time and circumstances will not allow of ma- 
ceration. 

To preserve the bones of an animal for a skele- 
ton, it is desirable that as much of the flesh should 
be removed as possible, while quite fresh ; without 
cutting, or defacing the surface of the bones : and, 
if opportunity allows, it is advisable to soak them for 
several hours in water, frequently changed, to sep- 
arate the blood ; and the brain may be broken down, 
and extracted, by means of a small flattened stick : 
otherwise the skull will be discoloured. 

The bones should be allowed to remain connect^ 
ed as much as possible, and, when dried in a tolera- 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 273 

bly straight position, they may be packed in saw- 
dust, or shavings of deal, or any other white wood, 
which will not cause discolouration. 

Besides an entire set of bones, it is desirable 
that a skull or two, shewing the teeth in various 
stages of growth, be preserved. The teeth to be 
as perfect as possible, and if any become loose or 
fall out, they may be fixed in their sockets with 
strong gum water, or glue, but never with paint or 
putty. Or the loose teeth may be tied up in a piece 
of linen, and securely attached to the skull. 

Delicate specimens of skulls, or sets of bones, 
should be inclosed in small separate boxes, to pre- 
vent their being crusheji by larger specimens ; and 
many may then be packed in one large case. 

All the parts of one animal should be kept sepa- 
rate from those of other individuals ; except where 
it is impossible to confound the parts of one animal 
with those of another. 

SECTION CXXII. 

Of Birds. 

Before proceeding to separate the parts of Birds, 
which are too large to be preserved entire, their ex- 
ternal appearances should be accurately observed. 

Birds have few internal parts of importance, for 
examination. The hearts and kidneys of all Birds 
are presumed to be similar. 

The liver, stomach, intestines, and oviduct, may 
all be taken out as low as the anus, and preserved 
in spirit. 

35 



474 eOMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

When many specimens of rare Birds are procur- 
ed, the heads of a few of them may be taken off and 
preserved in spirit, for the structure of the bill, 
tongue, and trachea ; the legs and feet should also 
be preserved. 

SECTION CXXIIL 
Of Fishes and Reptiles > 

In Fishes, regard should be had to the external 
appearances, the number of fins, their shape, and 
situation. The length, breadth, and thickness of 
the animal, and the relative distances and proportions 
of as many parts as possible should be recorded. 

In very large specimens of the Ray or Shark 
kind, the abdomen should be opened, and the speci- 
men divided below the heart, across the superior 
portion of the liver : by which means the head, 
heart, mouths of the oviducts, if a female, or testes, 
if a male, will be preserved together. The tail, if 
a thick one, as that of a Shark, may be taken oflf 
a little below the anus, and the trunk alone preserv- 
ed. If the trunk be too large the body should be 
cut through, above the pelvis, and the parts contain- 
ed in the lower portion preserved. If a female, the 
two oviducts should be detached through their 
whole length, where they pass along the abdomen 
on each side of the spine ; but kept attached to the 
pelvis in front, and the whole preserved. 

If with young, or eggs, take out the whole of the 
organs of generation, without opening them. The 



CONPARATIVE ANATOMY. 275 

fetal peculiarities in these animals should be noted : 
and the stomach and intestines should be saved if 
any thing peculiar be observable in them. If not 
of the Ray, or Shark tribe, take out such parts from 
the abdomen as are uncommon, or singular. 

The eyes of many Fishes are proper objects for 
preservation. 

Separate the heads of such Fishes as have any 
thing remarkable about the teeth or gills, and are too 
large to be preserved entire. 

If there be small examples of an interesting kind, 
keep them entire ; but still preserve such parts of 
the larger specimens as are curious. 

When Alligators, Crocodiles, Turtles, or Tortoi- 
ses, are too large to be prserved entire, some parts, 
as the head, the whole of the viscera stripped down 
from the neck to the anus, and also the anus, should 
be preserved. 

Small Lizards may be preserved entire. 

Snakes may be preserved entire, or in part, ac- 
cording to their size. The heads both of poisonous 
and innocuous Serpents should be preserved entire in 
spirit, for the examination of their teeth and fangs. 

In regard to Serpents, there is one circumstance 
with which it is particularly necessary for the Collec- 
tor to be acquainted : that of being able to distin- 
guish with certainty between those which are veno- 
mous, and those which are not so. 

Innocuous Serpents have four rows of teeth on the 
upper part of the mouth, viz. one row on each side, 
immediately within the lip, usually denominated the 
labial teeth ; and two shorter rows situate on the pal- 
ate, termed the palatal teeth. In small specimens it 



276 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

may be necessary to pass a pin along the mouth from 
behind forwards, to detect them. The head is gen- 
erally long and slender, differing little from the size 
of the neck ; and the scales on the head much lar- 
ger than those on the body. 

Whereas, in venomous serpents, the labial, or out- 
er rows of teeth, do not exist ; the two palatal rows 
only are present : but towards the anterior part of 
the upper jaw on each side, just beneath the situation 
of the eye, are placed the poison-fangs, which are 
considerably larger and longer than the ordinary 
teeth, and moveable at their base, so as to fold back 
like the blade of a penknife. The form of the head 
is generally short, flat, and broad ; and the scales on 
the head much smaller than those on the body. 

There are, however, two exceptions to the fore- 
going characteristic marks of innocuous Serpents, 
viz. — the Cobra de Capello, Coluber JYaja^ Lm. 
which, although poisonous, has large scales on the 
crown of the head : — and the Bimgarum Pamah of 
Dr. Patrick Russell, also poisonous, which has, 
on each side, three labial teeth of a very small size. 

On the contrary, the Boa Constrictor, although 
innocuous, has small scales on the crown of the head ; 
which, in every other known instance, is confined 
to venomous Serpents. 

SECTION CXXIV. 

Of Crustacea and Insects, 

Lobsters, Crabs, Beetles, Flies, Butterflies, &c. 
may be dried, because their external covering is their 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 277 

hardest part, and alters little by shrinking. This 
is to be done when the external form only is required 
for examination ; or when the object is too minute 
to admit of other investigation. 

In preparing them by drying, great care is to be 
taken to preserve all their external parts as perfect, 
and as expressive of progressive action, as possible. 

Lobsters, Crabs, and Crawfish, when dried, should 
be wrapped in soft paper, and packed in cotton, so 
as not to allow them any motion in the case, nor to 
touch one another. 

Beetles, Butterflies, Moths, &c, should be pinned 
down upon a board, or piece of cork ; or upon wax 
which has been melted, and poured along the bottom 
of a flat box : the pins should be greased or oiled to 
prevent the juices of the animal from drying round 
them, and producing rust, which would render them 
difficult to be removed from the insect. If the pins 
were pointed at both ends, they would more readily 
admit of the specimen being turned. 

The specimen should be so securely fixed as to 
allow of the motion of the box in all directions ; and 
the fastening should be in proportion to the weight 
of the specimen. 

When preserved for anatomical investigation. 
Lobsters, Crawfish, Crabs, Beetles, &c. may be put 
into a bottle together in spirit ; or if each class be 
kept separate, several examples may be packed to- 
gether. 

Butterflies, Moths, and their Larvae, &c. should be 
kept by themselves ; for, if put into the same bottle 
with the above, they would be injured. 



278 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

SECTION CXXV. 
Of Eggs. 

To preserve the eggs of Birds with their nests, 
each nest should be put into a round box, just large 
enough to contain it. After having made a small 
perforation at each end of the eggs, and expelled 
their contents, some cotton should be laid upon them, 
to keep them from moving, and the whole should be 
covered with the lid. 

Large eggs, as those of the Ostrich or Emeu, when 
near hatching, should be preserved in spirit, on ac- 
count of the peculiarities of the foetus of this class of 
animals. 

The eggs of Turtles, Lizards, Crocodiles, Snakes, 
&c. when incubating, should also be preserved in 
spirit, for the peculiarities of the foetus : likewise 
the eggs of all sorts of insects, on the same account. 

A small perforation should be made at each end of 
the egg, by which the spirit will have access to the 
inside, and the contents be more certainly preserved. 

SECTION CXXVI. 

Various observations on the means of preserving 
different Animals. 

An animal of the firmest kind, in a temperate cli- 
mate, may generally be preserved by a quantity of 
proof spirit equal to its own weight. 

Animals which are termed firm, are those of the 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 279 

quadruped kind, as Rats, Mice, &c. and indeed 
Snakes, Lizards, and all land insects, so far as re- 
spects the quantity of spirit, may be considered in 
the same class. 

Some of the soft Fishes, however, may perhaps 
require rather more spirit than their own weight : 
yet there are many Fishes which will admit of being 
referred to the first distinction. 

Soft animals, as the marine ones generally, require 
rectified spirit in nearly the same proportion as the 
above : but these are relative circumstances, which 
will vary according to the climate, and the state of the 
animal at the time. If the climate be very hot, or if 
a considerable time shall elapse before they are trans- 
mitted to this country, more spirit will be required. 

The watery, or pulpy kind, such as Sepise, Me- 
dusae, Echini, Asterise, &c. from their internal struc- 
ture being extremely tender, require rectified spirit. 

The proportion of spirit should be particularly at- 
tended to, when parts are large ; for a small animal, 
or part, generally obtains more than what is here di- 
rected, while a large one has less. 

If the animal be small, it may be preserved by im- 
mersing it in its own weight of spirit ; but some spi- 
rit thrown into the abdomen, will further tend to its 
preservation. 

If the animal be large, the thorax and abdomen 
should be filled with spirit ; otherwise, before the 
spirit can penetrate through the skin, the internal 
parts will become putrid. A trochar, or syringe, will 
answer for filling both cavities. Large fishes should 
be treated in the same way. 



280 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

In the Molluscse, the spirit will generally penetrate 
sufficiently fast, to prevent putrefaction. 

Small animals, preserved for their external figure, 
should be suspended, or placed in the attitudes in 
which they are designed to be ultimately preserved. 

Animals which are preserved merely for dissection, 
may be put into a bottle or cask, without suspension ; 
and even more than one or two in the same vessel ; 
paying strict attention to the strength and proportion 
of the spirit. 

If it be intended that two or more should be put 
into the same cask, they should, however, be kept 
separate for some time ; otherwise, they would make 
too large a mass for the spirit to penetrate sufficiently 
to prevent putrefaction. 

More than one or two may be put into the same 
vessel, if suspended, as then they cannot press on 
one another ; or they may be put into small wooden 
boxes, which have been put together with wooden 
pegs instead of nails, having holes bored in the sides 
to admit the spirit, and prevent the specimens injur- 
ing each other, by coming in contact : in this manner 
several may be sent in the same cask, or jar. 

According to the proposed proportion of animal 
and spirit, a vessel may be half filled with the for- 
mer. 

Birds are seldom too large to be kept in spirit, in 
which they should be suspended with care, for the 
preservation of external appearances. Several may 
be put into one vessel, but they must not be pressed 
upon one another. 

The mouth of the vessel should be wide enough to 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 281 

let them pass against the direction of the feathers. 
This precaution is also necessary for the preserva- 
tion of the extremities of Crustacea, Insects, and Rep- 
tiles. 

If the Bird were put into a proper position, the 
feathers being laid smooth, and rolled up in fine 
linen, the external form might be still better pre- 
served. 

If a pipe were put into the mouth of the Bird, and 
spirit thrown down the trachea, it would pass through 
nearly the whole body by means of the air cells. 
Some spirit might, also, be injected by the anus ; 
and into the abdomen, by a small aperture made for 
that purpose. 

Animals of a soft or pulpy texture should be kept 
separate from those which are hard, more especially 
if preserved on account of their external figure ; and 
should not be crowded. If possible, they should be 
suspended : those not firm enough to support their 
own weight upon threads, should be put into different 
bottles. 

Shell-fish may be put into a vessel in any manner, 
as the shell preserves them from pressure ; but if they 
died protruding from the shell, they should be sus- 
pended in the spirit. If of the spiral kind, a small 
piece of the shell should be broken off at the apex to 
allow the spirit to enter that end of the shell ; other- 
wise, from the body of the animal filling the mouth 
of the shell, that extremity of the animal would be- 
come putrid before the spirit could penetrate to it. 

Snakes should have some spirit injected by the 
mouth and anus, as they otherwise soon become pu- 
36 



282 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 

trescent, and lose the cuticle about the abdomen : 
they may then be coiled up in close spiral turns 
round the inside of the vessel. 

Lizards may be suspended by the head. 

Of those which are very long, the tail may be bent 
upon the body, or rolled in spiral turns on the inside 
of the vessel. 

Echini with the spines should be wrapped in cot- 
ton, and either put into a wide-mouthed bottle, or 
into a round box with holes in it, so as not to touch 
nor press upon the sides ; the bottle being then filled 
with, or the box inmiersed in, spirit. 

For the suspension in a barrel, animals may be 
fixed to cords stretched across its mouth ; the top 
should then be put in, and the spirit afterwards ad- 
ded. 

Animals, or parts, which are put into spirit, should 
have it changed, at the expiration of a fortnight ; as 
the first spirit will be considerable lowered in strength, 
and discoloured : for although it will have penetrated 
the substance, and checked putrefaction, it will not 
remain of sufficient strength to continue the preser- 
vation of the part : the time, however, will vary 
according to circumstances. If in a hot climate, the 
spirit may require to be changed sooner ; if in a 
cold one, later ; if the part be soft, or gelatinous, it 
will also call for earlier attention than if hard or firm. 

Another advantage arising from spirit sufficiently 
strong is, its own preservation ; for when much di- 
luted, and combined with the animal juices, it will 
acquire an acid quality, by which the bones will be 
softened, and rendered unfit for a skeleton. 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 283 

The glass or jar containing any article in spirit, 
may first be stopped with cork ; over this shonld be 
extended a piece of moistened bladder, or of the 
recent skin of an animal ; the whole of which, when 
dry, may be coated with resin or wax ; but neither re- 
sin nor wax should be used to seal the surface of the 
cork itself; for when that is done, the spirit pene- 
trates and dissolves the cement, and thus forms a 
varnish which mixes with the spirit, and adheres to 
the specimen contained in it. 

If the glass vessels with sufficientlj^ large mouths 
cannot be procured, glazed earthen jars will answer 
the purpose ; and, to prevent evaporation, they may 
have externally two or three coats of paint, wax, or 
pitch, and be packed in tow, cotton, or other soft 
material, to prevent its being rubbed off. 

Glass, or glazed earthen jars, are preferable to 
casks ; being less liable to discolour the spirit, and 
thereby injure the specimens, especially those whose 
size will admit of being preserved in this manner : 
but if casks are employed, those made of white 
wood are preferable. 

Where barrels were not to be procured, well made 
boxes, with white lead introduced into all the joints, 
have been found to be an efficient substitute. 

In preparing to tie over bottles for packing, it is 
necessary that the bladders should be soaked in wa- 
ter for two or three days, or longer if practicable, as 
they will then adhere more firmly to the neck. 

In lieu of corks, sheet lead may be placed be- 
tween the first and second bladders. That procur- 



284 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY, 

ed from tea-chests will de sufficiently strong to pre- 
vent evaporation for a year or two. 

Where spirit cannot be procured, a atrong solu- 
tion of bay-salt, changed as is before directed with 
regard to spirit, will preserve specimens for a con- 
siderable time. 

All marine productions, intended to be preserved 
in a dried state, should be soaked in fresh water, 
which must be changed several times ; and the spec- 
imens must, afterwards, be thoroughly dried before 
they are packed, otherwise they will continue 
moist, and become rotten. 

To prevent insects, or other dried specimens from 
being injured, or destroyed by living insects, they 
should occasionally be touched with pure oil of tur- 
pentine, when it can be employed without injuring 
the specimens. When that cannot be done, the in- 
side of the box may be occasionally moistened with 
it, or with oil of petroleum. These are more effec- 
tual preservatives than camphor. Tallow, inclosed 
in a piece of muslin within the box, will frequently 
prevent the attacks of insects. 

Animals which are dried, should be so packed as 
to allow of being aired occasionally; and, if becoming 
mouldy, should be washed with spirit, and thorough- 
ly dried before they are re-packed. 

SECTION CXXVII. 

Of Extraneous Fossils. 

It is judged proper to add a few Observations on 
Extraneous Fossils ; to display the agencies of Na- 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 285 

ture and their effects, in all the modes of animal ex- 
istence ; and, also, as manifested by very interesting 
parts of Mr. Hunter's collection, through all the 
changes of which animal bodies are susceptible. 

By extraneous fossils are to be understood, animal 
and vegetable substances, which, from long residence 
in the earth, have acquired fossil characters. 

The fossilized remains of large animals, which, of 
late years have engaged the attention of Naturalists, 
have been discovered, chiefly, in parts contiguous to 
the sea, rivers, or lakes ; although sometimes in ele- 
vated situations, remote from water. 

The changes which occur under ground, are ge- 
nerally destructive of all the distinguishing parts of 
an animal, except bone ; whenever, therefore, any 
soft part, so termed, with its distinctive characters 
preserved, is found, it is to be treated with the utmost 
care. 

It should be exposed as little as possible to the 
air ; and in packing should be guarded from attrition, 
first by the softest paper, then by more resisting ma- 
terials, as cotton, tow, horse-hair, sponge, &c. 

The parts more especially to be preserved for an- 
atomical inquiry, on any occasion, may be understood 
from the foregoing directions, respecting the organs 
of various creatures : but it is so difficult to obtain 
the whole, even of the bones, of a fossilized animal, 
that every part, in whatever state, may be consider- 
ed as worthy of preservation. 

With a view to the knowledge of the structure 
and economy of an animal of a tribe extinct, of 
doubtful existence, or of rare occurrence, it is desir- 



286 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 

able that every particular relating to the situation 
in which it is found, should accompany its bones, 
skin, or other fragments. 

Upon the discovery, therefore, of an extraneous 
fossil, every circumstance which can tend to explain 
the race of the creature to which it belonged; its 
primary situation ; mode of subsistence, and of pro- 
pagation ; its instruments of locomotion, defence, 
&c. ought to be noted. 

Also portions of the stratum from the spot in 
which the fossil lay, and from parts several yards 
surrounding it, should be collected for analyses. 

The following proposed heads of columns would 
probably be favourable to inquiry on the subject, and 
to perspecuity in the arrangement of facts. 

Place where found — distance from sea, river, or 
lake — degree of elevation — latitude, and climate-— 
distance from forest, or plain— indigenous trees, and 
plants — native animals — depth from surface — strata, 
to the part where found — stratum in which discover- 
ed- — position or situation in which imbedded— rrelics 
of extraneous fossils observed with it — other dis- 
coveries of extraneous fossils in the same place or 
its vicinity — miscellaneous remarks. 

The name of the place, the depth, and the kind of 
matrix in which an extraneous fossil is found, are 
the principal points necessary to be determined : but 
it is hoped that the College will not be deprived of 
any extraneous fossil, because, at the time of its 
discovery, other particulars were not ascertained, or 
not recorded. 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 287 

SECTION CXXVIII. 

J^atural Skeletons oj Fish^ Quadrupeds^ Birds^ ^c. 

Proceed in the same manner as directed for mak- 
ing a natural human skeleton. 

Mice, small birds, &c. may be put into a box of 
proper size, in which holes are bored on all sides, 
and then buried in an ant hill, where all except the 
bones and connecting ligaments, will in a week or 
two, be entirely removed by the ants. Maceration 
in clean water will afterwards be necessary, to ex- 
tract the bloody colour, when they may be bleached 
by lime or alum water, and dried in frames. In 
country places, they may be more speedily dissect- 
ed by being placed near a w^asp's nest, or in an emp- 
ty sugar cask, where they resort. Small fish may be 
put in a vessel of clean water in which a large num- 
ber of tadpoles are placed, which will soon consume 
every particle of soft matter. The water should be 
changed often. I have not tried the same experi- 
ment with small birds and quadrupeds, but have no 
doubt that it would prove successful. 



288 



CHAPTER XII. 

EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES. 



PLATE I. 



Respecting the Brass Syringe^ tvith its several 
•Appendages, for injecting with Coloured Fluids. 

Fig, 1, The syringe complete, consisting of sev- 
eral parts, supposed to be properly joined and fitted 
for use, viz. 

A. The barrel. 

B. The piston. 

C. The head of the syringe, which screws on to 
the top of the barrel 

D. The bottom of the syringe, which screws on to 
the bottom of the barrel, in like manner with the 
head. 

E. The point of the syringe, which screws into the 
bottom ; this is a tube, to which the bore of all the 
pipes are adapted, and in the act of Injecting, it is 
introduced into the pipe. 

Fig. 2. The piston of the syringe, taken out of the 
barrel, to shew its several parts, viz. 

F. The handle. 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 289 

G. The rod. 

H. The bottom, consisting of three blocks, united 
to the rod by a screw. 

I. The uppermost block with a plain edge. 

K. The middle block has a grooved edge, is of a 
larger diameter than the other two, and is adapted to 
the bore of the barrel of the syringe ; its groove is for 
the purpose of retaining oil, as a reservoir to pre- 
serve the free motion of the piston. 

L. The lowest block, similar to the uppermost, and 
of the same diameter, having in its lower surface two 
small holes, to receive the steel pins in the key, for 
the purpose of screwing it on or off the rod. The 
uppermost and lowest blocks are less in diameter, to 
allow room for the two valves. 

Fig, 3. Represents the bottom of the piston with 
the valves, which are made of circular pieces of soft 
wash-leather, dipped in olive oil, with a hole in the 
centre, through which passes the end of the rod. The 
manner of fixing which is as follows :— First, screw 
on the uppermost block on the rod, as far as it will 
go ; then put on one of the leather valves, consisting 
of one or more pieces of leather, as the bore of the 
syringe may [require ; then screw on the middle block, 
after which introduce the piston at the top of the open 
barrel of the syringe, with the edges of the valves 
turned towards the handle ; then force the piston to 
the bottom, which, being also open, gives an oppor- 
tunity to put on the lower valve, which is to be con- 
fined in its situation by firmly screwing on the lower- 
37 



290 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 

most block by means of the key ; the edges of this 
valve should not be left longer than necessary, as it 
will prevent the lower block of the piston from going 
completely down upon the bottom of the syringe, 
which would be a means of retaining some of the 
Injection, and thereby mixing the different colours. 
Being thus fixed, draw the piston upward, by which 
the edges of the lower valve will be turned down- 
ward; then screw on the bottom and top of the 
syringe very closely by means of the key ; and after 
moving the piston a few times up and down in the 
barrel, try the accuracy of the valves in the following 
way : — first, hold the bottom of the syringe with the 
left hand, and stop the point with the fore finger, to 
prevent the admission of air ; then with the right hand 
draw the piston up to the top, and suddenly let go the 
handle, when the external air should press the piston 
completely to the bottom ; this is a sufficient proof that 
the upper valve is air-tight ; then fill the syringe with 
air by drawing the piston to the top, while the point is 
open for its admission ; place the finger on the point 
to prevent its escape, and forcibly depress the piston ; 
then suddenly taking off the hand, the elasticity of the 
compresed air should raise it to the top, making some 
little allowance for the resistance which may arise 
from the friction of the piston in the barrel : this is 
a proof that the lower valve is sufficiently air-tight^ 
and the instrument fit for use. 

Fig' 4. The brass key, which is made of consider- 
able thickness to give it strength ; it has a square 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES- 291 

notch in each end, the larger of which is adapted to 
to receive the square block on the top, and bottom 
of the syringe (MM). — The smaller notch is intend- 
ed to receive the smaller block in the bottom of 
the syringe (N) — This key answers the purpose of 
a winch, by which we may easily apply what force is 
necessary to turn the screws. At the extremities 
of the smaller end of the key, are two steel pins ; 
these are adapted to two holes in the bottom of the 
lower block of the piston, into which they are placed, 
for the more readily screwing it on or off in altering 
and repairing the valves. 

Fig* 5. A cock, for the purpose of retaining in the 
blood-vessels, the Injection they have received, whilst 
the syringe is removed, in case of injecting a large 
subject, where several syringes full will be required ; 
the smaller and lower extremity (O) is inserted into 
the top of the injecting pipe when fixed in the 
vessel, represented in^^. 11, and for the purpose of 
throwing in the Injection, the point of the syringe is 
to be introduced into the upper end of the tube of the 
cock (P), and when the syringe is discharged of its 
contents, turn the handle (Q) in a transverse direc- 
tion to the tube, which will prevent the escape of the 
injected fluid, until the syringe is filled and introduc- 
ed at the top as before ; then turn the handle again, 
and repeat the Injection as often as may be requisite. 
The plug is fastened in its situation by means of a 
screw (R), for the purpose of taking it apart at any 
time, if found necessary, to clean or oil it. 



292 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 

Fig^ 6. An injecting pipe of the largest size, iu 
proportion to the size of the syringe. 

S. The finger piece. 

T. The barrel. 

V. The point. 

These pipes should always be made of one solid 
piece of brass, and the finger piece not soldered on 
to the barrel, as they will be liable to separate when 
the heat of the fire is applied to melt out the Injec- 
tion, which, though it may be done in a hurry, yet 
should not be made a constant practice of; boiUng 
them in water is a much more agreeable, and less 
destructive method of cleaning them. Near the ex- 
tremity of the point is a small shoulder, to prevent 
its slipping out of the vessel when the ligature is ap- 
plied. 

Fig, 7. The smallest sized injecting pipe, with the 
barrel above the finger piece : this is the mode in 
which the small pipes are frequently made, but I do 
not know any peculiar advantage in it. 

Fig. 8. A large sized curved pipe, commonly call- 
ed Aorta-pipe, being principally used for injecting 
the entire subject, where it is introduced into the 
Aorta ascendens through an incision in the left ven- 
tricle of the heart. The advantage of its curvature is, 
that the extremity of the pipe pointing horizontally or 
laterally, it admits of a favourable position to intro- 
duce the point of the syringe^ 

Fig. 9. A double injecting curved pipe. The ad- 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 293 

vantage of having two points, is in order to inject two 
vessels running near each other, at the same time, 
with the same coloured Injection, but they are seldom 
used except for injecting the head by the two carotid 
arteries, and the two jugulars ; but, for the arteries, 
the points should be made smaller than is represented 
in the plate. 

Fig' 10. A long curved pipe, for the purpose of 
injecting vessels, the orifices of which are out of the 
reach of the common pipes, as is the case with the 
coronary arteries and veins of the heart, where we 
have to convey the point of the pipe, a considera- 
ble distance through a larger vessel, to the vessel 
we wish to inject ; and, as it is more particularly in- 
tended for this preparation, may be called the coro- 
nary pipe. 

Fig' 11. Represents a pipe fixed in the vein of an 
umbilical chord, to shew the manner in which the 
ligature is applied to prevent the escape of the Injec- 
tion, and secure the pipe in its situation ; if the liga- 
ture is not brought over the finger-piece of the pipe 
before the second fastening is made, as here repre- 
sented, it will generally slip out of the vessel. 

Fig' 12. A brass blow pipe, sometimes used to in- 
flate the vessels in order to find their orifices, which 
is frequently attended with difficulty from their lying 
perfectly collapsed among cellular membrane ; it 
will often be found useful to inflate the vessels of de- 
tached parts of Anatomy, to discover and secure any 



294 EXPLA]SrATIO]>f OF PLATES. 

outlets where the Injection might otherwise escape ; 
but these outlets will be more easily discovered if in- 
flated under water, than any other way : the end of 
the pipe which is applied to the mouth should be sil- 
vered, to prevent any unpleasant brassy taste. 



EXPLANATION OF PLATE IL 

Reprcsenthig the Lijecting Tube, and its *^ppendages, 
for the Purpose of filling the Lymphatics, Lacteals, 
^c. tviih Quicksilver, 

Fig, 1. A. The glass tube fixed in its steel <JOck ; 
the tube here represented is seven inches in length ; 
but for different purposes, they are made from five to 
twenty inches ; some vessels requiring a much high- 
er column of quicksilver than others. 

B. The cock, for the advantage of retaining or dis- 
charging the quicksilver at pleasure, by turning the 
handle of the plug C. in a transverse or longitudinal 
direction. 

C. A screw at the bottom of the cock, adapted to 
the socket of the pipes ; the screw is to fix the pipes 
with greater security to the cock, than the common 
method, which is only upon the principle of a plug. 

D. A leather collar at the top of the screw, w'hich 
is pressed by the socket of the pipe, to prevent more 
effectually an escape of the quicksilver between the 
threads of the screw. 

F. The plug of the cock taken out ; this, by its 
tapering, always fits close, and works smoothly in the 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 295 

cock. In the middle of the plug is a perforation, in 
the direction of its handle, through which the quick- 
silver passes, when it is turned in the direction of the 
tube. 

G. A leather collar, which is placed round the 
small end of the plug, after it is introduced into the 
cock. 

H. A steel collar, which receives the square end 
of the plug, after the leather one. 

I. The plug screw, which is screwed into the small 
end of the plug : this confines the plug in the cock, 
by preventing the collars from slipping off; and the 
head of the screw pressing on the steel collar, that 
presses the leather one between it and the side of the 
cock, the leather, by its softness and elasticity, causes 
the plug to move smoothly. 

Fig. 2. The curved pipe, which screws on to the 
end of the cock D, in order for use, which screw is 
adapted to the socket of the pipe K. 

L. L. The cross pins, for the purpose of passing 
the ligature round, to prevent the pipe from slipping 
out of the vessel, when introduced. 

The advantage of its curvature is, to fill, with the 
greater facility, vessels lying horizontally, as on the 
surface of a table, whilst the tube is kept in a perpen- 
dicular direction. 

Fig, 3. A pipe which only differs from the above 
in its being straight ; this is intended for filling ves- 
sels in a perpendicular direction, particularly when 
the tube is to be suspended in the injecting Tray, 



296 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 

with the preparation under water, for a considerable 
length of time, (see Plate III.) 

Fig. 4. A slender piece of steel, called the clearer, 
or poker ; it has its upper part flat, to answer the 
purpose of a handle ; its use is to clear the pipes of 
any thing which may obstruct the passage of the 
quicksilver ; this is done by passing the point through 
the socket of the pipe to its extremity, or as far as it 
will go, and moving it backward and forward several 
times. — From its elasticity, it will answer equally well 
for the curved, as for the straight pipe. 

Fig. 5. Represents a curved pipe fixed in a blood 
vessel, and secured by a ligature, for the purpose of 
filling it with quicksilver. 

M. The first knot made with the ligature, passed 
round the vessel, below the orifice, by means of a 
needle, for the purpose of compressing it equally on 
all sides of the pipe, to prevent the escape of the 
quicksilver. 

N. The second knot made with the ligature, after 
it has been turned over the cross-pins, to prevent the 
pipe slipping out of the vessel. 

O. The orifice of a vessel, divided in removing 
the part from the body, with the quicksilver escaping 
in globules ; under which is a small ligature passed, 
by means of a needle, in order to close the out-let by 
a knot ; this shews the manner of securing the quick- 
silver in the vessels during the process of injecting, 
or before the Injection commences. 

Every part of the cock, pipes, and clearer, must 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 297 

be made of steel, as any other metal would be amal- 
gamated by the solvent property of the quicksilver. 
Care should be taken always to wipe over the metal- 
lic parts with an oily cloth, after each time of using 
this instrument, or they will otherwise soon be de* 
stroyed by rust. 

Fig. 6. Is the quicksilver tube, used by Mascagni, 
and consists of a glass tube three or four lines in di- 
ameter and a foot in length, and is bent to a right an- 
gle near one end and drawn out to a fine capillary 
tube, by means of a lamp and blow pipe. Every 
anatomist may soon acquire the art of doing this with 
faciUty. 

Fig» 7. Is DumeriPs tube ; this is straight like the 
perpendicular part of Mascagni's tube ; its lower end 
is slightly everted in the form of a lip ; on which is 
tied a gum elastic tube, two inches long, and the 
outer end of this flexible tube is tied in like manner 
over a short capillary tube, corresponding with the 
horizontal piece of Mascagni's tube. 

Fig, 8. T» the horizontal tube. 

The advantages of Dumeril's improvement are, that 
the flexible tube can be pressed between the fingers 
of one hand and the column of mercury, thus regu- 
lating it, whilst the other hand is employed in direct- 
ing the pipe, and that the small tubes 6an be obtain- 
ed in a large number from the glass blowers, with 
one large tube to answer for all, a consideration of 
38 



298 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 

some importance on account of the capillary part be^ 
ing so easily and so often broken. 

The glass tubes are preferred to Walter's steel 
tubes, by those who have made trial of both kinds. 

EXPLANATION OF PLATE III. 

Representing the Injecting Tray and its Jlppendages^ 
for the purpose of facilitating the Process of Quick- 
silver Injections^ and preventifig the Loss of Quick- 
silver ^ which is constantly sustained in the Old Me- 
thod. 

A. The Tray ; this should be made of boards^ 
about three quarters of an inch in thickness, and of 
such wood as will be the least likely to warp ; which 
will be more effectually prevented by the several parts 
being joined together with screws ; and by painting 
it three or four times over, it will prevent the wood 
absorbing the water, and more effectually secure it 
from warping : every joint should be made perfect- 
ly water-tight, and the inside painted black ; as this 
is much more favourable for seeing the fine parts of 
white membranes laying upon it, and the quicksilver 
flowing through the minute ramifications of their ves- 
sels. The machine being made in this form, is intend- 
ed to be occasionally filled with water, for the pur- 
pose of injecting broad and flat parts, which require 
to be so managed as to prevent their drying, and to 
which the common jar represented in the plate, is 
not adapted, as placentse, large portions of mesentery 
and intestine, female breasts, &c. 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES- 299 

B. An iron pipe, for the purpose of drawing off the 
water and quicksilver, remaining in the tray after the 
Injection is finished ; it is made of iron, that it may 
not be affected by the quicksilver. It needs no other 
stopper than a common cork. 

C C. The right and left sides of the tray, cut down 
to form a rest for the arms, whilst the hands are em- 
ployed upon a preparation at the bottom of it. The 
front D. is also made considerably lower than the 
sides, for the more convenient management of the 
preparation. The bottom of this tray should be 
about twenty inches square ; the front about three 
inches high, and the sides four and a half : the clear 
dimensions on the inside are here meant. 

E. A ledge in one corner, for the convenience of 
fixing the bottle containing the quicksilver : it has a 
hole sufficientl}^ large to receive the bottle, which is 
let through, and stands on the bottom of the tray, to 
preserve it from any accident, which it is very lia- 
ble to from its weight. 

F F. Two uprights ; the foot of each fixes in two 
square staples, within the right and left sides of the 
tray, and ought to be about twenty-four inches high. 

G. The cross-bar ; the ends of which slide up or 
down in the mortise of the uprights, and are fixed 
to any height, by means of pins passing through them, 
and the ends of the cross-bar, to keep them steadily 
fixed to each other. In the lower edge of tliis is fix- 
ed several small hooks, from which may be suspend- 
ed one or more injecting tubes, as represented in the 
plate. 

H. Is a glass jar containing vvater, in which is im- 



300 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 

mersed a hand ; with the quicksilver injecting pipe 
fixed in the artery, as in the process of filling the 
vessels. The hand is suspended by a string from 
the edge of the jar. 



EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV. 

•^ Representation of several Moulds in Plaster of Pa- 
ris, to illustrate the Method of constructing them 
on hard and inflexible Substances. 

Fig, 1. Represents the mould of a human calcu- 
lus, made in three equal parts, and is of the most 
simple construction that a mould can be made, to be 
certain of delivering the cast without difficulty, or 
hazard of breaking, where the pattern or original is 
to be completely enclosed, in order to copy every 
part of its surface. The several parts which com- 
pose the mould, shew also the proportionate thick- 
ness it will require, to give it proper strength. 

AAA. The internal concave surfaces, which were 
in immediate contact with the calculus, in the for- 
mation of the mould, and receive an exact impres- 
sion'from its surface, whilst the plaster is in its fluid 
state. 

'' BBB. Are three holes bored in one edge of the 
first formed piece, with the point of a knife, after the 
edge had been cut smooth ; these holes are filled 
with the fluid plaster in forming the second piece, 
which, when hardened, become the projecting joints, 
marked C C C These points are intended, by en- 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 301 

tering the corresponding holes, to keep the edges of 
the mould steadily fixed to each other. In like man- 
ner the holes D D D D receive the points E E E E, 
as also those marked F F F receive the points G G G, 
for the same purpose. When the three parts are 
properly joined, they form a complete oval cavity. 
At the upper end of each portion of the mould, is a 
notch III, which when the parts are joined, form a 
circular aperture, expanded toward the outer sur- 
face ; through this the fluid plaster is to be poured 
in, in order to make the cast ; but before this is at- 
tempted, the several parts of the mould should be 
securely bound together with a cord ; without which 
they would be liable to separate, and suffer the plas- 
ter to escape. 

Fig. 2. A representation or longitudinal section of 
a mould of a diseased femur, to shew the manner in 
which the different parts are joined. 

A A. The diseased femur of an irregular figure. 

B B B B B B. Are the several outside pieces, 
which enclose the bone. 

C C. Are two inside pieces to fill up those hollow 
parts which would otherwise prevent the mould from 
coming off from the bone without breaking ; they 
are connected to the outside pieces by the loop and 
string, the principle of which is better explained in 
Fig. 3. 

D D D D D D D. The several transverse joints 
of the mould, so formed as to admit every piece to 
separate easily from the bone and model, afterwards 
to be cast in it. Those joints are to be made upon 



302 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 

the most prominent parts of the original or pattern. 
The break or angle in the middle of each joint, repre- 
sents the holes and points, to keep the several pieces 
of the mould steadily fixed to each other, described 
in Fig. 1. 

E. A circular aperture where the fluid plaster is to 
be poured into the mould ; this is always to be formed 
in one of the joinings ; so that the projecting piece 
of plaster in the aperture may deliver from the 
mould without breaking, and should be made oppo- 
site to some plain projecting part of the original, 
which may be easily smoothed over with a knife^ 
when the superfluous piece is removed from the cast. 

Fig. 3. Represents an imaginary section of a 
mould, to illustrate the form and use of internal pieces, 
when the pattern or cast will not otherwise deliver. 

AAA. The original or pattern. 

B B B. The outer part of the mould. 

C. An internal piece, which fills \\^ a deep hol- 
low, running in an oblique direction ; on which ac- 
count had it not been filled by a separate piece, would, 
most probably, be broken off' in removing the mould, 
as it will only deliver in a direction corresponding to 
its obliquity. In the upper part of this piece is fixed 
a brass wire, with its points separated, and incurvat- 
ed, in order to give it a securer hold ; the loop pro- 
jects above the surface, and is to be surrounded with 
Glaziers' putty, to prevent the plaster taking hold of 
it in making the outer piece. 

D. D. The upper surface of the internal piece. 

E. E. Are two lines which describe a vacant space 
round the wire loop, and a hole bored through the 



EXPLANATION OF PLATES, 303 

outside piece, for the passage of the cord, which is 
passed through the loop, and brought to the outer sur- 
face of the mould, over a short piece of stick, and se- 
cured by a knot, F ; when, by twisting the cord, the 
internal piece is properly secured to the external, 
during the act of casting the model ; when the plas- 
ter is hardened, and the mould is to be removed, the 
cord must be relaxed by untwisting, the knot untied, 
and the stick removed ; this will leave the outer piece 
at liberty to be removed with facility, and afterwards 
the inner piece. The loop and cord afford a conve- 
nient hold to withdraw the piece. 

G, H, I. Are three internal pieces, which are some- 
times necessary to be formed in this way, when the 
cavity to be filled extends in two opposite directions, 
or is of greater diameter within than at its entrance ; 
the two pieces G and H, have the wire loop before 
described ; the cords fixed to these pass through two 
holes in the middle piece I, obliquely, toward the 
centre of its upper surface, where they meet, and are 
conveyed together to the outside of the mould, and 
fastened with a stick as before described. The piece 
marked I, answers as a key -piece to the other two, 
which being first removed (after the external part) 
gives room for the other two to be drawn out. 

K K K K K K. Are very small holes and points, 
to keep the several pieces steadily fixed in the pro- 
per situations, as described in Fig. I. 



ERRATA. 

Page 28, line 9, for only, read or by. 

" 31, " 18,{or conjunctira read conjunctiva. 

" 23, for dura mater jugulars read dura muter and jugulars. 
" 34, " 20, for subclavian axillary, read subclavian or aodllary. 
" 36, " 1\, for inspecting, read injecting. 
" 44, " ] 4, for formula, read, formxd(e. 
" 46, " 7, for and a vein, read, and veins. 
" 49, " 6, for revales, read renales. 
" 53, " 15, for withpresect to, read toi/A respect to. 
" 65, " 8, for they will, read it loill. 

" 81, " 3, for i/ie vessels more superjicial, read vessels are m<»'e. 
" 6, for tyger''s has and order of, read ^as an order of. 
" 106, " 22, for ou«n^, read ovana. 
" 127, " 19, for and, read are. 

" 21, form the adep fossa, read in the deep fossa. 
" 137, last line but one, for carefully cutting, read carefidly shutting. 
" 141, line L4, for larbce, read larv(B. 
" 145, lines 18 & 19, for scapulas, S^jibuloi, read scapula ^fibtda. 



Ma. 4. 




Fia.l?. 



Z7Utrave.d by I/ia^^r. 



BS 




Fia. 1. 




Zru/rawd oj- JM^'iaer. 



APPENDIX, 



No. 1. — 'Injecting a fmtus to shew the course of its 
circulation in utero,^ 

This is a preparation which requires no great in- 
genuity, though in making it, the most dexterous 
Anatomists frequently fail of success, owing chiefly 
to coagula obstructing the vessels. For this purpose, 
we can only make choice of such children as are 
dead born, or died soon after birth ; the former are 
to be preferred : for in these the lungs having never 
been called into action, the pulmonary arteries are 
not so dilated and pervious ; for which reason the 
Injection will probably pass with greater freedom 
through the Ductus Arteriosus* and Foramen Ovale. f 

In order to proceed with the Injection, carefully 
dissect the vein from the arteries in the umbilical 
cord, which should be preserved three or four 
inches in length from the abdomen, and not suftered 



* Ductus Arteriosus is a canal passing from the pulmonary artery to the aor- 
ta, and becomes obliterated soon after birth. 

I Foramen Ovale is an opening from the right auricle to the left, which becomes 
closed after the birth of the child. 

39 ^E% 



308 APPENDIX. 

ed a pipe into each artery, frequently separated to a 
considerable distance by the interposition of the vein, 
which in this case I have not regarded puncturing ; I 
thus have first injected the arteries, and then by put- 
ting a pipe into the vein, and making the hgature be- 
low where the needle had probablj^ wounded it, have 
injected it afterwards. It will generally be found un- 
necessary to inject by both, or all the arteries, as the 
anastomosing branches form such a communication, 
as to admit the Injection thrown into one artery to 
readily fill the other ; jet it is always proper to have 
two pipes fixed, in case they should not thus commu- 
nicate, or any other accident should happen to one, 
that recourse may be had to the other ; whilst inject- 
ing by one artery, the pipe in the other should remain 
open until the Injection flows through it, and then im- 
mediately stopped by an assistant, yet so as not to 
interrupt the operation. The veins are most com- 
monly in this, as well as in other preparations, inject- 
ed with yellow, and the arteries with red. The ves- 
sels should always be previously washed, by injecting 
them several times with warm water ; and a placenta 
for this purpose should always be entire, both with 
respect to the membranes and the fleshy part. The 
knots or coils frequently found in the funis, will not 
obstruct the injection. 

The injecting double and other placentse is done in 
the same manner, in respect to the process ; but a 
greater number of colours are required for distin- 
guishing the ramifications of the several vessels from 
each other. 

The parenchyma, or fleshy parts, are then to be 



APPENDIX. 309 

carefully dissected from the vessels by the scissors 
and forceps. The gelatinous matter that surrounds 
the vessels in the umbilical cord will always dry 
transparent, and need never be removed : the rough 
external membrane, or tunica decidua, should be 
carefully peeled off from the other membranes, to 
render them more beautiful when dried. The pre- 
paration should then be macerated in water for about 
twenty-four hours, to cleanse it from all the blood ; 
after which the membranes are to be carefully filled 
with wool, previously oiled, to prevent its sticking to 
the preparation ; in doing which, care should be tak- 
en to put a sufficient quantity under the umbilical 
cord, to keep it at a considerable distance from the 
membranes; the cord should be coiled round the 
placenta within the membranes, imitating its position 
in utero ; and the v/hole membranes distended so as 
to resemble the form of the ovum. It often happens 
that the membranes are rent in various directions, so 
as to injure the preparation : this circumstance 
(though it ought always to be guarded against) may 
be remedied, by spreading out their edges, and lay- 
ing them over each other, so as to pin them together. 
After being distended, it should be placed upon a 
cloth in a current of air, to dry as soon as possible, 
when the pins are to be carefully removed. The ex- 
ternal membranes will very soon lose their moisture ; 
but the funis, containing a much larger quantity, in 
proportion to its surface, and being deprived of the 
circulating air by the surrounding wool, not so soon ; 
in order to hasten it, when the membranes are dried, 
a part of the wool may be removed to admit the air to 



310 APPENDIX. 

the inside, taking great care not to tear them, which 
is much more easily done now, than in their wet 
state. To finish the preparation, nothing more is ne- 
cessary than to give it two coats of varnish on each 
side, to increase its strength and transparency, and 
when well managed, it is one of the most beautiful 
that is made, and should be defended from injuries 
by being kept in a glass case. 



No. 3. — ' Frames or cradles for macerating and 
drying the skeletons of quadrupeds*^ 

These may be made of dififerent dimensions, ac- 
cording to the size of the animal. They should be 
in the form of a covered wagon. A floor or board, 
that is longer and wider than the animal should have 
several mortice holes near the sides. Bows made of 
flexible wood in the form of the letter U are inverted 
with their ends inserted in the mortice holes so as to 
represent the frame work of the wagon cover over 
the floor. Holes are bored through these bows, cor- 
responding on the two sides, so that a wire or rod 
may be passed through from side to side, at diffe- 
rent heights from the board. An animal having most 
of his flesh cut off", may be fixed in this frame, with 
his i^ei nailed to the board, and *his body supported 
by the rods passing through it in different places and 
through the holes in the bows ; and thus secured, 
and also with the aid of twine, the whole may be im- 
mersed in water for maceration, and afterwards the 
bones may be cleaned and dried in the same frame. 



INDEX. 



Abdominal viscera, injecting of to display their vascularity, 52. 
Acid for removing the earthy part of bones, 51. 

for corroding injected preparations, 73. 

Aneurisms, distending of for drying, 106. 

Antiseptic menstrua, different kinds of for wet preparations, 113. 

Animals, Sv^^an's new method of preserving, 231. 

Ants employed in dissecting small birds and quadrupeds, 287. 

Aorta, fixing a pipe in for injecting, 21. 

Appendix, 305. 

Arm, directions for injecting and preparing, 34. 

with one side of the head and thorax, 36. 

Swan's new method of preparing, 180. 

Arteries favourable for injecting, 18. 

mjecting and dissecting of, 19. 

Articulating of the different parts of the skeleton, 149. 
of the head, 149. 

of the vertebral column, 150. 

of the alias and dentatus, 151. 

^ of the sacrum and coxyx, 152. 

. of the ribs, 152. 

■■ — of the ribs with the sternum, 153. 

of the pelvis, 153. 

' of the pubis, 154. 

of the occiput and atlas, 154. 

of the acromion and clavicle, 155. 

■ of the sternum and clavicle, 155. 

of the scapula and humerus, 156. 

of the humerus and ulna, 1 57. 

of the radius and ulna, 158. 

of the bones of the carpus, 158. 

of the carpus and metacarpus, 160. 

of the metacarpus and phalanges, 161. 

— of the phalanges with each other, 161. 

of the head with the bones of the fore arm, 162. 

of the femur with the pelvis, 162. 

of the femur with the tibia, 162. 

of the fibula with the tibia, 163. 

: of the foot, 164. 

' — of the tibia with the tarsus, 165. 

B. 

Birds and small animals dissected by ants and wasps, 287. 

, directions for preserving, 273. 280. 

Bloodvesselsof a whole subject, how to inject cold, and prepare dry, 19. 
with the warm injection, 24. 



312 INDEX. 

Blood vessels of separate portions of the body, 30, 

Swan's method of preparing, 180. 

Bladder, distending and dryin^ of Avith the contiguous organs, 58. 
Bones injecting of to show their vascularity, 50. 

macerating and cleaning of, 136. 

preparing the cancelli of, 138. 

to render flexible and transparent, 145. 

cleaning and prepared when diseased, 146. 

preparations to exhibit the growth of, 147. 

of the head how to clean and separate, 148. 

■ articulations of, 149. 

Brain, how to extract from the cranium, 33. 

how to preserve in antiseptic liquids, 124. 

hov.' to preserve dry, 125. 

Swan's method of preserving, 217. 

Breast, female, injecting of with quicksilver, 101. 
Bronchia, how to prepare by maceration, 135. 

C. 

Cancelli of bones, hov.'to prepare, 138. 

Cat, kidney of, how to inject with mercury, 98. 

Casting with plaster of Paris, 247, 

from living subjects with plaster, 250. 

outlines of any figure in plaster, 250. 

of models in putty, 256. 

Casts, strengthening of by sticks or -wires, 249. 

smoothing the surface of, 258. 

in plaster, repairing of, 260. 

Cliirotheca, how to prepare, 134. 

Chordae tendinae, &c. of the heart, how to shew in preparation, 109. 

Circulation, foetal preparation of to explain, see Appendix, No. 1, 305. 

Cold injection of the arteries, how* to prepare, 2. 

Colouringof plaster models, 259. 

Colour of morbid specimens to presence natural, 116. 

Colours used in injections,\6. 

Comparative anatomy, directions for preserving specimens of, 263. 

Corpora Cavernosa of the penis, how to prepare, 57, 

Corroded preparations, obsen'ations on making and preserving, 72. 

Crustacea and insects, how to preserve, 276. 

D. 

Dissecting an entire subject for the blood vessels, 19. 

of the nerves of the orbit and face, 1 26. 

of the ner\'es of the neck and trunk, 129. 

Distending hollow preparations by spirits of wine, turpentine, &c., 103, 

preparations with air, hair, wool, cotton, quicksilver, plastei*, and 

tallow, 106, 

Drying blood vessel subjects, manner of, 65, 

E. 

Ear, the labyrinth how to cast with lead, 262. 

Swan's method of preserAang dry, 220. 

Eggs to preserve with nests, 278.^ 
Extremities, injecting and dissecting of, 34. 
Eustachian tube, how to exhibit, 107. 



INDEX. 313 

F. 

Fish, skeletons of how to make, 287. 

Foetus, injecting of to display the circulation of dry. See Appendix, No. 1, 305, 

minute injections of for making several preparations, 47. 

G. 

Gland parotid, injecting it with quicksilver, 94. 

H. 

Hand, vessels of, how to inject with quicksilver, 99. 

• new method of filling both arteries and veins with coloured injection, 41. 

Head, the blood vessels of, to inject and prepare, 31. 

one side of, with the arm and side of the thorax, 36. 

injecting of to preserve its natural appearance, 54. 

the bones of various sections of, 166. 

how to clean and separate the bones of, 148. 

Heart, injecting and preparing of, 42. 

injecting and preparing of m situ, with the adjacent blood vessels and tho- 
racic duct, 39. 

— — injecting and corroding of, 77. 

injecting and corroding of with the pulmonary vessels, 76. 

dry hollow preparation of to shew its cavities, valves, tendons, &c. 109. 

— — ' dry preparation of by quicksilver distention, 110, 

and lungs, Swan's method of preparing, 227. 

Hernia, dry preparation of the parts concerned in, 211. 
Hydatids, distending and drying of, 106. 

Hymen, dry preparation of by distention, 108. 110. 

I. 

Inclosing wet preparations, manner of, 119. 
Injections, different kinds of, 1. 

cold coarse, directions for making, 2. 

cold fine, directions for making, 4. 



— cold minute, directions for making, 4. 

— warm, directions for making, 5. 

— warm coarse, directions for making, 7. 

— warm fine, directions for making, 9. 

— warm minute, directions for making, 10. 

— Swan's plaster, directions for making, 12. 
quicksilver, 84. 



Injecting instruments, 14. 

directions for, 15. 

valves concerned in, 18. 

and corroding preparations, remarks on, 72. 



— an entire subject for the arteries and veins, with cold injection, 19. 

— an entire subject with warm injection, 24. 

— and preparing the blood vessels of separate portions of the human 



body, 30. 

Instruments for the lymphatics, 84. 

40 



S14 INDEX. 

Insects, preserving preparations from being destroyed by them, 63= 

how to preserve, 276. 

Intestines, minute injections of, 81. 
=_ distending and drying of, 52. 



Joints, how to preserve the ligaments of dry and flexible, 141 
■ Swan's method of preserving drj'^, 219. 

K. 

Kidneys of different animals, hov.' to prepare, 8L 
— injecting and corroding of, 79. 

L. 

Labyrinth of the ear, 1 62. 

Lacteals, injecting of with quicksilver, 92. 

of some animals more feasily injected than of others, 93, 

Larynx and trachea, distention and dry preparation of, 107. 

Ligaments of the joints, how to preserve dry and flexible, 141. 

Liver, injecting the lymphatics of with quicksilver, 95. 

— — Swan's method preparing, 214. 

Lungs injecting and corroding of vvith the heart, 76. 

preparing the air vessels of by maceration, 135. 

. and heart Swan's method of preparing dry, 227. 

preparations of in spirits of wine and oil of turpentine, 101. 

Lymphatics, injecting ©f with quicksilver, 85. 

> on the surfacfrof the liver, injecting of, &5, 

I — on the surface of the lungs, injecting of, S7. 
= Swan's method, 216. 

M. 

Macerating and cleaning bones, 136. 

__ diseased bones, 146. 

Macerated preparations of the blood vessels of the hand and foot, 136. 

_, general remarks on, 134. 

Mamma female, injecting of with quicksilver, 101. 
Models in plaster of Paris, observations on making, 237. 

. requisite properties of plaster for making, 236. 

smoothing the surface of, 25S. 

. repairing the injuries of when broken, 260. 

Morbid anatomy, how to preserve the natural colour of specimens, 116, 

Moulding and casting busts from living persons, 250. 

Moulds, making of on soft bodies and casting their models, 239. 

. making of on hard bodies, 241. 

• — making of in wax on irregular bodies and casting without seems, 254. 

.^ maiung of in putty, and casting the models, 256. 

N. 

Natural colour of morbid specimens to preserve, 116. 
Nerves, dissection of those of the face and orbit, 126. 

dissection of the neck and trunk, 129. 

. dissection of the cerebral, after destroying the bones with an acid, 1 3 

— cerebral nerves, imitation of, 133. 



INDEX. , 3T5" 

Nerves, Swan's method of preserving them dry, 200. 
Nose, Swan's method of preserving dry, 215. 

O. 

Old preparations, how to repair, 70. 
Osteogeny, preparations for exhibiting, 147. 
Ovaria, distention of for drying, 106. 

P. 

Paints and varnishes by Swan, 233. 
Painting or colouring plaster models, 259. 
Pancreas, a corroded preparation of, 83. 
Parotid gland, injection of with quicksilver, 94. 
Penis, injecting and preparing of, 56. 

bladder and vesiculae seminales, 5S. 

corroded preparation of, 82. 

Periosteum, preparation of, dried, 144. 

Placentae, injecting and preparing of. See Appendix, No. 2, 107. 

injecting and corroding of, 81. 

Plaster of Paris, requisite properties for modelling, 236. 

— — distending hollow preparations with, 111. 

on making moulds with, 237. 

Podatheca, how to prepare, 134. 

Preparations by distention with spirits of wine, turpentine, &c. 103. 

with air, hair, wool, cotton, quicksilver, plaster and tallow, 106. 

drying of, general directions for, 65. 

varnishing of, 65. 

preserving of from insects, 63. 

old and injured, repairing of, 70. 

■ how to inclose in jars, 119.283. 

a. 

Cluadrupeds, small skeletons of, how to make, 287, 

larger, see Appendix, No. 3, 310. 

treatment and preservation of, 270. 

Gluicksilver preparations, 84. 



Repairing old and injured dry arterial preparations, 70. 

■ of casts in plaster of Paris, 260. 
Reptiles and fishes, how to preserve entire, 274. 

;:* S. 

Sections of the bones, to exhibit their cavities, 166, 
Separating the bones of the head after cleaning, 148. 
Size for minute injection, how to make, 10. 
Skeletons, artificial, how to wire, 149. 

of quadrupeds, &.c. how to macerate and dry m framed, fcicc Appendix, 

No. 3, 310. 

natural, how to make, 139, 

of new born child, 142. 

Spleen, maceration and corrosion of, 79. 



316 . INDEX. 

Syringes for injecting, 14. 

Swan's new method of making dried preparations, 177. 



Tallow used for filling the heart, 109. 

Testes, injecting and preparing of, 57. 

Thorax, how to open for injecting the aorta ascendens, 20. 

Tray for injecting with quicksilver, 298. 

Tubes, Fallopian, distending of with cotton, 46. 

U. 

Uterus, distending with mercury, and preserving of. 110. 

injecting and preserving of, 45. 

gravid distention and drying of, 47 

V. 

Vagina, dry preparation of by distention, 108. 110. 
Valves of the arteries and veins, 18. 

-■ — of the veins of the hand how to overcome, 41. 

Varnishes, composition of, 68. 

and paints by Swan, 233. 

Varnishing anatomical preparations, 66. 
Veins, valves of, 18. 

of the hand and foot, how to prevent their obstructing the flow of injec- 
tion in, 41. 

injecting of, 23. 

of the head, how to inject, 31. 

of the heart how to inject for corrosion, 76. 

of the extremities, how to inject, 35. 

of the liver, spleen, kidney, pancreas, and penis for corrosion, how to in- 



ject, 81,82, 83. 

large about the heart, how to inject, 39. 

of the hand, how to inject with quicksilver, 110, 

of the uterus, 46. 

■ of the placenta, how to inject. See Appendix, No. 2, 307 . 
— coronary of the heart, how to inject with quicksilver, 110. 

injection of, to shew the foetal circulation. See Appendix, No. 1, 305. 



Vena magnae, ipsius penis, how lo inject, 56, 
Vena portaa, how to inject, 62. 



W. 



Warm injection, formulae for, 5. 
Washing corroded preparations, 74. 
Wet preparations, 113. 
Wiring a skeleton, 149. 



AMERICAN JOUKNAl^ 

OF THE 

MEDICAL. SCIENCES, 

I'UBLISHED qUMlTERLY, 

BY CAREY & LEA, 

And supported by the most distinguished physicians in the United States, among which are 
Professors Blgelow, Channing, Chapman, Coxe, De Butts, Dewees, Dickson, Dudley, 
Francis, Gibson, Hare, Henderson, Horner, Hosack, Jackson, Macneven, Mott, Mussey, 
Physick, Potter, Sewall, Warren, and Worthington; Drs. Daniel], Drake, Emerson, Fearn, 
Geddings, Griffith, Hale, Hays, Hayward, Ives, Jackson, Moultrie, Ware, and Wright. It 
is Y>^ih]\s\xe.6. punctually on the first of November, February, May, and August. F/ach No. 
contains about 280 large 8vo. pages, and one or more plates — being a greater amount of 
matter than is furnished by any other ISIedical Journal in the United States. Price $5 per 



annum. 



The following extracts show the estimation in which this Journal is held in Europe: — 

" Several of the American Journals are before us. ' * * Oi" these the Ajnerican Journal of the Medical Sciences 
h by far the better periodical; it is, indeed, the best of the trans-atlantic medical publications ; and, to make a compa- 
rison nearer liome, is in most respects superior to the great majority of European works of the same deseription. ' — 
The Lancet, Jan. 1831. 

" We need scai'cely refer our esteemed and highly emiiient cotemporary, {The Amer-ican Journal of the Medical 
Sciences,! from whom we quote, to our critical remarks on the opinions of our own countrymen, or to the principles 
which influence us in the discharge of our editorial duties." " Our copious extracts from his unequalled publication, 
unnoticing multitudes of othei-s which come before :us, are the best proof of the esteem which we entertain for his 
talents and abilities." — London Medical and Surgical Journal, March, 1830. 

" The American Journal of the Medical Sciences is one of the most complete and best edited of the numerouis peri- 
odical publications of the United States."— ^M^/efm des Sciences Medicates, Tom, XIV. 

Contents of No. XIII. published November, 1830, 
Okiginal Communicatioks,— ^55^2/5.— Chronic Intumescence of the Tongue. By Tho- 
mas Harris, M. D. Surgeon of the United States' Naval Hospital, in Philadelphia, and one of 
the Surgeons of the Pennsylvania Hospital. [With a plate.] — Experiments and Observations 
on the Endosmose and Exosmose of Gases, and the Relation of these Phenomena with the 
Function of Respiration. By Edwin D. Faust, M. D. of Columbia, S. C— Off the Penetra- 
tiveness of Fluids. By. J. K. "Mitchell, M. D. Lecturer on Medical Chemistry in the Phila- 
delphia Medical Institute.— Notes of Cases of Angina Pectoris, with some Remarks. By N. 
Chapman, M. D. Professor of the Institutes and Practice of Physic and Chnical Practice in 
the University of Pennsylvania. — On the Comparative Influence of Vegetable and Animal 
Decomposition as a Cause of Fever. By Usher Parsons, M. D. Professor of Anatomy and Sur- 
gery, Providence College, R. I. — Reports of Cases treated at the Baltimore Alms-house In- 
firmary. By Thomas H. Wright, M. D. Physician to the Institution. — Case of Trismus Nas- 
centium, in which Tracheotomy was successfully performed. By John Bellinger, M.D. Read 
to the Medical Society of South Carolina. — Irrit^^tion of the Spinal Cord. By William Hitch, 
M. D. of Baltimore.—Case of Ruptured Urethra. By S. J. Stratford, Esq. Member of the 

Royal College of Surgeons, London. i^etJieius.— Grundrissder Physlologle. Von Dr. Karl 

A'jmund Rudolphl. Elements of Physiology. By Dr. Charles Asmund Rudolphl, Professor 
of Med. &c. Berhn, Vols. I., IL, and III., 1821-1828.— Des Hemorrhoides, ou Traits Ana- 
lytiquede toutes les Affections Hemorrhoidales. Par A. J. Montegre. 1 vol. in 8vo. 2d. ed. 
Paris, 1830.— Traiti^ des Plaies de Tete et de I'Encephalitc. Par J. P. Gama, M. D. Prof a 

PHopital Milit. de Instruct, du Val-de-Grace. Paris, 1830. Biblw^raphkal Notices.— T\\q 

Dyspeptic's Monitor, &c. By S. W.Avery, M. D. New York, 1830, ppri52, 8vo.— Theorie der 
Krankheit, &c. Theory of Diseases, or General Pathology. By Ph. C. Hartmann, Doct. of 
Med. and Professor in the University of Vienna, &c. — Nouvcllcs Recherchessurl'Endosmose 
et I'Exosmose, &c. Par M. Dutrochet, Correspondent de I'lnstitutc, &c. 8vo.pp. 106. Paris, 
1828. — Encyclopadisches Worterbuch der niedlclnisclien Wisscnschaften. Hcrausgegeben 
von den Professoren der medicinischen Facultat zu Berlin. C. F. v. Graefe, C. W. Ilufeland, 
H. F. Link, K. A. Rudolphl. Dritter Band. (Antlphathic— Attractlo.) Berlin, 1829, und 
VierterBand, (Attrahentia— Band,) 1830. — Handbuch der speclellen, medicinischen Patho- 
logic und Theraple, &c. Manual of Special Medical Pathology and Therapeutics. By J. N. 
von Raimann, M, I). &c. 3d edit, enlarged and improved. 2 vols. Vienna, 1836.— Manuel 
Complet de Mddeclne Legale. Par C. Sedillot, D. M. P. Paris, 1830, pp. 511, 12mo.— Lec- 
tures on the Theory and Practice of Surgery. By John Abernethy, F. R. S. &c. C. S. Fran- 
cis, New York, 1830, pp. 190, 8vo.— Recherches Anatomlques, Physiologiques ct Patholo- 
giques sur le Systemc Velneux. ' Par M. G. Breschet, 7 Livraisons,"Fol. Paris, 1829. — The 
influence of Modern Physical Education of Females In producing :uid confirming Deformity 
of the Spine. By E. W.'Diiflin, Surgeon. Boston, 1830, pp. \a6, 12mo.— Manual of Thera- 
peutics. By I„ Martinet, 1). M. P. translated with alterations and additions. By R. Norton, 
MI) Extr^orditmrv M<Mnb<M' ofMic Med Sm-irt v of I'dlnburgh. Loud 1830 pp S'?:"!. I'Jmo 



FoBBiGN Intelligence— ^nflf(W»y. — On the Structure of the Electric Organ of the Toi-- 
pedo marmorata and ocellata. By A. Rudolphi, M. D. — Bilobate Uterus. — Different Species 

of Double Uterus. By Professor Mayer. Phydology, — Effects of the Upas tieute and 

Strychnos tieute on living- animals. By Dr. Albers, Professors Nees, Emmert, &c. — Absence 
of the Anterior Lobes of the Brain. By M. Lacroix. — Fungus of the Dura Mater. By M. 
Cruveilheir. — Atrophy of one-half of the Encephalon. By M. Bodey. — Gangrene of one-half 
of the Encephalon. By M. Lenoir. — Apoplexy of the Spinal Marrow. By M. Monod. — Use 
of the Olfactory Nerves. — Case of Spinal Arachnites, serving to confirm the views of M. Bel- 

lingeri relative to the functions of the Spinal Marrow and Spinal Nerves. By J. Arrigi. 

Pathology. — Membranous Exudation of the Mucous Membrane of the Small Intestines. By 
M. Pailloux. — Hypertrophy and considerable Stricture of the end of the Colon and all the 
Rectum, resulting from the immoderate use of Drastics. By M. Guyol. — Cerebral Apoplexy. 
By M. Cruveilhier. — State of the Salivary Glands in Mercurial Salivation. By M. Cruveilhier. — 
Black Colour of the Intestinal Canal. By MM. MontaultandPinault.- — Aphthse of Infants. By M. 
Guyol. — Fibrous Tumour in the Neurilema of the Fifth Pair of Nerves. BySig. Del Greco. — On 
the Chemical Solution or Digestion of the Coats of the Stomach after Death. By Dr. Carswell. — 
Chronic Arteritis — Consecutive Aneui-isms — Rupture of an Aneurism in the Trachea— Passage 
of large quantity of Air into the Circulatory System — General Emphysema — Sudden Death. 
By Dr. Alf. Lerabert. — Hxmatemesis from the Erosion of a Branch of the Coronary Artery of 
the Stomach. By M. RulUer. — Case of Rupture of the Stomach, accompanied by a violent 
spasm, and arising without any evident cause. By C.J. Roberts, M. D . Materia Medica. — Ex- 
tract of the Mother Waters of Sulphate of Quinine. By Dr. Casati.— On Sertuerner's supposed 
new Alkali, Chinoi'dia. By MM. Henry and Delondre. — Extract of the Roots of Asparagus. 
By M. Vaudin,— Mode of Preparation of the Synip of the Shoots of Asparagus. By M. A, 

ChevalUer. Practice of Medicine. — Gastritis. By Dr. Elliotson. — Inflammatory Purging. 

By Dr. Elhotson.— Rabies Epidemic at Stockholm in 1824. By Dr. Ekstrom.— Dulcamara 
in Cutaneous Diseases. By Mr. Gardner. — Astlima treated with the Tincture of the Lobelia 
Inflata. By J. Andrew, M. D.~Bronchocele cured by Iodine. By Henry J. Raines, Esq. — 
Modes of treating Intermittent Fever pursued at the various Hospitals of Paris. — On the 
Dangers of Abstinence and Insufficient Alimentation. By M. Piorry. — MaUgnant Intermittent 
Fever successfully treated by the Endermic Method. By Dr. Broglia delPersica. — Paralysis 
of the Tongue. By M. Ca3'ol.— Treatment of Chorea. By Baron Dupuytren. — Membranous 
Tracheal Angina. r>y M. Cayol. — Treatment of Gonorrhoea. By M. Guerin — Use of Chlo- 
ride of Lime in Small-Pox. By Dr. Gubian. — Hooping Cough. By Dr. Muhrbeck.-— Chlorate 
of Lime successfully employed in a case of Cancer Aquaticus. — By M. Berndt.- Ophthal- 
mology. — Partial Dropsy of the Eye. By M. Camus. — On the Probable Causes of Strabismus. 
By M. Pravaz. — Case of Partial Amaurosis and Incomplete Cataract, cured by the applica- 
tion of an Esutory on the Sinciput. By M. Pravaz. — On the local application of Strychnine 
as a cure for amaurosis. By Mr. Middlemore. — Spiritus Terebinthinze in Inflammation of the 
Internal Tissues of the Eye. By R. Middlemore, Esq. — Precautions in the Operation for Ca- 
taract. By M. Dupuytren. — Strychnine as a remedy for Ptosis. By R. Middlemore, Esq. — 

Strumous Iritis. By R, Middlemore, Esq. — Conical Cornea. By M. Demours. Surgery. — 

Amputation of the Hip-joint. By Professor Pehken. — Ligature of the Internal Iliac. By Dr. 
Stevens. — Lithotrity.— Chilblains. By Professor Graefe. — Amputation of the Penis by the 
Ligature. By Professor Graefe. — Cure of Complete Division of the Trachea and CEsophagus, 
the individual afterwards breathing through an aperture remaining at the seat of the Injury. 
By Professor Lliders. — Extirpation of the Parotid Gland. By Dr. August. Fontheim. — Ex- 
tirpation of a Degenerated Parotid Gland. By Dr. A. ;Magri. — Strangulated Hernia reduced 
by the Use of Belladonna. By Dr. Meola. — Staphyloraphy. By M. Roux. — Fissure and Spas- 
modic Constriction of the Anus. By Dr. Delaporte. — Large Abscess behind the Pharynx. 
By Dr. Priou.— Excision of the Uterus. By M. D.nbled.— On Union by the First Intention. 
By Professor Delpech. — Case of Non-union' of the Humerus, treated by Excision of the Ends 
of the Bones. Failure. By William Auchincloss, M. D.— Fungous Tumour of Mammae suc- 
cessfully excised. By James Syme, Esq.— Case of Hare-lip, with protrusion of the central 

part of the Alveolar Process o'f the Upper Jaw. By Andrew Dewar, Esq. Midwifery. — 

Transfusion in Uterine Hzemorrhage. By Dr. Savy. -^Employment of the Secale Cornutumin a 
Case of Haemorrhage from Inertia of the Uterus.' By M. P. L. Maurage. Medical Jurispru- 
dence.— On Tohon'm'g by Mercurial Preparations. By M. Ornla. — On the Poisonous Eflfectg 
of certain spoiled articles of Food. By M. Ollivier.— ^^ — Chemistry. — Animal Charcoal. ByM. 
Thouery. — Test of Morphium and its Acetate. By ^.l. Serullas. — Estimation of the Vegeto- 

Alkali in Peravian Bark. ByM. Veltman.— Tests of Nitric A-cid. By Dr. O'Shaugnessey. 

Miscellaneous. — On Plague. By Dr. Madden — Lunatic Asylum of Charenton. 

Americain- Intelugexce. — On the Influence of the Climate of St. Augustine, Florida, on 
Pulmonary Affections. Communicated by J. C Warren, M. D. Professor of Anatomy and 
Surgery in Harvard University, Boton. — Scirrhous State of the Duodenum and Pancreas, 
producing complete Obstruction of the Gall and Pancreatic DuctSv and great Enlargement 



8 

of the Gall Bladder, Jaundice, &c. By John H. Bayne, M. D. of Maryland.— Case of Imper-' 
forate Hymen. By Chas. S.J. Goodrich, M. D. — On Oleum Terebinthins as a remedy for 
Salivation. By E. Geddings, M. D. Lecturer on Anatomy and Surgery, Charleston, S. C— • 
On the'Treatment of Ununited Fractures with the Seton. By Isaac Hays, M. D.— Professor 
Mott's Case of Exsection of the Clavicle. — Ligature of the Carotid for Anastomosing Aneu- 
rism in a child three months old.— Shampooing in Dyspepsia.— Ergot in Menorrhagia. By 
John Belhnger, M. D. of Charleston, S. C— Teale on Neuralgia— Abercrombie on Diseases 
of the Stomach and Bowels. — Waite's Surgeon-Dentist's Anatomical and Physiological Ma- 
nual.— Southwood Smith's Treatise on Fever.— Medical Convention for revising the Pharma- 
copoeia. — Advertisements. 

Contents of No. XIV. published February f 1S31. 

Orig^inal CoMMUTficATioKs. — EssciT/s. — Some Remarks on Morbus Coxarius, with an Ac- 
count of Dr. P. S. Physick's Method of Treating this Disease. By J. Randolph, M. D. Lec- 
turer on Operative Surgery in the Philadelphia School of Medicine. [With a Plate,] — Case 
of Axillary Aneurism, in which the Subclavian Artery was successfully secured in a Liga- 
ture. By Valentine Mott, M. D. — Observations on the Irritable Uterus, with Cases. By Wil- 
liam P. Dewees, M. D. Adjunct Professor of Midwifery in the University of Pennsylvania. — 
Longitudinal Section of the Lower Jaw for the removal of a Tumour. By J. Rhea Barton, 
M. D. one of the Surgeons of the Pennsylvania Hospital, and of the Philadelphia Alms-house 
Infirmaiy. [With a Plate.] — Observations and Reflections on the Employment of Strychnine 
in the Treatment of Paralysis. By E. Geddings, M. D. Lecturer on Anatomy and Surgery. 
— On the Employment of External Medications. By William M. Fahnestock, M. D. — Case 
■ of Amnesia. By S. Henry Dickson, M. D. Professor of the Institutes and Practice of Medicine 
in the Medical College of South Carolina. — Observations on Delirium Tremens. By Samuel 
Jackson, M. D. — Case of Tubero-Carunculoid Liver. By Thomas H. Wright, M. D. — On 
the Operation of Physical Causes upon the Constitution, the Health, and Diseases of Man. By 
Edward Florens Rivinus, M. D. — Observations on a New Variety of Peruvian Bark, with 
some Remarks on the Alkaline Bases, Quinine and Cinchonine. I3y George W. Carpenter, 
— Microscopical Observations on Portions of Animal Tissue, with Additional Experiments 
on Endosmose and Exosmose. By William W. Valk, M. D. of Providence, R. I. — Remarks 
on a Contrivance for Draining the Thorax of Liquids, excluding at the same time the Ad- 
mission of Air. By Samuel A. Cartwright, M. D. of Natchez. — Remarks on the Operation 
for the Hare-Lip. By Zadoc Howe, M. D. of Billerica, Mass.— Cynanche Tonsillaris, termi- 
nating fatally by Haemorrhage. By Samuel Webber, M. D. of Charlestown, N. H.— Case- 
of Pertussis immediately ari'ested by the use of Belladonna and Hydrocyanic Acid, as used 

by Dr. Kahleiss. By William W. Valk, M. D. Reviews. — Pyretologie Physiologique, ou 

Traite des Fievres considerees dans I'Esprit de la Nouvelle Doctrine Medicale. Par F. G. 
Boisseau, M. D. 8vo. pp, 722. Paris, 1826. — An Essay on the Remittent and Intermittent 
Diseases, including, generically Marsh Fever and Neuralgia. By John MaccuUoch, M. D'. 
&c. &c. pp. 474, 8vo. — 1. Organon der Heilkunst, von Samuel Hahnemann. 2. Ueber den 
Werth des homoopathischen Heilverfahrens, von Dr. Gottlieb Ludwig Rafu. 3. Ansichten 
ueber das bisherige Heilverfahren, und ueber die ersten Grundsatze der homoopathischen 
Krankheitslehre, von Ignaz Rudolph Bischoff. Organon, or System of Cure. By Samuel 
Hahnemann, &c. 1829. The Merits of the Hbmoopathic Doctrine. By Dr. Gottlieb Ludwig 
Rau, &c. 1824. — A Sketch of the Medical Doctrines generally prevalent, and of the Prin- 
ciples of Homoopathie. By Ignaz Rudolph Bischoff, M. D. Professor of Chnical Med. and 

Spec. Therapeutics, &c. 1819. BibliograpJdcal Notices.— \y\sstvii:iZ\om. et Altri Scritti Del 

SignorDottore Giacomo Tomraasini, Professore di clinica Medica. Dissertations, and other 
writings of Professor Tpmmasini, of Bologna, relative to the new Itii^ian medical doctrine, 
&c. — Medico-Chirurgical Transactions. Published by the Medical and Chirurgical Society 
of London. Vol. XVI. Pt.L_ London, 1830, pp. 235, Pi. IL— Elements of Chemistry. By 
Edward Turner, M. D. TJiird Americaii, from the Second London edition, with notes and 
emendations. By Frankhn Bache, M. D. pp. 578.— Observations on the Blood. By William 
Stevens M. D. &c. &c. Read at the Royal College of I'hysicians. May 3d, 1830.— The Prac- 
tice of Medicine, according to the Principles of the Physiological Doctrine. By J. Coster, 
M. D. Translated from the French.— Pathological and" Practical Researches on Diseases of 
the Brain and the Spinal Cord. By John Abercrombie, M. D. 

FouEiGN- Inteliirknce. — JLiiatomy. — Anatomical and Pathological Obsei*vations on 
the Eye. By Professor Francis Rossi. — Method of Cleaning Bones. By J. W. West.— — 
Physiology.— '^'xixxve of the Globules of the Blood. By M. Donne,— Period of Puberty in 
Women. By Mr. Roberton. — Menstruation continued to the 94tli year.— Exti-aordinary in- 
stances of Reproduction. By Dr. Ryan.— Pregnancy occurring during Dysmenorrhea. By 
Dr. Ryan.— On the Cause of the Entrance of Air into the Veins during Operations on the Neck. 
By M. Bcrurd. /^a//w/ogy.— Keraarkable Case of TubcrcuUu' Excavation communicating 



With the External Air through an Aperture between the Ribs. By Dr. James Johnson.— 
Croup in an Adult. By M. Andral, jr.— Arterial Avarices. By M. Dupuytren — Accumu- 
lation of Faecal Matters simulating an Internal Strangulation. By M. Sanson. — Poisoning 
by Mouldy Bread. By Dr. Westerhoff.— Case of an apparent Aneurismal Tumour- 
Hepatitis— Insidious Hydrothorax. By M. Merat.— Case of Inflammation of the Vena Cava 
Ascendens. By Dr. J. Hourmann.— Action of Cold on the Lungs. By M. Flourens.— M. 
Broussais's Opinion respecting the Seat of Intermittent Fever.— On the Chemical Solution 

of the Stomach after Death. By M. Sandras. Materia Medica and Pharmacy. —VY&^^rsi- 

tion of Tartar Emetic Ointment. By M. Mialhe.— Efficacy of Secale Cornutum in Hemor- 
rhages. By Dr. Spazani. — Experiments on the Bromures of Mercury. By Dr. Werneck.— 
Chlorine an Antidote to Hydrocyanic Acid. By MM. Persoz and Nonat.— Salicine. By M. 

Leroux. Practice of Medicine. — Employment of Belladonna in the Treatment of Obstinate 

Intermittent Fevers. By Professor Hufelaad.— Employment of Belladonna in Hooping- 
cough. By Dr. Miquel.— Membranous Inflammation of the Cheek. By M. Guersent.— On 
Diet. By M. Charbonnier.— New Mode of Administering Sulphate of Quinine in Intermit- 
tent Fevers. By J. P. Pointe.— Tetanus cured by Injection of Opium into the Veins. By 
MM. Percy and Laurent— Tetanus cured by Injections of Datura Stramonium. By MM. 
Percy and Laurent. — Case of Epistaxis.— Homoopathic Treatment of Diseases. By Dr. Rau. 
—Haemoptysis succeeded by Ulceration— Hectic fever— Relieved by Iodine Inhalation. By 
Sir Charles Scudamore, M. D.— Case of Habitual Asthma relieved by Inhalation. By Sir 
Charles Scudamore, M. D.— Case of Spasmodic Asthma reUeved by Inhalation of Ether, 

Conium, and Ipecacuanha. By Sir Charles Scudamore, M. D. Ophthalmohgy.— On the 

Treatment of Amaurosis by Strychnine. By Dr. Sliortt— New Operation for Ectropion., 
By Dr. J. F. DieflTenbach.— Case of Hebdomadal Intermittent Ophthalmia. Bv M. Hueter.— • 

Opacities of the Cornea. By Dr. Shortt. -.S'wj^er?/.— Excision of a Carious Rib. By M. 

Roux. — Removal of a great part of the Lower Jaw. By M. Roux.— Compound Fracture of 
the Forearm, with great bruising of the Soft Parts, successfully treated. By W. Auchincloss, 
M. D. — Extirpation of a Large Tumour from behind the Lower Jaw. By Adam Martin, M. D. 
— Case of Excision of the Lower Ends of the Bones of the Forearm. By M. Hubher, M. D.— 
Cure of Subcutaneous Naevus by the Seton. By Mr. Fawdington.— Inflammation of the Her- 
nial Sac. By M. Duparc. — Ununited Fracture of the Femur successfully treated by the Se- 
ton. By John Swift, Esq.— Internal Strangulation of the Intestines. By M. Sanson.— Remo- 
val of the Penis by Ligature. By M. Michaelis.— Amputation of the Knee Joint. By M. Vel< 
peau. — Congenital Enlargement of the Tongue. By Mr. Liston. — Tapping for Hydroce- 
phalus. By Dr. Conquest. — Dislocation of the Hip reduced more than a month after the Acci- 
dent. — Aneurism of the Arteria Innominata; Operation of Tying the Carotid; Sudden Death; 
singular Pathological Appearances. By Mr. Key.— Staphyloraphy, followed by Death. By 

M._ Roux. Midwifery. — Deficient or Deranged Action in Parturition. By Mr. Jam.es 

Wilson. — Extra-uterine Foetation. By Dr. F. G. Wilmans. — —MedicalJurisprudence. — On 
the Poisonous Effects of Ox)^gen and some other Gases on the Animal Body. By Mr. 
Broughton. — Case of Fracture of the Spleen. — Poisoning with Empyreumatic Oil of Harts- 
horn. By M. Duret. — Murder by Poisoning with the Nitric Acid. — Attempt to Murder by ad- 
ministering Sulphuric Acid.— Poisoning with Bismuth. By Dr. Kerner.— Death from Inhal- 
ing Nitrous Ether. Chemistry. — Test for Distinguishing different kinds of Rhubarb. By 

M. Geiger. — New mode of Preparing the Carbonate of Iron. Miscellaneous. — Influence of 

Temperature on the Mortality among Infants. By MM. Villerme and Milne Edwards.— Re- 
spect shown by the French Government to the Medical Profession. — Prize for the best Essay 
on Cholera Morbus. 

Amebican Intelligejtci:. — A case of Poisoning, Treated with Emetics per anum. By S. 
C. Roe, M. D. of New York. — Case of Small-pox occurring three days afterbirth, the mother 
not having had the Disease since Childhood. By IVIr. J. Mitchell. (Communicated by J. K. 
Mitchell, M. D.) — Aneurism of the Aorta, and Unusual Origin of Right Subclavian. By J. P. 
Hopkinson, M. D. — Malformation of the Sexual Organs. By J. W. Heustis, M. D. — Gonor- 
rhoea produced by the Lochia. By J. K. Mitchell, M. D. — A Case of Labour in which the 
Placenta was delivered some time before the FcEtus. By Dr. C. W. Cloud, of Lexington, 
Ky. — Case of Bilious Fever. By J. F. Fletcher, M. D. of Salvesa, Mercer county, Kentucky. 
— Jackson's Introductory Lecture. — Geddings's Introductory Lecture. — Goupil's Exposition 
of the New Medical Doctrine. — A Rational Exposition of the Physical Signs of the Diseases 
of the Lungs and Pleura. By Charles J. B. Wilhams. — Researches Relative to the Morbid 
and Curative Effects of Loss of Blood. By Marshall Hall. — Bcclard's Elem.ents of General 
Anatomy. — Ratier's Practical Formulary of the Parisian Hospitals. — Directions for making 
Anatomical Preparations. — Larrey's Surgical Menioirs of the Russian Campaign. — Boisseau's 
Physiological Pyretology.— Extract of Cainga. — Index. — Advertisements. 

QCj*^ few complete sets of this Journal can be supplied by the publishers.''^ Price $ 12 for 
twelve numbers, being for the years 1828-29-30. 



CARE¥ & LEA 

HAVE RECENTLY PUBLISHED THE FOLLOWING 

VALUABLE WORKS. 



I. PRIVATE MEMOIRS of NAPOLEON BONAPARTE, from the 
French of M. Fauvelet de Bourrienne, Private Secretary to tlie Emperor. 
In 2 vols. 8vo. 

The peculiar advantages of position in regard to his present subject, solely enjoyed 
by M. de Bourrienne, his literary accomplishments and moral qualifications, have already 
obtained for these memoirs the first rank in contemporary and authentic history. In 
France, where they had been for years expected with anxiety, and where, since the re- 
volution, no work connected with that period or its consequent events has created so 
great a sensation, the volumes of Bourrienne have, from the first, been accepted as the 
only trustworthy exhibition of the private life and political principles of Napoleon. 

*• We know from the best political authority now living in England, that the writer's 
accounts are perfectly corroborated by facts.'* — Lit. Gaz. 

II. ANNALS of the PENINSULAR CAMPAIGNS. By the Author of 
Cyril Thornton. In 3 vols. 12mo. with plates. 

III. REPORTS on LOCOMOTIVE and FIXED ENGINES. By J. 

Stephenson and J. VV"alker, Civil Engineers. With an Account of the Li- 
verpool and Manchester Rail Road, by H. Booth. In 8vo. with plates. 

IV. NOTES on ITALY, during the years 1829-30. By Rembrandt 
Peale. In 1 vol. Bvo. 

*'This artist will gratify all reasonable expectation; he is neither ostentatious, nor 
dogmatical, nor too minute ; he is not a partisan nor a carper ; he admires without ser- 
vility, he criticises without malevolence ; his frankness and good humour give an agree- 
able colour and effect to all his decisions, and the object of them; his book leaves a use- 
ful general idea of the names, works, and deserts of the great masters; it is an instruc- 
tive and entertaining index." — J^at. Gaz. 

" We have made a copious extract in preceding columns from this interesting work 
of our countryman, Rembrandt Peale, recently published. It has received high com- 
mendation from respectable sources, which is justified by the portions we have seen ex- 
tracted." — Commercial Advertiser. 

V. COUNT ROBERT of PARIS, a Romance of the Lower Empire. By 
the Author of VTaverley. In 2 vols. 12mo. Nearly ready. 

VI. FRAGMENTS of VOYAGES and TRAVELS, including ANEC- 
DOTES of NAVAL LIFE; intended chiefly for the use of Young Persons. 
By Basil Hall, Capt. R. N. In 2 vols, royal ISmo. Nearly ready. 

" His volumes consist of a melange of autobiography, naval anecdotes, and sketches of 
a somewhat discursive nature, which we have felt much pleasure in perusing." 

" The title page to these volumes indicates their being chiefly intended for young 
persons, but we are much mistaken if the race of gray beards will be among the least 
numerous of the readers of 'midshipmen's pranks and the humours of the green room.* 
To us the following is irresistible." — Lit. Gaz. 

VIL SONGS of the AFFECTIONS. By Mrs. Hemans. RoyallSmo. 

VIII. DESTINY, or the CHIEF'S DAUGHTER. By the Author of 
"Marriage," and "The Inheritance." In 2 vols. 12mo. 

**She unites the perfect purity and moral elevation of mind visible in all Miss Baillie^s 
delightful works, with much of the same caustic vigour of satire that has made Miss 
Edgevvorth's pen almost as fearful as fascinating."— i^/acA-wooJ's Magazine. 

"There remains behind, not only a large harvest, but labourers capable of gathering 
it in. More than one writer has of late displayed talents of this description, and if the 
present author, himself a phantom, may be permitted to distinguish a brother, or per- 
haps a sister shadow, he would mention, in particular, the author of the very lively 
work entitled * Marriage.' ''—Conclusion of'' Tales of Mii Landlordr 

IX. VOYAGES and ADVENTURES of the COMPANIONS of COLUM- 
BUS. By Washington Irving, Author of the Life of Columbus, &c. 1 vol. Svo. 

"Of the main work wc may repeat that it possesses the value of important hist(.rv -»,vl 



2 Valuable Works 

the magnetism oFromantIc adventure. It sustains in every respect the reputation of Ir- 
ving." *' We may hope that the gifted author will treat in like manner the enterprises 
and exploits of Pizarro and Cortes; and thus complete a series of elegant recitals, which 
will contribute to the especial gratification of Americans, and form an imperishable fund 
of delightful instruction for all ages and countries." — JVaf. Gaz. 

" As he leads us from one savage tribe to another, as he paints successive scenes of he- 
roism, perseverance, and self-denial, as he wanders among the magnificent scenes of na- 
ture, its he relates with scrupulous fidelity the errors, and the crimes, even of those whose 
lives are for the most part marked with traits to command admiration, and perhaps esteem 
— every where we find him the same undeviating, but beautiful moralist, gathering from 
every incident some lesson to present in striking language to the reason and the heart." — 
Am. Quarterly Reviexu. 

X. A CHRONICLE of the CONQUEST of GRENADA. By Washing- 

TON Irving, Esq. la 2 vols. 

" On the whole, this work will sustain the high fame of Washington Irving. It fills a 
blank in the historical library which ought not to have remained so long a blank. The lan- 
guage throughout is at once chaste and animated ; and the narrative may be said, like 
Spenser's Fairy Queen, to present one longgallery of splendid pictures." — Lond. JUt. Gaz. 
New Editions of the folloiving ivorks by the same viuthor. 

The SKETCH BOOK, 2 vols. 12mo. 

KNICKERBOCKER'S HISTORY of NEW YORK, 2 vols. 

BRACEBRIDGE HALL, 2 vols. 12mo. 

TALES of a TRAVELLER, 2 vols. 12mQ. 

XL A TREATISE on the CULTURE of the SUGARCANE, withPrac 
tical Directions for the MANUFACTURE of its PRODUCTS. By G. It 
Porter, Esq. In 8vo. with plates. 

XII. CABINET OF HISTORY. 
Vols. 1, 2. HISTORY of SCOTLAND. By Sir Walter Scott. 

3. HISTORY of ENGLAND. By Sir James Mackintosh. Vol. L 

4. OUTLINES of HISTORY. 

5. HISTORY of the NETHERLANDS. By J. C. Grattan. 

6, 7. HISTORY of FRANCE. By Eyre Evans Crowe, 2 vols. Nearly 
ready, 
8. HISTORY of ENGL AND. By Sir James Mackintosh. Vol. IL 
Nearly ready, 

XIIL CABINET LIBRARY. 

Vol. 1. The MARQUIS ofLONDONDERRY'S NARRATIVE of theLATE 
WAR in GERMANY and FRANCE. 

"No history of the events to which it relates can be correct without reference to its 
statements." — Literary Gazette. 

« The events detailed in this volume cannot fail to excite an intense interest." — JDublin 
Literary Gazette. 

*♦ The only connected and well-authenticated account we have of the spirit-stirring 
scenes which preceded the fall of Napoleon. It introduces us into the cabinets and pre- 
sence of the allied monarchs. We observe the secret policy of each individual ; we seethe 
course pursued by the wily Bernadotte, the temporizing Metternich, and the ambitious 
Alexander. The work deserves a place in every historical library." — Globe. 
2. JOURNAL of a NATURALIST. Nearly ready, 

Plants, trees, and stones, we note ; 

Birds, insects, beasts, and rural things. 

« We again most strongly recommend this little unpretending volume to the attention of 
every lover of nature, and more particularly of our country readers. It will induce them, 
we are sure, to examine more closely than they have been accustomed to do, into the ob- 
jects of animated nature, and such examination will prove one of the most innocent and 
the most satisfactory sources of gratification and amusement. It is a book that ought to find 
its way into every rural drawing room in the kingdom, and one that may safely be placed 
in every lady's boudoir, be her rank and station in life what they may." — Quarterly Rev, 
No. LXXVUI. 

«* We think there are few readers who will not be delighted, (we are certain all will be 
instructed,) by the * Journal of a Naturalist.' " — Monthly Revieiv. 

« This is a most delightful book on the most delightful of all studies. We are acquainted 



rubttmed by Carey ^ Lea. 

with no previous work which bears any resemblance to this, except * White's tllstory of 
Selborne,* the most fascinating piece of rural writing and sound English philosopliy that 
ever issued from the press." — Athcnceum. 

" The author of the charming volume before us has produced one of the most interest- 
ing volumes we remember to have seen for a longtime." — JVew Monthly Mag. June, 1829. 
3. MILITARY MEMOIRS of the DUKE of WELLINGTON. By 
Captain Moyle Sherer. Nearly ready. 

XIV. A DISCOURSE on the REVOLUTIONS of the SURFACE of the 
GLOBE and the Changes thereby produced in the ANIMAL KINGDOM. 
Bj Baron G. Cuvier. Translated from the French, with Illustrations and a 
Glossary. In 12mo. with plates. 

XV. OUTLINES of HISTORY, from the Earliest Records to the Present 
Time. Prepared for the Use of Schools, with Questions, by John Frost, A. M. 

" We have glanced over, with much satisfaction, the second American edition of a work 
entitled, ♦ Outlines of History ; embracing a concise history of the World, from the earliest 
period to the pacification of Europe, in 1815,' which is just published by Messrs. Carey 8c 
Lea. This edition contains some important additions, and a set of questions for examina- 
tion of students, arranged by John Frost, A. M, The main object of the work is, by giv- 
ing a selection of interesting and striking facts from more elaborate histories, properly and 
carefully arranged, with chronological tables, to render the study of general history less 
dry and repulsive than it has been heretofore. This, we think is fully accomplished. Very 
great care appears to have been bestowed on the selections, and in arranging the chrono- 
logical tables, as well as in the classification of the historical matter into parts and chap- 
ters. The work will sufiiciently reooramend itself to all who examine it." — Sat. Eve. Post. 

XVI. ATLAS of ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY, consisting of 21 Coloured 
Maps, with a Complete Accentuated Index. By Samuel Butler, D. D., 
F. R. S. &:c. Archdeacon of Derby. 

By the sttme AutJior. 

XVII. GEOGRAPHIA CLASSICA: a Sketch of Ancient Geography, for 
the Use of Schools. In 8vo. Nearly ready. 

XVIII. ENCYCLOPAEDIA AMERICANA; a Popular Dictionary of Arts, 
Sciences, Literature, History, and Politics: brought down to the Present 
Time, and including a Copious Collection of Articles in American Biography. 
On the basis of the Seventh Edition of the German Conversations Lexicon. 
Edited by Dr. Francis Ijeiber, assisted by Edward Wigglesworth, EvSq. 

*,* This work will be completed in twelve large octavo volumes, price two dollars and 
a half each, strongly bound in cloth. Five volumes are already published, stnd the sixth is 
nearly read3^ 

XIX. The WATER WITCH, or the SKIMMER of the SEAS. By the 
Author of the Pilot, Red Rover, &c. In 2 vols. 

" We have no hesitation in classing this among the most powerful of the romances of 
our countryman." — U. States Gazette. 

« AVe could not break from the volumes, and may predict that they will excite the same 
interest in the minds of almost every reader. The concluding chapters produce intense 
emotion." — JVational Gazette. 

New Editions of the folloioing Works by the same Author. 



NOTIONS of the AMERICANS, by a 
Travelling Bachelor, 2 vols. 12mo. 

The AVISH-TON-WISH, 2 vols. 
12mo. 

The RED ROVER, 2 vols. 12mo. 

The SPY, 2 vols, 12mo. 

The PIONEERS, 2 vols. 12mo. 



The PILOT, a Tale of the Sea, 2 vols. 
12mo. 

LIONEL LINCOLN, or the LEA- 
GUER of BOSTON, 2 vols. 

The LAST of the MOHICANS, 2 
vols. J2mo. 

The PRAIRIE, 2 vols. 12mo. 



XX. JOURNAL of the HEART, edited by the Authoress of Flirtation. 

*' This is a most charming and feminine volume, one delightful for a woman to read, 
and for a woman to liavc written." — Literary GuT.ettc. 

XXI. The ARMENIANS, a Tale of Constantinople. By J. Macfarlane. 
In 2 vols. 

*'The author will appreciate our respect for his talents, when wc say that he has done 
more than any oth«r njan to complete ti>e picture of the Eust, dashed oft' by the bold 
pencil of the author of Ana3ta3ius.*'--iU Lit, Journ. 



trainable Prorks 

XXII. TALES of a GRANDFATHER, being a Series from French His- 
tory. By the Author of Waverley. 

XXIII. CONSIDERATIONS on the CURRENCY and BANKING SYS- 
TEM of the UNITED STATES. By Albert Gallatin. Republished, (with 
additions and corrections, from the American Quarterly Review. 

XXIV. The YOUNG LADIES' BOOK, a Manual of Instructive Exercises, 
Recreations, and Pursuits. With numerous plates. 

XXV. ATLANTIC SOUVENIR, 

_ . FOR 1831. 

^ Embellishments. — 1. Frontispiece. The Shipwrecked Family, engraved by Ellis, from a 
picture by Burnet. — 2. Shipwreck off Fort Rouge, Calais, engraved by Ellis, from a picture 
by Stanfield — 3. Infancy, engraved by Kelly, from a picture by Sir Thomas Lawrence.— 
4. Lady J^ne Grey, engraved by Kelly, from a picture by Leslie. — 5. Three Score and 
Ten, engraved by Kearney, from a picture by Burnet. — 6. The Hour of Rest, engraved by 
Kelly, from a picture by Burnet. — 7. The Minstrel, engraved by Ellis, from a picture by 
L-eslie. — 8. Arcadia, engraved by Kearney, from a picture by Cockerell. — 9. The Fisherman's 
Return, engraved by Neagle, from a picture by Collins. — 10. The Marchioness of Carmar- 
then, granddaughter of Charles Carroll of Carrollton, engraved by Illman and Pillbrow, 
from a picture by Mrs. Mee. — 11. Morning among the Hills, engraved by Hatch, from a 
picture by Doughty. — 12. Los Musicos, engraved by Ellis, from a picture by WatteaU. 

A few copies of the ATLANTIC SOUVENIR, for 1829 and 1830, are 
still for sale. 

XXVI. The POETICAL WORKS of CAMPBELL, ROGERS, MONT- 
GOMERY, LAMBE, and KIRKE V^HITE, beautifully printed, 1 vol. Svo. 
to match Byron, Scott, Moore, &c. With Portraits of the Authors. 

XXVIL The CHEMISTRY of the ARTS, on the Basis of Gray's Opera- 
tive Chemist, being an Exhibition of the. Arts and Manufactures dependent on 
Chemical Principles, with numerous Engravings, by Authur L. Porter, M. 
D. late Professor of Chemistry, &c. in the University of Vermont. In Svo. 
With numerous plates. 

The popular and valuable English work of Mr. Gray, which forms the ground-work of the 
present volume, was published in London in 1829, and designed to exhibit a Systematic and 
Practical view of the numerous Arts and Manufactiu'es which involve the application of 
Chemical Science. The author himself, a skilful, manufacturing, as well as an able scientific 
chemist, enjoying the multiplied advantages afforded by the metropolis of the greatest 
manufacturing nation on earth, was eminently qualified for so arduous an undertaking, 
and the popularity of the work in England, as well as its intrinsic merits attest the fidelity 
and success with which it has been executed. In the work now offered to the American 
public, the practical character of the Operative Chemist has been preserved, and much 
extended by the addition of a great variety of original matter, by numerous corrections 
of the original text, and the adaptation of the whole to the state and wants of the arts and 
Manufactures of the United States; among the most considerable additions will be found 
full and extended treatises on the Bleaching of Cotton and Linen, on the various branches 
of Calico Printing, on the Manufacture of the Chloride of Lime, or Bleaching Powder, and 
numerous Staple Articles used in the Arts of Dying, Calico Printing, and various other 
processes of Manufacture, such as the Salts of Tin, Lead, Manganese, and Antimony; the 
most recent Improvements on the Manufacture of the Muriatic, Nitric, and Sulphuric Acids, 
the Ghromates of Potash, the latest information on the comparative Value of Different 
Varieties of Fuel, on the Construction of Stoves, Fire-Places, and Stoving Rooms, on the 
Ventilation of Apartments, &c. &c. The leading object has been to improve and extend 
the practical character of the Operative Chemist, and to supply, as the publishers flatter 
themselves, a deficiency which is felt by every artist and manufacturer, whose processes 
involve the principles of chemical science, the want of a Systematic Work which should 
embody the most recent improvements in the chemical arts and manufactures, whether 
derived from the researches of scientific men, or the experiments and observations of 
the operative manufacturer and artizans themselves. 

XXVin. ARNOTT'S ELEMENTS of PHYSICS. Vol. II. Part I. con- 
taining Light and Heat. 

" Dr. Arnott's previous volume has been so well received, that it has almost banished 
all the flimsy productions called popular, which falsely pretend to strip science of its 
mysterious and repulsive aspect, and to exhibit a holyday apparel. The success of such 
a work shows most clearly that it is plain, but sound knowledge which the public want." 
—Monthly Reviexv. 



Published by Carey ^ Lea. 5 

XXIX. ELEMENTS of PHYSICS, or NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, 
GENERAL and MEDICAL, explained independently of TECHNICAL 

MATHEMATICS, and containing New Disquisitions and Practical Sugges- 
tions. By Neill Arnott, M. D. First American from the third London 
edition, with additions, by Isaac Hays, M. D. 

*^* Of this work four editions have been printed in England in a very short time. All 
the Reviews speak of it in the highest terms. 

XXX. MORALS of PLEASURE, illustrated by Stories designed for Young 
Persons, in 1 vol. 12mo. 

"The style of the stories is no less remarkable for its ease and gracefulness, than for 
the delicacy of its humour, and its beautiful and at times affecting simplicity. A lady micst 
have written it — for it is from the bosom of woman alone, that such tenderness of feeling 
and such delicacy of sentiment — such sweet lessons of morality — such deep and pure 
streams of virtue and piety, gush forth to cleanse the juvenile mind from the grosser impu- 
rities of our nature, and prepare the young for lives of usefulness here, and happiness 
hereafter." — JV. Y. Com. Adv. 

XXXI. SKETCHES of CHINA, with Illustrations from Original Draw- 
ings. By W. W. Wood. In 1 vol. 12mo. 

"The residence of the author in China, during the years 1826-7-8 and 9, has enabled 
him to collect much very curious information relative to this singular people, which he 
has embodied in his work; and will serve to gratify the curiosity of many whose time 
or dispositions do not allow them to seek, in the voluminous writings of the Jesuits 
and early travellers, the information contained in the present work." 

XXXII. CLARENCE^ a Tale of our own Times. By the Author of Red- 
wood, Hope Leslie, &c. In two volumes. 

XXXIIL FALKLAND, a Novel, by the Author of Pelham, &c. 1 vol. 12mo. 

XXXIV. A COLLECTION of COLLOQUIAL PHRASES on every Topic 
necessary to maintain Conversation, arranged under different heads, with nu- 
merous remarks on the peculiar pronunciation and use of various words -the 
whole so disposed as considerably to facilitate the acquisition of a correct pro- 
nunciation of the French. By A. BoLMAR. One vol. 18mo. . 

XXXV. A SELECTION of ONE HUNDRED PERRIN'S FABLES, ac- 
companied by a Key, containing the text, a literal and free translation, ar- 
ranged in such a manner as to point out the difference between the French and 
the English idiom, also a figured pronunciation of the French, according to the 
best French works extant on the subject; the whole preceded by a short trea- 
tise on the sounds of the French language, compared with those of the English. 

XXXVL NEUMAN'S SPANISH andENGLISH DICTIONARY, new ed. 

XXXVII. A TOUR in AMERICA, by Basil Hall, Capt. R. N. in 2 vols. 
12mo. 

XXXVIII. AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGY, or NATURAL HISTORY 
of BIRDS inhabiting the UNITED STATES, by Charles Lucian Bona- 
parte; designed as a continuation of V^ilson's Ornithology, vols. I., II. and III. 

*^* Gentlemen who possess Wilson, and are desirous of rendering the work 
complete, are informed that the edition of this work is very small, and that but 
a very limited number of copies remain unsold. Vol. IV. in the press. 

XXXIX. The AMERICAN QUARTERLY REVIEW, No. XVII. Con- 
/eri^s. —France, by Lady Morgan— Ennui — Dobell's Travels in China and 
Siberia — Physical Geooraph — Autobiography of Thieves — Tobacco — Irving-s 
Spanish Voyages of Discovery — Martin's History of Louisiana — Haktcd on 
Dyspepsia — Bank of the United States. — Terms, five dollars per amuon. 

XL. EVANS'S MILLWRIGHT'S and MILLER'S GUIDE, new edi- 
tion, with additions. By Dr. Thomas P. Jones. In 8vo. with plates. 

XLL HISTORICAL, GEOGRAPHIC AL, and STATISTIC AL AMERI- 
CAN ATLAS. Folio. 

XLII. Major LONG'S EXPEDITION to the SOURCES of the MISSIS- 
SIPPI, 2 vols. 8vo. 

XLIII. The HISTORY of LOUISIANA, particularly of the Cession of 
that Colony to the United States of North America; with an Introductory 



6 Valuable Works in Medicine, Surgery, and Chemistry, 

Essay on the Constitution and Government of the United States, by M. de 
Marbois, Peer of France, translated from the French by an American 
citizen. In 1 vol. 8vo. 

Valuable Works in Medicine, Surgery, and Chemistry, 

I. LECTURES on INFLAMMATION, exhibiting a view of the General 
Doctrines, Pathological and Practical, of Medical Surgery. By John Thomp- 
son, M. D., F. R. S. E. Second American Edition. 

II. BROUSSAIS on CHRONIC INFLAMMATIONS. Translated from 
the French, in 2 vols. 8vo. Nearly ready. 

By the same Author. 
IK. A TREATISE onPHYSIOLOGY, applied to PATHOLOGY. Trans- 
lated by John Bell, M. D. and R. La Roche, M. D. 2d ed. with additions. 

IV. EXAMINATION of MEDICAL DOCTRINES and SYSTEMS of 
NOSOLOGY, preceded by propositions containing the substance of Physiolo- 
gical Medicine. From the third edition. Translated by Isaac Hays, M. D. 
and R. E. Griffith, M. D. In 2 vols. 8vo. In the -press, 

V. CHEMICAL MANIPULATION. Instruction to Students on the 
Methods of Performing Experiments of Demonstration or Research, with ac 
curacy and success. Bv Michael Faraday, F. R. S. First American from 
the 2d London edit. Vvith addition? by J. K. Mitchell, M. D. In the press, 

VI. SURGICAL MEMOIRS of the RUSSIAN CAMPAIGN. Trans 
lated from the French of Baron Larrey. Nearly ready, 

vil. CLINICAL ILLUSTRATIONS of FEVER, comprising a Report 
of Cases Treated at the London Fever Hospital, 1828-29. By Alexander 
Tweedie, M. D. Member of the Royal College of Physicians, &c. &c. 8vo. 

VIII. PARSONS on ANATOMICAL PREPARATIONS, in 8vo. Mit! 

plates. . Nearly ready. , ^ . . , r x. -ni - 

IX The PR\CT1CE of MEDICINE, upon the Principles of the Physio- 
loo-ical Doctrine, by J. G. Coster, M. D. Translated from the French. 

X COLLES-S SURGICAL ANATOMY. Second American edition. 
xi. PATHOLOGICAL and PRACTICAL RESEARCHES on DIS- 
EASES of the BRAIN and SPINAL CORD. By John Abercrombie, M. D. 

"We have here a work of authority, and one whicli does credit to the author and his 
country. — j\'orth Amer. Med. and Surg. Jo urn. 

By the same SvAhor. 

\II PATHOLOGICAL and PRACTICAL RESEARCHES on DL< 
E\SES of the STOMACH, the INTESTINAL CANAL, the LIVER, and 
other VISCERA of the ABDOMEN. . ^ ui k 

*« \Ye have now closed a very long review of a very valuable ^vork, and although 
we have endeavoured to condense into our pages a great mass of important matter, n\ e 
fppl that our author has not vet received justice"— 3/e^t//co-C/i/»v/v^ic«Z ?f IJC^^ c tm o 
feeUh^at °^( ^^^^ jq^^ ^L EXPOSITION of the PHYSICAL SIG>^S of DIS- 
EASES of the LUNGS and PLEURA: Illustrating their Pathology and Faci- 
litating- their Diagnosis. By Charles J. Williams, M. D. In 8v«. with plates. 

« If we are not greatly mistiken, it will lead to a better understanding, and a more 
correct estimate of the ^•alue of auscultation, than any thing that has yet appeared. -Am. 

•"^^XIVrBECLARD'S GENERAL ANATOMY. Translated by J. Togno, 

*XV'. A TREATISE on FEVER. By Southv/ood Smith, M. D. Physi- 
cian to the London Fever Hospital. . 

« No work has been more lauded by the Reviews than the Treatise on Fevers, b> 
Southwood Smith. Dr. Johnson, the editor of the Medlco-Ch.rurgical Review, says, It 
fs the bes?we have ever perused on the subject of fever, and in our conscience^, we be- 
lieve it the best that ever flowed from the pen of physician in any age or in any countrj . 

'"tvf VfMblR on the TREATMENT of VENEREAL DISEASES 
WITHOUT MERCURY, employed at the Military Hospital ot the vai ac 



Published by Carey ^ Lea. 7 

Grace. Translated from the French of H. M. J. Desruelles, M. D. &c. To which 
is added, Observations by G. J. Guthrie, Esq. and various documents, show- 
ing the results of this Mode of Treatment, in Great Britain, France, Germany, 
and America, 1 vol. 8vo. 

XVII. PRINCIPLES of MILITARY SURGERY, comprising Observa- 
tions on the Arrangements, Police, and Practice of Hospitals, and on the His- 
tory, Treatment, and Anomalies of Variola and Syphilis 5 illustrated with cases 
and dissections. By Jojin Hennen, M. D., F. R. S. E. Inspector of Military 
Hospitals — first American from the third London edition, with Life of the 
Author, by his son. Dr. John Hennen. 

" The value of Dr. Hennen's work is too well appreciated to need any praise of ours, 
AVe were only required then, to bring the third edition before the notice, of x)ur readers; 
and having- done this, we shall merely add, that the volume merits a place in every library, 
and that no military surgeon ought to be without it." — Medical Gazette. 

XVIII. A TREATISE on PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY, by W^illiAm 
E. Horner, M. D. Adj. Prof, of Anatomy in the University of Pennsylvania. 

*' We can conscientiously commend it to the members of the profession, as a satisfactory, 
interesting, and instructive view of the subjects discussed, and as well adapted to aid 
them in forming a correct apprecation of the diseased conditions they are called on to 
relieve." — American Joicnial of the Medical Science^ Jfo, 9. 

XIX. A New Edition of a TREATISE of SPECIAL and GENERAL 
ANATOMY, by the same author, 2 vols. 8vo. 

XX. ' A New Edition of a TREATISE on PRACTICAL ANATOMY, by 
the same author. 

XXI. AMERICAN DISPENSATORY, Eighth Edition, Improved and 
greatly Enlarged. By John Redman Coxe, M. D. Professor of Materia Me- 
dica and Pharmacy in the L^niversity of Pennsylvania. In 1 vol. 8vo. 

XXII. An ESSAY on REMITTENT and INTERMITTENT DIS- 
EASES, including gesierically Marsh Fever and Neuralgia — comprising under 
the former, various anomalies, obscurities, and consequences, and under a 
new systematic view of the latter, treating of tic douloureux, sciatica, head- 
ache, ophthalmia, tooth-ache, palsy, and many other modes and consequences 
of this generic disease^ by John Macculloch, M. D., F. R. S. &c. &c. 
Physician in Ordinary to his Royal Highness Prince Leopold, of Saxe Cobourg. 

" In rendering Dr. Macculloch's work more accessible to the profession, we are con- 
scious that we are doing the state some service." — Med. Chir, Reviexu. 

^ " We most strongly recommend Dr. Macculloch's treatise to the attention of our me- 
dical brethren, as presenting a most valuable mass of information, on a most important 
subject." — J\r. Ji. Med. and Surg. Journal. 

XXIIL CAZENAVE and SCHEDEL, on DISEASES of the SKIN. 
Translated from the French. In 8vo. 

XXIV. The PRACTICE of PHYSIC, by W. P. Dewees, M. D. Adjunct 
Pi-ofessor of Mid\yifery in the University of Pennsylvania, 2 vols. 8vo. 

" We have no hesitation in recommending it as decidedly one of the best svstems of 
medicine extant. The tenor of the work in general reflects the highest honour on Dr.De- 
wees's talents, industry, and capacity for the execution of tlie arduous task which he had 
undertaken. It is one of the most able and satisfactory works which modern times have 
produced, and will be a standard authority."~Zo72r/. jMed. and Surg. .Tourn. Aud: 1830. 

XXV. DEWEES on the DISEASES of CHILDREN. 3d ed. In 8vo. 
The objects of this work are, 1st, to teach those who have the charge of children, cither 

as parent or guardian, the most approved methods of securing and improving their physi- 
cal powers. This is attempted by pointing out the duties which the parent or\he guardian 
owes for this purpose, to this interesting, but helpless class of beings, and the manner by 
which theu' duties shall be fulfilled. And 2d, to render available a long experience to these 
objects of our aftections, when they become diseased. In attempting this, the author h.is 
avoided as much as was possible, "technicality;" and has given, if he docs not flatter himself 
too much, to each disease of which he treats, its appropriate and designating characters, 
with a fidelity tliat will prevent any two being contounded, together with the best mode 
vv^^r*^ ^*'^"^' ^^^^^ either his own experience or that of othWs has suggested. 

XXVI. DEWEES on the DISEASES of FEMALES. M\ ed. with addi 
tions. In 8vo. 



8 Valuable Works in Medicine, Surgery, and Chemistry. 

XXVII. DEWEES'S SYSTEM of MIDWIFERY. 4th ed, with additions, 

XXVIII. CHAPMAN'S THERAPEUTICS and MATERIA MEDICA. 

5th ed. with additions. 

XXIX. The AMERICAN JOURNAL of the MEDICAL SCIENCES, 

No. XV. for May, 1831, Among the Collaborators of this work are Professors 
Bigelow, Channing, Chapman, Coxe, Davidge, De Butts, Dewees, Dickson, 
Dudley, Francis, Gibson, Godman, Hare, Henderson, Horner, Hosack, Jack- 
son, Macneven, Mott, Mussej, Physick, Potter, Sewall, Warren, and Wor- 
thingtonj Drs. Daniell, Emerson, Fearn, Griffith, Hays, Hayward, Ives, Jack- 
son, King, Moultrie, Spence, Ware, and Wright. — Terras^ five dollarsper an. 

XXX. HUTIN'S MANUAL of PHYSIOLOGY, in 12mo. 

XXXI. MANUAL of MATERIA MEDICA and PHARMACY. By H. 
M. Edwards, M. D. and P. Vavasseur, M. D. comprising a concise Descrip- 
tion of the articles used in Medicine; their Physical and Chemical Properties; 
the Botanical Characters of the Medicinal Plants; the Formulae for the Prin- 
cipal Officinal Preparations of the American, Parisian, Dublin, &c. Pharmaco- 
poeias; with Observations on the Proper Mode of- Combining and Administer- 
ing Remedies. Translated from the French, with numerous Additions and 
Corrections, and adapted to the Practice of Medicine and to the Art of Phar- 
macy in the United States. Dy Joseph Togno, M. D. Member of the Phila- 
delphia Medical Society, and E. Durand, Member of the Philadelphia Col- 
lege of Pharmacy. 

" It contains all the pharmaceutical information that the physician can desire, and in 
addition, a larger mass of information, in relation to the properties, &c. of the different 
articles and preparations employed in medicine, than any of the dispensatories, and we 
think will entirely supersede all these publications in the library of the physician." — J[7n. 
Journ. of the Medical Sciences. 

XXXII. An EPITOME of the PHYSIOLOGY, GENERAL ANATOMY, 
and PATHOLOGY of BICHAT. By Thomas Henderson, M. D. Professor 
of the Theory and Practice of Medicine in Columbia College, Washington 
City. 1 vol. 8vo. 

""The epitome of Dr. Henderson ought and must find a place in the library of every 
physician desirous of useful knowledge for himself, or of being instrumental in imparting 
it to others, whose studies he is expected to superintend." — JV*. A. Med. and Surg. Journ. 
JVo. 15. 

XXXIIL ELLIS' MEDICAL FORMULARY. The Medical Formulary, 
being a collection of prescriptions derived from the writings and practice of 
many of the most eminent physicians in America and Europe. By Benjamin 
Ellis, M. -D. 3d edition, with additions. 

"We would especially recommend it to our brethren in distant parts of the country, whose 
insulated situations may prevent them from having access to the many authorities wdiich 
have been consulted in aiTanging materials for this work." — PMl. Med. and Phys. Journ. 

XXXI Y. MARTINET'S MANUAL of PATHOLOGY, containing the 
Symptoms, Diagnosis, and Morbid Characters of Diseases, &c, 2d ed. 1 vol. 12mo- 

XXXV. The ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, and DISEASES of the TEETH. 
By Thomas Bell, F. R. S., F. L. S. &c. In 1 vol. 8vo. with plates. 

" We must now take leave of Mr. Bell, whose work we have no doubt will become a 
class book on the important subject of dental surgery. "^Medico- CMrurgicalPevieTv. 

XXXVI. W^ISTAR'S ANATOMY. 5th ed. 2 vols. 8vo. 

XXXVII. GIBSON'S SURGERY. 2d ed. improved and enlarged. 2vols.8vo. 

PREPJIRING FOR PRESS. 

A CYCLOPEDIA of PRACTICAL MEDICINE, Comprising Treatises 
on the Nature and Treatment of Diseases, Materia Medica and Therapeutics, 
Medical Jurisprudence, &c. &c. Edited by John Forbes, M. D., F. R. S., 
Alexander Tweedie, M. D. and John Conolly, M. D. 

This work will make five or six large Bvo. volumes, and will be published at intervals of 
three months. For the revision and adaptation of the work to this country, the publishers 
have engaged the assistance of many of our most distinguished physicians. A detailed 
prospectus will shortly be published. 



"^^ 



LE N '06 



^ 



^^■■■■■■■■I 



